TW498290B - Information collection system, mechanical eyeball, vision device, image sensor, and interlocking device - Google Patents

Information collection system, mechanical eyeball, vision device, image sensor, and interlocking device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW498290B
TW498290B TW90107654A TW90107654A TW498290B TW 498290 B TW498290 B TW 498290B TW 90107654 A TW90107654 A TW 90107654A TW 90107654 A TW90107654 A TW 90107654A TW 498290 B TW498290 B TW 498290B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
aforementioned
image
array computing
digital image
pixels
Prior art date
Application number
TW90107654A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Yoshiaki Ajioka
Original Assignee
Ecchandes Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2000174616A external-priority patent/JP2001359082A/en
Application filed by Ecchandes Inc filed Critical Ecchandes Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW498290B publication Critical patent/TW498290B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Studio Devices (AREA)

Abstract

As shown in Fig. 1, the information collection system consists of at least one mechanical eyeballs (1) and at least one user terminals (4) where the mechanical eyeballs and the user terminals are connected through a network. As shown in Fig. 10, the mechanical eyeball (1) consists of a moving camera (10), a vision device (2), and a communication device (7). As shown in Fig 14, by using the vision device (2) to search object and control the panning, the tilting, the rolling, and the zooming of the moving camera (10), the moving camera (10) can film an object in a wide range at a high power so to allow the user to find the target object faster and more accurately. Also, since the vision device (2) is able to identify the type of an object, the communication device (7) can transmit only the filmed moving images of a specific type of object.

Description

498290 '条丨 ·、 ··: :夸於 五 A7 B7 發明說明(ί ) 【技術區域】 本發明係有關利用人工眼球來追蹤物體以產生僅映出 物體影像之資訊收集系統,詳言之,係有關視覺裝置藉由 具有搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦用機構之移動式攝影機所拍 下之動態影像’而產生物體之正規化影像、種類、位置、 大小、及個數,並且視覺裝置會控制移動式攝影機,以讓 物體在動態影像中央被拍大,而通訊裝置則經由有線及無 線之通訊網路,將視覺裝置自背景所分離出之物體區域之 影像傳送至使用者終端機。 【習知技術】 習知’有許多使用移動式攝影機之攝影裝置之硏究報 告(參照特開昭63-54699、特開平3-164341、特開平5-297325)。尤其是近年用於追蹤高速移動物體之攝影裝置中 有開發出lms視覺之回饋系統(參照中坊嘉宏、石井抱、石 川正俊’“利用超平行·超高速視覺之lms目標追蹤之攝 影系統’’,日本機器人學會誌,Vol.15,Νο·3,ρρ·417-421 ’ 1997)。然而,因該等移動式攝影機利用具有習知馬達之 驅動系統’故有裝置本身大,或動作被限制等問題點。 因此’用於解決該問題之方法中,球狀之多自由度馬 達有用(例如參考特開平6-210585 ;日刊工業新聞,平成11 年12月15日,第6頁)。又,多自由度馬達中,藉使用超 音波馬達來取代習知馬達,多自由度馬達之機構及控制將 變得單純(特開昭62-228392 ;遠山茂樹,“球面超音波馬 達之開發” ,Tribologist,第40卷,第8號,ρρ·627-63卜 本紙張尺度顧㈣規格(21G X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 'Articles 丨 ·, ·· :: Exaggerated Five A7 B7 Invention Description (ί) [Technical Area] The present invention relates to an information collection system that uses artificial eyeballs to track objects to produce only images of the objects. Specifically, It refers to the normalized image, type, position, size, and number of objects produced by a vision device through a moving camera with a pan, tilt, roll, and zoom mechanism. The vision device will The mobile camera is controlled so that the object is captured in the center of the moving image, and the communication device transmits the image of the object area separated from the background by the visual device to the user terminal via the wired and wireless communication network. [Knowledge technique] There are many research reports on photography devices using mobile cameras (see JP-A-Sho 63-54699, JP-A-Heisei 3-164341, and JP-A Hei 5-297325). Especially in recent years, the imaging device for tracking high-speed moving objects has developed a feedback system for lms vision (refer to Zhongfang Jiahong, Ishiibo, Ishikawa Masatoshi '"Photographic system for lms target tracking using super-parallel and ultra-high-speed vision", Journal of the Japan Robotics Society, Vol.15, No. 3, ρρ · 417-421 '1997). However, since these mobile cameras use a drive system with a conventional motor, the device itself is large, or its movement is restricted, etc. Problem points. Therefore, in the method for solving this problem, a spherical multi-degree-of-freedom motor is useful (for example, refer to JP 6-210585; Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, December 15, 2011, page 6). Also, In the multi-degree-of-freedom motor, by using an ultrasonic motor instead of a conventional motor, the mechanism and control of the multi-degree-of-freedom motor will become simple (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-228392; Motoki Toyama, "Development of a Spherical Ultrasonic Motor", Tribologist , Vol. 40, No. 8, ρρ · 627-63 Paper size Gu specifications (21G X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ____ B7__ 五、發明說明(Y) • 1995 ;特開平 7-80793 ;特開平 9-54356 ;特開平 11-18459 :佐佐江啓介、大築康生、三木修武、黑崎泰充,“使用 壓電元件之摩擦驅動型多自由度球面馬達之開發”, [onlme],平成10年1月,川崎重工技報第136號抄錄,[ 平成 12 年 1月 20 日檢索],網際網路 <URLhttp//www.khi.coJp/tech/njl36g07.htm>)。又,也有開發出 使用該超音波馬達之移動式攝影機(參照特開平11-84526)。 其他也有開發出不用習知超音波馬達之多自由度壓電致動 器(參照特願2000-243635)。若使用該壓電致動器,則因電 力消耗低且控制裝置簡單,故能製造可裝載於行動電話上 之小型移動式攝影機。 另一方面,用以處理攝影機所拍下之影像之視覺晶片 或影像感測器之開發也正進行中。例如,CLIP4(參照 M.J.B.Duff, “CLIP4:A large scale integrated circuit array parallel processor” ,Proc. IJCPR-3,VoL 4,pp.728-733, 1976)、MPP(參照 K.E.Batcher,“MPP:A high-speed image processor ,L.SnyDer,L.HJamieson,D.B.Gannon, H.J.Siegel , ed. , Algorithmically specialized parallel computers,pp.59-68,Academic press,1985)、S3PE(Simple and Smart Sensory Processing Element)視覺晶片(參照小室孝 ,鈴木伸介,石井抱,石川正俊,“使用泛用處理用元件 之超平行•超高速視覺晶片之設計”,電子情報通訊學會 論文誌,Vol· J81-D-I,Νο·2,ρρ·70-76,1998)、人工網膜 LSI(參照特開平6-139361、特開平1Μ77889)、一般視覺處 5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' I I I----- I I I I--It· — —--I--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 __B7 _ 五、發明說明(j ) ---------- I--I · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 理(GVPP,Generic Visual Perception Processor)(Vision Chip’s Circuitry Has Its Eye Out For You. TechWeb News j 1997-09-13· [online]· CMP Media Inc·,1999.[檢索時間·· 1999-12-19]·檢索自網際網路:<URL:http://www.techweb.com/ wire/news/1997/09/ 0913vision.htin1>^、視覺晶片(’Eye,Chip Tracks Movement. Wired News j 1999-04-10, [online]. Wired Ventures Inc. and affiliated companies » 1999.[檢索時間: 1999-12-19]·檢索自網際網路:<URL:http:// www .wired.com/news/news/technology/story/19046.html〉)等。 以上雖可進行如邊緣檢測及光流(optical flow)檢測等簡 單處理,但是封裝優先之結果,有很多問題發生,如使用 1位元運算電路、使用類比電路、僅進行積和計算、必須 使用用以取得全體LSI (大型積體電路)同步之SIMD(Single Instruction Stream Multi Data Stream)型之多處理器、在因影 像處理之機構及運算法不連貫而需複數個視覺晶片達成複 數個影像處理上有困難、或限定於讓物體及攝影環境容易 二値化之情況等。又,雖藉由將S3PE連接於移動式攝影機 ,即可進行高速移動物體之追蹤,但S3PE除了會受到攝影 環境及移動物體速度之影響之外,且對於靜止物體及複數 個物體必須使用其他裝置來進行影像處理。又,雖有開發 出利用人工網膜LSI以傳送取出後之物體影像之無線影像 通訊裝置,但是因該無線影像通訊裝置上沒有控制移動式 攝影機之功能,故無線影像通訊裝置之用途就被限定於使 用固疋式攝影機之監視裝置等。 6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 、 A7 __B7_ 五、發明說明(L[〇498290 A7 ____ B7__ 5. Description of the Invention (Y) • 1995; JP-A 7-80793; JP-A 9-54356; JP-A 11-18459: Sazue Keisuke, Otsuki Yasunori, Miki Xiuwu, and Kurosaki Taichon, "Used Development of Friction-Driven Multi-DOF Spherical Motors for Piezoelectric Elements ", [onlme], January 2010, Transcript of Kawasaki Heavy Industries Gazette No. 136, [Retrieved January 20, 2012], Internet < URLhttp // www.khi.coJp / tech / njl36g07.htm >). In addition, mobile cameras using this ultrasonic motor have also been developed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-84526). Others have also developed multi-degree-of-freedom piezoelectric actuators that do not require a conventional ultrasonic motor (see Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-243635). When this piezoelectric actuator is used, since the power consumption is low and the control device is simple, it is possible to manufacture a small mobile camera that can be mounted on a mobile phone. On the other hand, the development of vision chips or image sensors for processing images captured by cameras is also underway. For example, CLIP4 (refer to MJBDuff, "CLIP4: A large scale integrated circuit array parallel processor", Proc. IJCPR-3, VoL 4, pp.728-733, 1976), MPP (refer to KEBatcher, "MPP: A high -speed image processor, L.SnyDer, L.HJamieson, DBGannon, HJSiegel, ed., Algorithmically specialized parallel computers, pp.59-68, Academic press, 1985), S3PE (Simple and Smart Sensory Processing Element) vision chip (Refer to Takamori Komura, Nobuyuki Suzuki, Nobuyoshi Ishii, Masatoshi Ishikawa, "Design of Ultra-Parallel and Ultra-High-Speed Vision Chips Using General-Purpose Processing Elements", Papers of the Institute of Electronic Information and Communications, Vol. J81-DI, No. 2, ρρ · 70-76, 1998), artificial reticulation LSI (refer to JP-A-6-139361, JP-A-1M77889), general vision section 5 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 'II I ----- III I--It · — —-- I --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 __B7 _ V. Description of the invention (j) ------ ---- I--I · II (Please read the note on the back first (Please fill in this page again) (GVPP, Generic Visual Perception Processor) (Vision Chip's Circuitry Has Its Eye Out For You. TechWeb News j 1997-09-13 · [online] · CMP Media Inc ·, 1999. [Search time · 1999-12-19] Retrieved from the Internet: < URL: http: //www.techweb.com/ wire / news / 1997/09 / 0913vision.htin1 > ^, vision chip ('Eye, Chip Tracks Movement. Wired News j 1999-04-10, [online]. Wired Ventures Inc. and affiliated companies »1999. [Search time: 1999-12-19] · Retrieved from the Internet: < URL: http: // www.wired.com/news/news/technology/story/19046.html>), etc. Although the above can perform simple processing such as edge detection and optical flow detection, as a result of packaging priority, many problems occur, such as using a 1-bit arithmetic circuit, using an analog circuit, performing only product and calculation, and must be used. A multi-processor of the SIMD (Single Instruction Stream Multi Data Stream) type for synchronizing the entire LSI (Large Integral Circuit). In the case of inconsistent image processing mechanisms and algorithms, multiple vision chips are required to achieve multiple image processing. Difficulties may arise, or it may be limited to situations where objects and the shooting environment are likely to become binary. In addition, although S3PE can be connected to a mobile camera to track high-speed moving objects, in addition to being affected by the shooting environment and the speed of moving objects, S3PE must use other devices for stationary objects and multiple objects. For image processing. In addition, although a wireless image communication device using an artificial retina LSI to transmit an image of an object after removal has been developed, since the wireless image communication device does not have a function of controlling a mobile camera, the use of the wireless image communication device is limited to Surveillance devices using solid-state cameras. 6 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290, A7 __B7_ V. Description of the invention (L [〇

該視覺晶片上問題很多,係因LSI之封裝,尤其是指 集積度之關係。即,說,若LSI可併入更多之電晶體,則 視覺晶片就可對具更多像素之動態影像即時執行更高階功 能之影像處理。然而,因近年來由於LSI技術之急速進步 ,而已開發出高速且高集積度之LSI。LSI之集積度,係並 不單是設計法則之細微化技術,而是藉由三維LSI技術, 尤其是晶圓之貼合技術(例如,參照特開平5-160340、特開 平 6-268154、Koyanagi,M.,Kurino,H.,LEE,K-W., Sakuma,K.,Miyakawa,N.,Itani,H., ‘Future System-on-Silicon LSI Chips’ ,:[EEE MICRO,1998,Vol.18,No.4 ,PP.17-22)之開發,LSI將變得更具高集積度,故習知分別 封裝於各LSI上之數位電路,很容易地就被封裝在1個LSI 上。又,因用於堆疊複數個晶片之技術(例如,參照日經微 型元件,2000年6月號,ρρ·62-79、日經微型元件,2000 年6月號,pp.157-164、日經微型元件,2000年6月號, PP.176)被開發出來,故LSI設計者比習知三維LSI技術較 爲容易地設計電子電路。又,若使用三維LSI技術,則LSIThere are many problems on this vision chip due to the packaging of the LSI, especially the relationship of the degree of integration. That is, if the LSI can incorporate more transistors, the vision chip can perform higher-level image processing on a moving image with more pixels in real time. However, due to the rapid progress of LSI technology in recent years, high-speed and high-integration LSIs have been developed. The integration degree of LSI is not only the miniaturization technology of design rules, but also the three-dimensional LSI technology, especially the wafer bonding technology (for example, refer to JP 5-160340, JP 6-268154, Koyanagi, M., Kurino, H., LEE, KW., Sakuma, K., Miyakawa, N., Itani, H., 'Future System-on-Silicon LSI Chips', [EEE MICRO, 1998, Vol. 18, No.4, PP.17-22) development, LSI will become more highly integrated, so the digital circuits that are conventionally packaged on each LSI are easily packaged on a single LSI. Also, because of the technology used to stack multiple wafers (for example, refer to the Nikkei Micro Devices, June 2000 issue, ρρ · 62-79, Nikkei Micro Devices, June 2000 issue, pp.157-164, Japan Micro-components were developed in June 2000 (PP.176), so it is easier for LSI designers to design electronic circuits than the three-dimensional LSI technology. When three-dimensional LSI technology is used, LSI

設計者可縮短配線長度,因此LSI設計者可容易地設計LSI 〇 有關LSI之設計及製造之現實問題中,隨著時鐘 (clock)訊號之頻率提高,時鐘脈衝相位差(clock-skew)及訊 號之傳送延遲時間(propagation delay time)之程度將更增加 。使用類比電路之視覺晶片被積極硏究之理由,係與其說 LSI之集積度未達需要量,還不如說是爲了即時處理數位 7 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明(j ) ,電路不斷變化之環境,而必須提高時鐘訊號之頻率,因此 不僅取得LSI全體问步變得有困難,而且發熱量也增加。 當然讓LSI全體取得同步變得困難之主因,係在於習知視 覺晶片一直頻繁地執f了界限値計算、直方圖(histogram)計算 、區域分割等大範圍處理。 因此,本發明者開發了視覺裝置(參照例如.,特願平 11-253634,國際公開號碼 WOOO/16259、特願 2000-269500) ,用以控制移動式攝影機且做影像處理。該視覺裝置係用 於藉由控制移動式攝影機之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦之機 構,以搜尋物體並進行物體之影像處理者。視覺裝置所進 行之影像處理之大部分係局部處理,且該等局部處理係藉 由在二維格子狀上所排列之陣列運算裝置來平行地執行。 若將陣列運算裝置封裝於LSI,則每個陣列運算裝置將設 計成可與鄰接之陣列運算裝置做非同步之通訊。藉此,配 線圖案變得非常單純,且配線長度變短,故LSI不但增加 電晶體之封裝面積,也可使消耗電力降低。又,全部的陣 列運算裝置都未必要同步。但是當LSI之規模變大時,爲 了正確地執行暫停處理等,必須對全部的陣列運算裝置都 提供相同週期之時鐘訊號及相位差小之重設訊號。 , 若考慮以上事項,則値得期待根據現在可利用之大型 積體電路技術、及三維大型積體電路技術,將能開發出由 視覺裝置及如光電二極體之攝影元件所組合而成之處理器 。又,藉將該處理器裝載於多自由度馬達上,而可製造出 由視覺裝置所控制之移動式攝影機。 8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------------------訂—-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 , ‘ A7 ____B7_ 五、發明說明(!〇) ----I--------I · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 又,最近有一硏究發表了,係自安裝在眼鏡上之固定 式電荷耦合裝置型(CCD,charge coupled device)攝影機所拍 下之影像使用過濾器檢測出邊緣後,藉著用電極陣列端子 直接將邊緣影像之電氣訊號傳送至腦右後葉視覺區而實現 了人工視覺(Computer Helps Blind Man ‘See’· Wired News, 200-01-17. [online]. Wired Ventures Inc·、 and affiliated companies,2000.[檢索時間:2000-01-20].檢索自網際網路 :<URL:http:// www.wired.com/ news/ technology/ 0,1282, 3369卜00.html>)。因患者之視野非常地狹窄,故患者必須 讓頸部移動以搜尋物體,且只能讀在距離1.5公尺左右之 位置之約5公分大之字。但由於該硏究之成功,今後以盲 人及視覺障礙者爲中心,對用於實現廣視野且高解析度之 人工視覺之埋入式人工眼球之期望將提高。 線! 若考慮以上事項,則期待能製造出人工眼球,其利用 視覺裝置所控制之多自由度馬達所裝載之移動式攝影機搜 尋物體,並所拍下之物體之正規化影像、種類、位置、大 小及位置之變化能直接傳送到腦中。 近年來隨以高速有線通訊爲中心之網際網路技術及寬 頻無線通訊技術之發達,已經可向遠處傳送動態影像。尤 其是由於IMT-2000(DS-CDMA及MC-CDMA)及對應藍芽 (bluetooth)規格之行動電話之上市,任何人都可隨時隨地便 宜地傳送或接收動態影像之環境已具備(例如,參照特開平 6-233020、特開平 7-312783、特開平 8-163085、特開平 8-294030、特開平 11-346364)。 9 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___B7 — _ 五、發明說明(1 ) 若考慮以上事項’則期待藉由利用裝載有由視覺裝置 所控制之多自由度馬達之移動式攝影機拍攝物體’且視覺 裝置判斷所拍下之物體種類,而使通訊裝置可傳送映出物 體之動態影像。 最後,近年來已開發出高性能之聲音合成裝置(參照特 開平5-053595、特開平5-094196、特開平5-108084)及高性 能之聲音辨識裝置(參照特開平05_002399、特開平05-011798、特開平5-019787)。藉由將該等裝置和喇叭與麥克 風一起裝入導航系統中,讓利用者透過聲音能簡單地利用 導航系統(參照特開平6-20196、特開平8_35846、特開平 11-276516)。 若考慮以上事項’則期待藉由聲音辨識裝置’利用者 可用聲音控制視覺裝置,且利用聲音可得知視覺裝置所識 別之物體種類。 因此,如申請專利範圍之本發明之目之’係藉利用控 制移動式攝影機之視覺裝置,以即使從遠端不一直控制移 動式攝影機,也會將映出物體之動態影像傳送至遠端之使 用者終端機。又,另一目之,係將視覺裝置及攝影元件封 裝在LSI上,並裝入移動式攝影機。 【發明之揭示】 \ 申請專利範圍第1項之發明,係一種資訊收集系統, 由連接於通訊網路之至少1個人工眼球及至少1個使用者 終端機所構成,其特徵在於: 前述人工眼球具有移動式攝影機、視覺裝置及通訊裝 10 I-----I I I 1--^ 0 I---I I--*5^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ------- - B7 _ 五、發明說明(& ) •置;前述移動式攝影機具有用來進行搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及 變焦之機構中之至少1個;前述視覺裝置之特徵,係自前 述移動式攝影機所拍下之動態影像取得數位影像、產生前 述數位影像中之物體種類、位置及個數、及控制用於前述 搖攝、前述俯仰、前述翻滾及前述變焦之前述機構;前述 通訊裝置之特徵,係將前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位 置及前述個數中之一傳送至前述使用者終端機、從前述使 用者終端機接收對應前述搖攝、前述俯仰、前述翻滾及前 述變焦之控制指令後傳送至前述視覺裝置;前述使用者終 端機具有中央控制裝置、顯示器及控制按鈕;而前述中央 控制裝置會從前述通訊裝置接收前述數位影像、前述種類 、前述位置及前述個數中之一,前述顯示器會顯示前述數 位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數中之一,前述使 用者終端機會產生前述控制按鈕上所分配之前述控制指令 ’前述中央控制裝置會將前述控制指令傳送至前述通訊裝 置。前述人工眼球,係具有用於前述搖攝(水平移動)、前 述俯仰(垂直移動)、前述翻滾(扭轉)及前述變焦(望遠)之前 述機構中之一,利用前述移動式攝影機,可將前述物體置 於前述動態影像之中央並以適當之大小加以拍攝。前述視 覺裝置會從前述數位影像中產生前述物體之前述種類、前 述位置及前述個數,並根據前述位置控制前述移動式攝影 機。前述通訊網路係由USB(Universal Serial Bus)、乙太網 路(Ethernet)、ISDN(整合數位通訊網路)、xDSL(Digital Subscriber Line)、ATM(Asynchronous Transfer Mode)及幀中 11 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----I--I 11----· 11 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: •線! 498290 A7 __B7_______ 五、發明說明(1 ) 繼(frame relay)等有線技術、及 IMT-2000(DS-CDMA 及 MC-CDMA)及藍芽等無線技術所構成,前述通訊裝置具有係將 前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數傳送至前 述通訊網路上,並從前述通訊網路接收前述控制指令之機 構。前述使用者終端機可使用具有前述顯示器及前述控制 按鈕之電腦、行動電話、行動資訊終端機及導航系統等° 前述中央控制裝置,係具有對前述通訊網路之通訊功能’ 並將前述種類、前述位置及前述個數輸出至前述顯示器’ 還從前述控制按鈕輸入前述控制指令。本發明中,使前& 視覺裝置一直控制前述移動式攝影機,前述使用者藉以不 需仔細地控制前述移動式攝影機。又,本發明中,因前述 視覺裝置會辨識前述移動式攝影機所拍攝之前述物體種_ ,故人工眼球僅將有關前述使用者欲知之前述物體資訊傳 送到前述使用者終端機。即,因前述使用者終端機僅在拍 攝前述使用者欲知之前述物體時,才將前述資訊輸出至前 述顯示器,故前述使用者不需一直注意顯示器,或前述人 工眼球不需一直佔用前述通訊網路。因此,因本發明讓前 述使用者不受前述移動式攝影機之控制,故有關前述物體 之拍攝及通訊各種問題將獲得適當的解決。 申請專利範圍第2項之發明,係一種資訊收集系統’ 由連接於通訊網路至少1個人工眼球、資料庫及至少1個 使用者終端機所構成,其特徵在於: 前述人工眼球具有移動式攝影機、視覺裝置及通訊裝 置;前述移動式攝影機具有用來進行搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 線! 498290 A7 _______ B7__ 五、發明說明(I Ο) •變焦之機構中之至少1個;前述視覺裝置之特徵,係自前 述移動式攝影機所拍下之動態影像取得數位影像、產生前 述數位影像中之物體種類、位置及個數;前述通訊裝置之 特徵,係將前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個 數中之一傳送至前述資料庫;前述資料庫之特徵,係儲存 前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數;從前述 數位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數產生統計資料 ;及使用檢索鍵檢索前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置 、前述個數及前述統計資料;前述使用者終端機,係具有 中央控制裝置、顯示器及控制按鈕;前述中央控制裝置會 從前述通訊裝置接收前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置 、前述個數及前述統計資料中之一,前述顯示器會顯示前 述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置、前述個數及前述統計 資料中之一,前述使用者終端機會利用前述控制按鈕產生 已被指定之前述檢索鍵;前述中央控制裝置會將前述控制 檢索鍵傳送至前述通訊裝置。前述人工眼球,係利用前述 移動式攝影機(具有用於前述搖攝(水平移動)、前述俯仰(垂 直移動)、前述翻滾(扭轉)及前述變焦(望遠)之前述結構中 之一),可將前述物體置於前述動態影像之中央並以適當之 大小加以拍攝。前述視覺裝置會從前述數位影像中產生前 述物體之前述種類、前述位置及前述個數,並根據前述位 置控制前述移動式攝影機。前述通訊網路係由USB、以太 網路、ISDN、xDSL、ATM及幀中繼等有線技術、及IMT-2000(DS-CDMA及MC-CDMA)及藍芽等無線技術所構成, 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------1--訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 B7 五、發明說明(Μ ) •前述通訊裝置,係具有用以將前述數位影像、前述種類、 前述位置及前述個數傳送至前述通訊網路之機構。前述資 料庫,係使用平均、分散、主成分分析、有限元素法、線 性計劃法及基礎推斷等數理手法,用以從前述數位影像、 前述種類、前述位置及前述個數計算前述統計資料。前述 資料庫中可使用具備如SQL(Structure Query Language)之資 料庫用記述語言之關係資料庫及物件導向資料庫。前述使 用者終端機係使用具有前述顯示器及前述控制按鈕之電腦 、行動電話、行動資訊終端機及導航系統等。前述中央控 制裝置,係具有連上前述通訊網路之通訊功能,將前述種 類、前述位置、前述個數及前述統計資料輸出至前述顯示 器,並從前述控制按鈕輸入前述檢索鍵。本發明中’藉前 述資料庫經長時間儲存前述數位影像、前述種類' 前述位 置及前述個數,以使前述使用者可取得對應前述種類、區 域、場所、季節及日期等前述檢索鍵之前述統計資料。因 此,本發明對於有關前述物體之計算及預測之各種問題將 獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第3項之發明,係如申請專利範圍第1 項或第2項之資訊收集系統,其中前述使用者終端機至少 具備裝有喇叭之聲音合成裝置或裝有麥克風之聲音辨識裝 置中之一,前述聲音合成裝置係將前述種類、前述位置、 前述個數及前述統計資料轉換爲聲音訊號;前述聲音辨識 裝置係利用前述麥克風將所收集之聲音轉換爲前述控制指 令及前述檢索鍵。前述使用者終端機可使用具備前述顯示 14 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I---------· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: 498290 五、發明說明(Ά ---------------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •器、前述喇叭、前述控制按鈕及具有前述麥克風之電腦、 行動電話、行動資訊終端機及導航系統等。前述中央控制 裝置,係具有連上前述通訊網路之通訊功能,將前述種類 、前述位置、前述個數及前述統計資料輸出至前述顯示器 及前述聲音合成裝置,並從前述控制按鈕及前述聲音辨識 裝置輸入前述控制指令及前述檢索鍵。前述聲音合成裝置 ,係將前述種類、前述位置、前述個數及前述統計轉換爲 前述聲音訊號,並輸出至前述喇叭。前述聲音辨識裝置, 係利用前述麥克風將所收集之前述聲音轉換爲前述控制指 令及前述檢索鍵。本發明之使用者,不必透過前述顯示器 及前述控制按鈕,就可使用前述使用者終端機。因此本發 明對於有關使用者介面之各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第4項之發明,係具備移動式攝影機及 視覺裝置之人工眼球,其特徵在於··前述移動式攝影機具 有搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦機構中之至少1項;前述視覺 裝置’係具備從前述移動式攝影機拍攝之動態影像中取之 數位影像之裝置、辨識前述數位影像中之物體種類裝置、 檢測出前述物體位置,大小及傾斜度之裝置、計算前述物 體個數之裝置、控制進行前述搖攝、前述俯仰、前述翻滾 及前述變焦之前述機構之裝置、及輸出前述數位影像、前 述種類、前述位置及前述個數之裝置。前述移動式攝影機 係藉組合複數個圓柱體及1個馬達,並利用多自由度馬達 ’侍以貫現前述搖攝(水平移動)、前述俯仰(垂直移動)、即 述翻滾(扭轉)及前述變焦(望遠)之前述結構。因此前述移動 15 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _ _ B7 五、發明說明(1)) 式攝影機可將前述物體置於前述動態影像中央,並以辨識 前述物體所需之大小拍攝。前述視覺裝置,係進行邊緣資 訊產生裝置、邊緣資訊形成裝置、物體/背景分離裝置、位 置/大小檢測裝置、位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置、模式匹配 (pattern matching)裝置等局部平行影像處理’藉以從前述數 位影像分離出前述物體,辨識前述種類,檢測前述位置、 前述大小及前述傾斜度,並計算前述個數。又,前述視覺 裝置,係除了使用前述位置來控制前述移動式攝影機之前 述搖攝、前述俯仰、前述翻滾及前述變焦外,還使用從外 部輸入之控制指令來控制前述搖攝 '前述俯仰、前述翻滾 及前述變焦。本發明,係當前述物體之前述位置無法事先 知道時及當前述物體正在移動時,也能將前述移動式攝影 機朝向前述物體。因此本發明’係因讓使用者不受前述移 動式攝影機之控制,故有關前述物體之攝影之各種問題將 獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第5項之發明,係具有通訊裝置之如申 請專利範圍第4項之人工眼球,其中前述通訊裝置具備壓 縮前述數位影像之裝置,及透過通訊網路傳送壓縮後之前 述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數之裝置。前 述通訊裝置係向前述通訊網路傳送壓縮後之前述數位影像 、前述種類、前述位置及前述個數,並自前述通訊網路接 收前述控制指令。爲了壓縮前述數位影像,前述通訊裝置 使用前述視覺裝置所辨識之前述種類,以選擇映出有特定 的前述種類之前述物體之前述數位影像。再者,前述通訊 16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -I I----1!!* ^^. · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) t^J. -線 498290 A7 ___ _B7 ___ 五、發明說明(#) •裝置能將在選擇後之前述數位影像中前述物體所佔區域之 外的部分遮蓋(mask)後傳送。又,前述通訊裝置也可使用 MPEG(Moving Picture Experts Group)及 JPEG(Joint Photographic coding Experts Group)等影像壓縮技術,以縮小 前述數位影像之資料量。本發明可僅將前述物體所被拍下 之前述數位影像傳送至前述通訊網路。因此本發明係除了 減輕前述通訊網路之負荷,也因能通知本發明之使用者有 無前述物體,故有關前述物體之拍攝及通訊之各種問題將 獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第6項之發明,係具備刺激產生器、電 極陣列端子、連接器及電池之申請專利範圍第4項之人工 眼球,其特徵在於:前述刺激產生器,係將前述視覺裝置 所產生之前述物體之正規化影像、前述種類、前述位置、 前述大小及前述位置之變化轉換爲電氣刺激;前述電極陣 列端子係透過前述連接器將前述電氣刺激傳至腦部。前述 刺激產生器,係利用D/A轉換電路,將前述物體之前述正 規化影像、前述種類、前述位置、前述大小、及前述位置 變化轉換爲可適當刺激神經細胞之前述電氣刺激。前述電 極排列端子之電極係使用白金,且前述電極排列端子被埋 入前述腦部之後頭葉、側頭葉、頭頂葉及前頭葉等。前述 電池係使用如鋰離子電池可重複充電者及如燃料電池放電 時間長者。藉自前述連接器脫離,本發明之使用者很容易 拆下或更換前述移動式攝影機、前述視覺裝置、前述刺激 產生器及前述電池。本發明係因將由前述移動式攝影機及 17 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) 雇 ~' ' ---------------------訂-----I---線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ____B7__— 五、發明說明(1夕) •前述視覺裝置所搜尋之前述物體之前述正規化影像、前述 種類、前述位置、前述大小及前述位置之變化’轉換爲即 述電氣刺激,並直接傳至前述使用者之前述腦部’故前述 使用者,係將不受前述數位影像中之前述物體之前述大小 及周圍環境影響而迷失’而能容易發現並辨識前述物體° 因此,本發明,係因能讓前述利用者在短時間內且高準確 率下辨識前述物體,故有關人工視覺之各種問題將獲得適 當地解決。 t 申請專利範圍第7項之發明’係如申請專利範圍第4 項、第5項或第6項之人工眼球,其中前述移動式攝影機 係裝設有集積複數個攝影元件、複數個A/D轉換電路及前 述視覺裝置之影像感測器。前述攝影元件,係使用光電二 極體與CCD或CMOS(互補形金屬氧化膜半導體)所實現。 使用LSI技術及三維LSI技術,將前述A/D轉換電路及前 述視覺裝置集積在前述攝影元件上。本發明中,因將前述 數位影像以像素爲單位從前述A/D轉換電路平行地傳送至 前述視覺裝置,故前述A/D轉換電路及前述視覺裝置能簡 化用以傳送前述數位影像之電子電路。因此本發明減少零 件數量,並縮小前述人工眼球之大小,故有關前述人工眼 球之製造上各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第8項之發明,係一種視覺裝置,其特 徵在於:在以格子狀配置之各陣列運算裝置上具備用以將 前述陣列運算裝置起始化之裝置;用以若無應輸入之二値 資訊則結束處理之裝置;用以輸入前述二値資訊之裝置; 18 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------I --- (請先10讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 498290 A7 _ B7______ 五、發明說明(^) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -1線· .用以將前述二値資訊轉換爲重複資訊之裝置;用以從代表 前述重複資料之重複資料影像之帶域像素値附近來計算重 心,使由前述重心所計算出之移動量影像化’並成爲移動 量影像之帶域像素値之裝置;用以在每個移動源上’根據 前述移動量將代表移動源重複資訊之移動源重複資訊影像 之各帶域像素値移動至移動位置上之裝置丨用以根據即述 移動量將前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素値移動至前述移動 位置上之裝置;用以在每個前述移動源上’將前述移動源 重複資訊影像之各前述帶域像素値’更新爲移動過來之前 述移動源重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値全部之合計以及 對應移動過來之前述重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値之値 之合計之裝置;用以將前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素値’ 更新爲所有移動過來之前述重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素 値全部之合計之裝置;用以從前述移動源重複資訊影像之 前述帶域像素値全部來計算傾斜角度之裝置;及用以輸出 前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素値及前述傾斜角度之裝置。 即,此係演算法之實際型態’用於利用數位技術實現前述 陣列運算裝置所提供之功能。將前述陣列運算裝置配置成 格子狀,並將前述陣列運算裝置與附近者相互結合’並設 定完成前述陣列運算裝置之各參數之起始値後’將由前述 二値資訊所構成之二値影像以像素爲單位適當地輸入,依 序進行從重心計算到輸出前述重複資訊影像及前述傾斜角 度,並不斷反覆直到前述二値影像不被輸入爲止。本發明 因可使前述陣列運算裝置平行地動作,故有關位置、大小 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 五、發明說明(丨^) .及傾斜度之檢測之各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 ----— II------- --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 申請專利範圍第9項之發明,係一種視覺裝置,其特 徵在於··以格子狀配置之各陣列運算裝置具備處理器、記 憶體、及複數個控制器;前述控制器係具有用以辨識在前 述陣列運算裝置之間所轉送之資料之發送源之前述陣列運 算裝置之裝置以及用以辨識被轉送之前述資料種類之裝置 9 線丨 在前述陣列運算裝置中,藉複數個前述控制器係分別 透過訊號線而連接於鄰接之前述陣列運算裝置之複數個前 述控制器中之1個,以使前述陣列運算裝置與鄰接之前述 陣列運算裝置同時傳送複數個前述資料。前述陣列運算裝 置中,藉前述處理器控制複數個前述控制器,以使前述陣 列運算裝置可有效率地將前述記憶體中之複數個前述資料 轉送至鄰接之前述陣列運算裝置之前述記憶體。本發明因 可在短時間內傳送大量之前述資料’故有關實施各種局部 平行影像處理之前述視覺裝置性能之各種問題將獲得適當 地解決。 申請專利範圍第1〇項之發明,係一種視覺裝置,其特 徵在於:在申請專利範圍第9項之陣列運算裝置中,使前 述控制器全部堆疊,藉以前述陣列運算裝置間之前述訊號 線不交叉。因若LSI之設計者使用三維LSI技術,則會堆 疊所有前述控制器,故被堆疊之所有前述控制器都將排列 成格子狀。此時在同一高度層用前述訊號線連接封裝之鄰 接之前述控制器,前述控制器間之前述訊號線不會交叉。 20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ______Β7____ 五、發明說明(丨象) II---· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ‘本發明,可將所有前述層中之前述訊號線支配線性式設爲 相同,而且可縮短前述訊號線之配線長,因此有關三維 LSI之設計及製造之各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 - 申請專利範圍第11項之發明,係一種視覺裝置,由排 列成格子狀之複數個虛擬陣列運算裝置所構成,其特徵在 於·· ^ 線·· 前述虛擬陣列運算裝置係具有處理器、記億體、及複 數個控制器,前述控制器,係具有前輸入暫存器群,前輸 入暫存器群,係具有至少1個前輸入暫存器及至少1個計 數器,使前述前輸入暫存器作爲移位暫存器,藉以在各前 述虛擬陣列運算裝置中,前述處理器執行排列成格子狀之 複數個陣列運算裝置之程式、前述控制器與鄰接之前述虛 擬陣列運算裝:置之前述控制器通訊、前述移位暫存器將排 列成格子狀之複數個結果資料依序輸入並記憶、前述計數 器計算前述結果資料之個數、以及前述處理器從前述移位 暫存器中選擇複數個前述結果資料中之1個並輸入。本發 明中,前述控制器具有排列成格子狀之前述陣列運算裝置 之縱與橫之個數之最大値以上。與排列成格子狀之前述陣 列運算裝置中前述虛擬陣列運算裝置鄰接者會被分類爲上 下左右之通訊方向,在每個分類上會與前述控制器中相異 之1個對應。因此,要從哪個方向上之第幾號前述控制器 輸入計算資料,若前述虛擬陣列運算裝置能辨識,則前述 計算資料要從哪個前述陣列運算裝置輸出,前述虛擬陣列 運算裝置可辨識。本發明中,前輸入電阻,具有可儲存所 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱〉 498290 A7 B7 -----— 五、發明說明(1 I) .有前述陣列運算裝置輸出之前述結果資料之記憶容量之前 述移轉電阻、及前述計數器,而且前述轉移電阻會以一定 之順序按照順序儲存被輸入之前述結果資料。因此,即使 在二個前述虛擬陣列運算裝置之間讓排列成格子狀之複數 個前述陣列運算裝置之前述結果資料通訊,也可維持前述 結果資料之順序。前述計數器之起始値會被設定爲前述陣 列運算裝置之數,前述排列運算單每次在輸出前述結果資 料時,前述計數器就會按降下順序計算。因此若全部的前 述結果資料均從前述陣列運算裝置輸出,則前述計數器之 値爲〇。此時前述控制器會將前輸入送達設爲1。之後前述 處理器若讀出前述轉移電阻中全部的前述結果資料’則前 述處理器就會將前輸入送達狀況設爲0。本發明’可將複 數個前述陣列運算裝置當作程式封裝在1個前述虛擬陣列 運算裝置上。因此本發明,可用很少之硬體實現很多前述 陣列運算裝置,故有關前述視覺裝置之製造各種問題 得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第12項之發明,係一種影像感測器’係 其功能區塊排列成二維格子狀,並具備至少1個攝影 、至少1個A/D轉換電路、及至少1個陣列運算裝置;其 特徵在於: 前述功能區塊,係將前述攝影元件與前述A/D轉換《 路以1對1接線,全部的前述陣列運算裝置從全部的前述 A/D轉換電路及全部的前述陣列運算裝置中之至少1個1輸 入數位訊號,以及全部的前述陣列運算裝置均輸入時鐘訊 22 -----------1--· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、a'* - 線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _________B7____ 五、發明說明(\〇) 1— 1I1II1I · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •線! •號;而且在鄰接之前述功能區塊之間,使各前述陣列運算 裝置間爲1對1接線,藉此來以前述陣列運算裝置對於前 述攝影元件所拍下之動態影像進行影像處理。前述攝影元 件,係利用光電二極體與、CCD或CMOS而實現之。前述 攝影元件、前述A/D轉換電路及前述陣列運算裝置,係利 用LSr技術及三維LSI技術集積於前述處埋器。若使用前 述三維LSI技術,則前述處理器之設計者可在前述功能區 塊中將前述陣列運算裝置堆起來,故前述設計者即使不讓 前述陣列運算裝置之訊號線在鄰接之前述功能區塊間交叉 也可。本發明中,因前述數位訊號會在前述處理器內從前 述A/D轉換電路傳送到前述陣列運算裝置,故前述A/D轉 換電路及前述陣列運算裝置,可將爲了傳送前述數位訊號 之電子電路簡化,還可高速地傳送前述數位訊號。另外本 發明中,前述陣列運算裝置因係與鄰接之前述功能區塊之 前述陣列運算裝置非同步地通訊,故與前述處理器之前述 功能區塊數無關,前述時鐘訊號只要讓前述功能區塊內之 前述陣列運算裝置同步即可。因此本發明可減少零件數及 配線量,還可高速地使前述處理器運轉,故有關前述處理 器之設計及製造各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第13項之發明,係一種影像感測器,其 功能區塊排列成二維格子狀,並具備複數個攝影元件、複 數個A/D轉換電路、至少1個平行/串列轉換電路、及至少 1個虛擬陣列運算裝置;其特徵在於: 前述功能區塊,係將前述攝影元件及前述A/D轉換電 23 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498290 A7 ________R7 —__— 五、發明說明(W) --------------裝--- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -線 .路以1對1接線,在每個前述攝影元件之頻寬上將複數個 前述A/D轉換電路及前述平行/串列轉換電路接線,全部的 則述虛擬陣列運算裝置從全部的前述平丫了 /串列電路及全部 的前述虛擬陣列運算裝置中之至少1個輸入數位訊號,全 部的前述虛擬陣列蓮算裝置均輸入時鐘訊號;而且在鄰接 之前述功能區塊之間,使各前述陣列運算鹤置間以1對1 接線,藉此來以前述虛擬陣列運算裝置對於前述攝影元件 所拍下之動態影像進行影像處理。前述攝影元件,係利用 CCD及CMOS實現。前述攝影元件、前述A/D轉換電路、 前述平行/串列轉換電路及前述虛擬陣列運算裝置,係利用 LSI技術及三維LSI技術集積於前述處理器。若使用前述三 維LSI技術,則前述處理器之設計者可在前述功能區塊中 將前述虛擬陣列運算裝置堆起來,故前述設計者即使不讓 前述虛擬陣列運算裝置之訊號線在鄰接之前述功能區塊之 間交叉也可。本發明中,因前述數位訊號會在前述處理器 內從前述平行/串列轉換電路傳送到前述虛擬陣列運算裝置 ,故前述平行/串列轉換電路及前述虛擬陣列運算裝置,g 將要傳送前述數位訊號之電子電路簡化,還可高速地傳送 前述數位訊號。另外本發明中,前述虛擬陣列運算裝置gj 係與鄰接之前述功能區塊之前述虛擬陣列運算裝置非同# 地通訊,故與前述處理器之前述功能區塊數無關,前述胃 鐘訊號只要讓前述功能區塊內之前述虛擬陣列運算裝置胃 步即可。因此本發明可減少零件數及配線量,還可高速上也 使前述處理器運轉,故有關前述處理器之設計及製造各罕重 24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' *------ 498290 A7 __________B7___ 五、發明說明(w) .問題將獲得適當地解決。- 、 申請專利範圍第14項之發明,係如申請專利範圍第 12項或第13項之影像感測器,其中前述功能區塊具有用 以產生前述時鐘訊號之同步式振盪電路及用以計算前述時 鐘訊號之脈衝數之互鎖式計數器;排列成二維格子狀之前 述同步式振盪電路,係藉與鄰接之前述同步式振盪電路接 線而構成第1之互鎖裝置;排列於二維格子狀之前述互鎖 式計數器’係藉與鄰接之前述互鎖式計數器接線而構成第 2之互鎖裝置。前述同步式振盪電路中係使用不安定多諧 振盪器及晶體振盪器等。前述同步式振盪電路因與鄰接之 前述同步式振盪電路彼此同步,故全部之前述同步式振盪 電路所產生之前述時鐘訊號會同步。前述時鐘訊號因僅在 前述功能區塊內提供,故本發明可減輕扇出(fan-out)及時鐘 相差(clock skew)之問題。前述互鎖式計數器係使用二進位 計數器。前述互鎖式計數器因會與鄰接之前述互鎖式計數 器相互連動,故全部之前述互鎖式計數器所計算之前述脈 衝數爲一致。前述互鎖式計數器因可控制重設訊號之輸入 ,故可一起重設全部的前述功能區塊。因此本發明可減少 消耗電力,還可讓前述處理器高速動作,故有關前述處理 器之設計及製造各項問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第15項之發明,係一種互鎖裝置,由排 列成正方格子狀及六角形格子狀之互鎖式計數器所構成, 其特徵在於_· 前述互鎖式計數器,係具備同步式計數器、結束値判 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) .I I I I-----I I----- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · --線· 498290 A7 ___B7_ 五、發明說明(τΛ) ----------------- <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線丨· 定用NOT閘、互鎖用鎖定電路、互鎖用NOR閘、及計數 器用NOR閘;藉由前述結束値判定用NOT閘所輸出之互 鎖訊號讓鄰接之前述互鎖式計數器停止計數,以使全部之 前述互鎖式計數器之計數値(count number)均一致。前述互 鎖式計數器,因會使用前述判定終止値用之NOT閘反轉前 述同步式計數器之脈動進位(ripple-carry-ou〖)訊號,而產生 前述互鎖訊號。前述連動用NOR閘因會從前述互鎖訊號產 生可能訊號,當前述互鎖訊號爲高位準,前述同步式計數 器會計算,並復原前述互鎖用鎖定電路。當前述互鎖訊號 爲低位準,前述同步式計數器會暫時停止。前述連動用 NOR閘在統合外部互鎖訊號後,前述互鎖用鎖定電路會儲 存統合結果。前述互鎖用鎖定電路會根據前述統合結果控 制前述計算用NOR閘,讓前述同步式計數器開始動作。因 此,前述同步式計數器會從外部在被輸入之前述互鎖訊號 上連動後開始計算。本發明,可利用相互連接複數個前述 互鎖式計數器,讓全部的前述互鎖式計數器之前述計數値 一致。尤其是將1個時鐘訊號分配於LSI整體時,若前述 時鐘訊號之頻率越高,前述時鐘訊號之傳遞延遲時間就會 成問題。不過即使將前述互鎖式計數器分散配置於前述 LSI中,也可讓全部的前述互鎖式計數器之前述計數値一 致。因此,有關前述LSI之同步各種問題將獲得適當地解 決。 申請專利範圍第16項之發明,係如申請專利範圍第 15項之互鎖裝置,其中前述互鎖式計數器,係具備用以判 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 __B7 _ 五、發明說明(>/) .定前述計數値之結束値之結束値判定用NOR閘;前述同步 式計數器,係具有同步淸除裝置與同步載入裝置。前述同 步式計數器爲提高計數器時,前述提高計數器之輸出會連 接於判定前述計數値最大値之前述判定終止値用nor閘’ 前述判定終止値用NOR閘之輸出會連接於前述判定終止値 用NOT閘。前述同步式計數器爲向下計數器(down-counter) 時,前述向下計數器之輸出會連接於判定前述計數値最小 値之前述判定終止値用NOR閘,前述判定終止値用NOR 閘之輸出會連接於前述判定終止値用NOT閘。前述判定終 止値用NOT閘之輸出,除了前述互鎖用鎖定電路及前述計 數器用NOR閘之外,還會連接於控制前述淸除裝置之淸除 端子及控制前述負載裝置之負載端子。而前述負載裝置會 輸入前述計數値之起始値。因此前述同步式計數器可在前 述計數値中設定任一起始値,故前述同步式計數器可從前 述起姶値計算到前述終止値。本發明因可自由設計前述互 鎖式計數器之週期,故很容易調整電子電路之時序。因此 ,有關前述LSI之同步各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第17項之發明,係如申請專利範圍第 15項或第16項之互鎖裝置,其中至少1個前述互鎖式計數 器,係具備訊號分配用解碼器、訊號分配用鎖定電路、訊 號分配用NOR閘、及訊號分配用正反器(fliD-fl〇P)電路,並 使輸入訊號成爲時鐘訊號週期之正數倍。本發明,因排列 於LSI整體上之前述互鎖式計數器之所有前述計數値是一 致之,故前述訊號分配用解碼器可同時輸出同樣時序之訊 27 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) • 1--1--I I I I I I 1 · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·- 線! 498290 A7 ___ B7___ 五、發明說明(4) •號。再利用前述時序訊號中不同之2點在被指定之計時開 始時間與計時結束時間之間之時間,會成爲前述時鐘訊號 之週期正數倍之時間。前述輸入訊號若被儲存於前述訊號 分配用鎖定電路,則會根據前述訊號分配用NOR閘決定前 述計時開始時間之前述輸入訊號,到前述計時結束時間會 被儲存於前述訊號分配用正反器電路上。若成爲前述計時 結束時間,前述訊號分配用正反器電路會利用前述訊號分 配用解碼器復原。因此本發明,只要考慮前述輸入訊號之 最常傳送延遲時間,就可將在前述時鐘訊號上同步之前述 輸入訊號分配於前述LSI之任一地方。因此,有關前述LSI 之設計各種問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第18項之發明,係一種互鎖裝置,由排 列成正方格子狀及六角格子狀之同步式振盪電路所構成, 其特徵在於:The designer can shorten the wiring length, so the LSI designer can easily design the LSI. 〇 In the practical problems of LSI design and manufacturing, as the frequency of the clock signal increases, the clock-skew and signal The extent of the propagation delay time will increase. The reason why the analog chip using analog circuits is actively researched is not so much as the integration of LSI is less than the required amount, but rather to process the digital 7 in real time. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). Mm) ------------- install -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the Invention (j), the environment of the circuit is constantly changing, and the frequency of the clock signal must be increased. Therefore, not only is it difficult to obtain the entire LSI's pace, but the heat generation is also increased. Of course, the main reason that it is difficult for the entire LSI to achieve synchronization is that the conventional vision chip has frequently performed a wide range of processing such as boundary calculation, histogram calculation, and region division. Therefore, the present inventors have developed a visual device (refer to, for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 11-253634, International Publication No. WOOO / 16259, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-269500) to control a mobile camera and perform image processing. The vision device is used for a person who searches for an object and performs an image processing of the object by controlling a pan, tilt, roll and zoom of a mobile camera. Most of the image processing performed by the visual device is local processing, and these local processing are performed in parallel by an array computing device arranged on a two-dimensional grid. If the array computing device is packaged in an LSI, each array computing device will be designed to perform asynchronous communication with an adjacent array computing device. As a result, the wiring pattern becomes very simple and the wiring length becomes shorter. Therefore, the LSI not only increases the package area of the transistor, but also reduces the power consumption. It is not necessary to synchronize all the array computing devices. However, when the scale of the LSI becomes large, in order to execute the pause processing and the like correctly, it is necessary to provide clock signals of the same cycle and reset signals with a small phase difference to all array computing devices. If you consider the above matters, I hope that based on the large-scale integrated circuit technology currently available and the three-dimensional large-scale integrated circuit technology, we will be able to develop a combination of visual devices and photographic elements such as photoelectric diodes. processor. Furthermore, by mounting the processor on a multi-degree-of-freedom motor, a mobile camera controlled by a vision device can be manufactured. 8 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --------------------- Order --------- -(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290, 'A7 ____B7_ V. Description of the invention (! 〇) ---- I -------- I · II (Please read the notes on the back first Please fill in this page again.) Also, a recent study was published, which is based on the image captured by a fixed charge coupled device (CCD) camera mounted on the glasses. The use of electrode array terminals directly transmitted the electrical signals of the edge image to the visual region of the right posterior lobe of the brain to achieve artificial vision (Computer Helps Blind Man 'See' · Wired News, 200-01-17. [Online]. Wired Ventures Inc · , And affiliated companies, 2000. [Search time: 2000-01-20]. Retrieved from the Internet: < URL: http: // www. wired. com / news / technology / 0, 1282, 3369 Bu 00. html >). Because the patient's field of view is very narrow, the patient must move the neck to search for objects, and can only read at a distance of 1. It is about 5 cm in size. However, due to the success of this research, the future will focus on the blind and the visually impaired, and the expectations for embedded artificial eyeballs for achieving wide-field and high-resolution artificial vision will increase. line! If the above considerations are taken into consideration, it is expected that an artificial eyeball can be manufactured, which uses a mobile camera mounted on a multi-degree-of-freedom motor controlled by a vision device to search for objects, and normalized images, types, positions, sizes, and Changes in position can be transmitted directly to the brain. In recent years, with the development of Internet technology and broadband wireless communication technology centered on high-speed wired communication, dynamic images can be transmitted to distant places. In particular, due to the launch of IMT-2000 (DS-CDMA and MC-CDMA) and bluetooth-compatible mobile phones, the environment for anyone to send or receive motion pictures cheaply anytime, anywhere is already available (for example, see JP 6-233020, JP 7-312783, JP 8-163085, JP 8-294030, JP 11-346364). 9 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ___B7 — _ V. Description of the invention (1) If the above matters are taken into consideration, then it is expected that the use of the paper is controlled by the visual device A multi-degree-of-freedom mobile camera captures an object 'and the visual device judges the type of the object being captured, so that the communication device can transmit a dynamic image reflecting the object. Finally, in recent years, high-performance sound synthesizers (see JP 5-053595, JP 5-094196, and JP 5-108084) and high-performance voice recognition devices (see JP-A 05-002399 and JP-A 05-002399) have been developed. 011798, JP 5-019787). By incorporating these devices, speakers, and microphones into the navigation system, users can easily use the navigation system through sound (see JP 6-20196, JP 8_35846, and JP 11-276516). If the above matter is considered, the user is expected to use the voice recognition device to control the visual device with voice, and to know the type of object recognized by the visual device using voice. Therefore, the purpose of the present invention, such as the scope of the patent application, is to use a visual device that controls the mobile camera to transmit the dynamic image of the reflected object to the remote even if the mobile camera is not always controlled from the remote end. User terminal. The other purpose is to package the vision device and the imaging element on an LSI, and mount it in a mobile camera. [Disclosure of the invention] The invention of item 1 of the scope of patent application is an information collection system, which is composed of at least one artificial eyeball and at least one user terminal connected to a communication network, and is characterized by the aforementioned artificial eyeball With mobile camera, vision device and communication equipment 10 I ----- III 1-^ 0 I --- I I-* 5 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 --------B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (&) • Set; the aforementioned mobile camera has At least one of the mechanisms of pitching, rolling, and zooming; the characteristics of the aforementioned visual device are obtaining a digital image from a dynamic image captured by the aforementioned mobile camera, generating the type, position, and number of objects in the aforementioned digital image, and Controls the aforementioned mechanisms for panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming; the communication device is characterized by transmitting one of the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number to the aforementioned user Terminal, receiving control commands corresponding to the pan, tilt, roll, and zoom from the user terminal and transmitting to the vision device; the user terminal has a central control device, a display, and control buttons; and The central control device receives one of the digital image, the type, the position, and the number from the communication device, and the display displays one of the digital image, the type, the position, and the number, and the user The terminal generates the control command assigned on the control button, and the central control device transmits the control command to the communication device. The artificial eyeball has one of the aforementioned mechanisms for panning (horizontal movement), tilting (vertical movement), tumbling (twisting), and zooming (telephoto). Using the mobile camera, the aforementioned The object is placed in the center of the aforementioned moving image and shot at an appropriate size. The aforementioned visual device generates the aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number of the object from the aforementioned digital image, and controls the aforementioned mobile camera based on the aforementioned position. The aforementioned communication network consists of USB (Universal Serial Bus), Ethernet, ISDN (Integrated Digital Communication Network), xDSL (Digital Subscriber Line), ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode), and 11 paper standards in the frame are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) ---- I--I 11 ---- · 11 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order: • Line! 498290 A7 __B7_______ V. Description of the invention (1) Wire technology such as frame relay, and wireless technologies such as IMT-2000 (DS-CDMA and MC-CDMA) and Bluetooth. The aforementioned communication device has a digital image , The aforementioned category, the aforementioned location, and the aforementioned number are transmitted to the aforementioned communication network, and the aforementioned control instruction is received from the aforementioned communication network. The user terminal can use a computer, mobile phone, mobile information terminal, and navigation system with the display and the control buttons. The central control device has a communication function for the communication network. The position and the number are output to the display. The control command is also input from the control button. In the present invention, the front & vision device always controls the mobile camera, so that the user does not need to carefully control the mobile camera. In addition, in the present invention, because the visual device recognizes the type of the object taken by the mobile camera, the artificial eyeball only transmits information about the object that the user wants to know to the user terminal. That is, because the user terminal outputs the foregoing information to the display only when shooting the object the user wants to know, the user does not need to pay attention to the display all the time, or the artificial eyeball does not need to occupy the communication network all the time. . Therefore, as the present invention makes the aforementioned user out of the control of the aforementioned mobile camera, various problems related to the photographing and communication of the aforementioned object will be appropriately solved. The invention of item 2 of the scope of patent application is an information collection system, which is composed of at least one artificial eyeball, database and at least one user terminal connected to a communication network, and is characterized in that the aforementioned artificial eyeball has a mobile camera , Visual device and communication device; the aforementioned mobile camera has pan, tilt, roll and 12 paper sizes that are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------- --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) · Online! 498290 A7 _______ B7__ 5. Description of the invention (I Ο) • At least one of the zooming mechanisms; the characteristics of the aforementioned visual device are to obtain a digital image from a dynamic image captured by the aforementioned mobile camera, and generate a digital image from the aforementioned digital image. Object type, position, and number; The characteristics of the aforementioned communication device are to transmit one of the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number to the aforementioned database; the characteristic of the aforementioned database is to store the aforementioned digital image, The aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number; generating statistical data from the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number; and using a search key to retrieve the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistical data The user terminal is provided with a central control device, a display and control buttons; the central control device receives one of the digital image, the type, the position, the number, and the statistical data from the communication device; The display will show the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned One of the location, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistical data, the aforementioned user terminal uses the aforementioned control button to generate the aforementioned retrieval key which has been designated; the aforementioned central control device transmits the aforementioned retrieval key to the aforementioned communication device. The artificial eyeball uses the mobile camera (which has one of the aforementioned structures for panning (horizontal movement), tilting (vertical movement), rolling (twisting), and zooming (telephoto)). The aforementioned object is placed in the center of the aforementioned moving image and photographed at an appropriate size. The aforementioned visual device generates the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number of the aforementioned objects from the aforementioned digital image, and controls the aforementioned mobile camera according to the aforementioned position. The aforementioned communication network is composed of wired technologies such as USB, Ethernet, ISDN, xDSL, ATM, and Frame Relay, and wireless technologies such as IMT-2000 (DS-CDMA and MC-CDMA) and Bluetooth. 13 paper standards Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------ 1--Order --------- line (please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 B7 V. Description of Invention (M) • The aforementioned communication device has a mechanism for transmitting the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number to the aforementioned communication network. . The aforementioned database uses mathematical methods such as averaging, dispersion, principal component analysis, finite element method, linear planning method, and basic inference to calculate the aforementioned statistical data from the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned category, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number. As the aforementioned database, a relational database and an object-oriented database having a description language such as SQL (Structure Query Language) can be used. The user terminal is a computer, a mobile phone, a mobile information terminal, a navigation system, or the like using the display and the control buttons. The central control device has a communication function connected to the communication network, and outputs the types, the positions, the number, and the statistical data to the display, and inputs the search key from the control button. In the present invention, the above-mentioned location and the number of the aforementioned digital image and the aforementioned category are stored for a long time by the aforementioned database, so that the aforementioned user can obtain the aforementioned search keys corresponding to the aforementioned category, region, place, season, and date. statistical data. Therefore, the present invention will appropriately solve various problems concerning the calculation and prediction of the aforementioned objects. The invention in the third scope of the patent application is an information collection system such as the first or second scope of the patent scope, in which the aforementioned user terminal has at least a sound synthesis device equipped with a speaker or a sound recognition device equipped with a microphone. For one, the aforementioned sound synthesizing device converts the aforementioned category, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistical data into a voice signal; the aforementioned voice recognition device converts the collected voice into the aforementioned control command and the aforementioned search key using the aforementioned microphone. The aforementioned user terminal can use the above-mentioned display 14 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I --------- · II (Please read the precautions on the back first Fill out this page again) Order: 498290 V. Description of the invention (Ά ---------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) • Device, the aforementioned speaker, the aforementioned Control buttons and computers, mobile phones, mobile information terminals, navigation systems, etc. with the aforementioned microphones. The aforementioned central control device has a communication function connected to the aforementioned communication network, and combines the aforementioned types, the aforementioned positions, the aforementioned numbers, and the aforementioned statistics The data is output to the display and the sound synthesizing device, and the control command and the search key are input from the control button and the sound recognition device. The sound synthesizing device converts the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistics. Is the aforementioned sound signal and is output to the aforementioned speaker. The aforementioned voice recognition device converts the collected voice into the aforementioned control instruction and The search key. The user of the present invention can use the aforementioned user terminal without going through the aforementioned display and the aforementioned control buttons. Therefore, the present invention will appropriately solve various problems related to the user interface. The scope of patent application is 4th The invention of item is an artificial eyeball provided with a mobile camera and a visual device, characterized in that the aforementioned mobile camera has at least one of a pan, tilt, roll and zoom mechanism; the aforementioned visual device is provided with Device for digital images taken from a moving image taken by a video camera, a device for identifying types of objects in the digital image, a device for detecting the position, size, and inclination of the object, a device for calculating the number of the object, and controlling the panning , The aforementioned devices of the aforementioned mechanisms of the pitch, the roll, and the zoom, and the devices that output the aforementioned digital images, the aforementioned types, the aforementioned positions, and the aforementioned numbers. The aforementioned mobile camera is a combination of a plurality of cylinders and a motor, and Using a multi-degree-of-freedom motor to serve the aforementioned panning (horizontal Movement), the aforementioned pitching (vertical movement), the aforementioned rolling (twisting), and the aforementioned zooming (telephoto). Therefore, the aforementioned movement 15 paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _ _ B7 V. Description of the invention (1)) The camera can place the aforementioned object in the center of the aforementioned moving image and shoot with the size required to identify the aforementioned object. The aforementioned visual device performs local parallel image processing such as an edge information generating device, an edge information forming device, an object / background separation device, a position / size detection device, a position / size / tilt detection device, and a pattern matching device. The object is separated from the digital image, the type is identified, the position, the size, and the inclination are detected, and the number is calculated. In addition, in addition to using the position to control the panning, the tilting, the rolling, and the zooming of the mobile camera, the visual device also uses a control command input from outside to control the panning. Tumble and zoom as described above. According to the present invention, when the position of the object cannot be known in advance and when the object is moving, the mobile camera can also be directed toward the object. Therefore, the present invention is because the user is not controlled by the aforementioned mobile camera, so various problems related to the photography of the aforementioned object will be appropriately solved. The invention of item 5 in the scope of patent application is an artificial eyeball with a communication device such as the item 4 in the scope of patent application, in which the aforementioned communication device is provided with a device for compressing the aforementioned digital image, and transmitting the compressed aforementioned digital image and the aforementioned through a communication network. The type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number of devices. The aforementioned communication device transmits the compressed digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number to the aforementioned communication network, and receives the aforementioned control command from the aforementioned communication network. In order to compress the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned communication device uses the aforementioned type recognized by the aforementioned visual device to select the aforementioned digital image reflecting the aforementioned object of the particular aforementioned type. In addition, the aforementioned newsletter 16 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -I I ---- 1 !! * ^^.  I I (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) t ^ J.  -Line 498290 A7 ___ _B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (#) • The device can mask the part outside the area occupied by the aforementioned object in the previously selected digital image and transmit it. In addition, the communication device may also use image compression technologies such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) and JPEG (Joint Photographic Coding Experts Group) to reduce the data amount of the digital image. The present invention can only transmit the aforementioned digital images captured by the aforementioned objects to the aforementioned communication network. Therefore, in addition to reducing the load of the aforementioned communication network, the present invention can also inform the user of the present invention of the existence of the aforementioned object, so various problems related to the photographing and communication of the aforementioned object will be appropriately solved. The invention in the sixth scope of the patent application is an artificial eyeball with the fourth scope in the patent scope of the patent application, which is provided with a stimulus generator, an electrode array terminal, a connector and a battery. The invention is characterized in that the stimulus generator is generated by the aforementioned visual device. The normalized image of the aforementioned object, the aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned size, and the aforementioned changes in position are converted into electrical stimulation; the aforementioned electrode array terminal transmits the aforementioned electrical stimulation to the brain through the aforementioned connector. The aforementioned stimulus generator uses the D / A conversion circuit to convert the aforementioned normalized image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned size, and the aforementioned position change of the aforementioned object into the aforementioned electrical stimulation which can appropriately stimulate the nerve cells. The electrodes of the electrode arrangement terminals are made of platinum, and the electrode arrangement terminals are buried in the brain, such as the lobes, lateral lobes, parietal lobes, and anterior lobes. The aforementioned batteries are those that can be repeatedly charged, such as lithium ion batteries, and those that have long discharge times, such as fuel cells. By disengaging the connector, the user of the present invention can easily remove or replace the mobile camera, the visual device, the stimulus generator, and the battery. The present invention is employed by the aforementioned mobile camera and 17 paper sizes that are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 mm) ~ '' --------------- ------ Order ----- I --- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 ____ B7 __— V. Description of the invention (1st night) The aforementioned normalized image of the object, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned size, and the aforementioned changes are converted into the electrical stimuli and transmitted directly to the aforementioned brain of the user. Therefore, the aforementioned user is not subject to the aforementioned The aforementioned size of the aforementioned object in the digital image and the influence of the surrounding environment are lost, so that the aforementioned object can be easily found and identified. Therefore, the present invention is to allow the aforementioned user to identify the aforementioned object in a short time and with high accuracy. Therefore, various problems related to artificial vision will be properly resolved. t The invention of the 7th scope of the patent application is an artificial eyeball such as the 4th, 5th, or 6th scope of the patent application, wherein the aforementioned mobile camera is provided with an integrated plurality of photographic elements and a plurality of A / D Conversion circuit and image sensor of the aforementioned vision device. The aforementioned imaging element is realized using a photodiode and a CCD or CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Film Semiconductor). Using the LSI technology and the three-dimensional LSI technology, the A / D conversion circuit and the vision device are integrated on the imaging element. In the present invention, since the digital image is transmitted in parallel from the A / D conversion circuit to the visual device in pixels, the A / D conversion circuit and the visual device can simplify an electronic circuit for transmitting the digital image. . Therefore, the present invention reduces the number of parts and reduces the size of the aforementioned artificial eyeball, so various problems related to the manufacturing of the aforementioned artificial eyeball will be appropriately solved. The invention in the eighth aspect of the patent application is a visual device, which is characterized in that each array computing device arranged in a grid is provided with a device for initializing the aforementioned array computing device; The device that ends the processing of secondary information; the device for inputting the foregoing secondary information; 18 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- -I --- (Please read the precautions on the back 10 before filling out this page)-498290 A7 _ B7______ V. Description of the invention (^) -------------- install --- ( (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -1 line A device for converting the aforementioned secondary information into duplicate information; for calculating the center of gravity from the vicinity of the band pixel 値 of the duplicate data image representing the aforementioned duplicate data, and imaging the movement amount calculated by the aforementioned center of gravity 'and becoming Device for band pixels 値 of a moving image; a device for moving each band pixel 値 of a moving source repeat information image representing moving source repeat information on each moving source to a moving position according to the aforementioned moving amount 丨A device for moving the band pixels 前述 of the repeating information image to the aforementioned moving position according to the amount of said movement; for 'moving each of the band pixels of the repeating information image of the aforementioned mobile source on each of the aforementioned moving sources' 'Update device for updating the total of the aforementioned band pixels 値 of the aforementioned mobile source repeat information image and the total of the aforementioned band pixels 値 of the aforementioned repeat information image moved; a device for updating the aforementioned duplicate information image The band pixels 値 'are updated to all the aforementioned band pixels 値 of all the previously repeated information images that have been moved over. A total device; a device for calculating the inclination angle from all the aforementioned band pixels of the moving information repeating information image; and a device for outputting the above-mentioned band information pixel of the repeating information image and the aforementioned tilt angle. That is, the actual form of this algorithm is used to realize the functions provided by the aforementioned array computing device using digital technology. The aforementioned array computing device is arranged in a lattice shape, and the aforementioned array computing device and a nearby person are combined with each other, and the initial setting of each parameter of the aforementioned array computing device is set. Pixels are appropriately input in units, and calculation is sequentially performed from the center of gravity to outputting the repeated information image and the tilt angle, and iteratively is repeated until the second image is not input. The present invention allows the aforementioned array computing device to operate in parallel, so the relevant position and size 19 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 V. Description of the invention (丨 ^). And the problems of tilt detection will be properly solved. ----— II ------- --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The invention in the 9th scope of the patent application is a visual device, which is characterized by a grid Each array computing device in the state configuration includes a processor, a memory, and a plurality of controllers; the controller is a device having the aforementioned array computing device for identifying a transmission source of data transferred between the aforementioned array computing devices, and The 9-line device used to identify the type of the aforementioned data to be transferred 丨 In the aforementioned array computing device, one of the aforementioned controllers connected to the adjacent aforementioned array computing device through a signal line is borrowed from each of the aforementioned controllers So that the foregoing array computing device and the adjacent array computing device may simultaneously transmit a plurality of the foregoing data. In the array operation device, the plurality of controllers are controlled by the processor, so that the array operation device can efficiently transfer the plurality of foregoing data in the memory to the adjacent memory of the array operation device. Since the present invention can transmit a large amount of the aforementioned data in a short time, various problems related to the performance of the aforementioned visual device implementing various local parallel image processing will be appropriately solved. The invention in the scope of patent application No. 10 is a vision device, which is characterized in that in the array computing device in scope of patent application No. 9, the aforementioned controllers are all stacked, so that the aforementioned signal lines between the aforementioned array computing devices are not cross. Because if the designer of LSI uses 3D LSI technology, all the aforementioned controllers will be stacked, so all the aforementioned controllers being stacked will be arranged in a grid. At this time, the aforementioned signal lines are used to connect the aforementioned controllers adjacent to the package at the same level, and the aforementioned signal lines between the aforementioned controllers will not cross. 20 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ______ Β7 ____ 5. Description of the Invention (丨 Image) II --- · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 'In the present invention, the aforementioned signal line branch wiring characteristics in all the aforementioned layers can be set to be the same, and the wiring length of the aforementioned signal line can be shortened, so various problems related to the design and manufacture of the three-dimensional LSI will be appropriately solved. -The 11th invention in the scope of patent application is a visual device composed of a plurality of virtual array computing devices arranged in a grid shape, which is characterized by a line ... The aforementioned virtual array computing device has a processor, a memory Billion body, and a plurality of controllers, the aforementioned controller has a front input register group, the front input register group has at least one front input register and at least one counter, so that the foregoing input register is temporarily The register serves as a shift register, so that in each of the foregoing virtual array computing devices, the processor executes a program of a plurality of array computing devices arranged in a grid, the controller, and the adjacent virtual array computing device: The controller communicates, the shift register sequentially inputs and stores a plurality of result data arranged in a grid, the counter calculates the number of the result data, and the processor selects from the shift register Enter one of the foregoing results. In the present invention, the controller has the maximum number of vertical and horizontal numbers of the array computing device arranged in a grid. Adjacent to the aforementioned virtual array computing device in the aforementioned array computing device arranged in a grid form will be classified into communication directions of up, down, left and right, and each category will correspond to one of the controllers which is different. Therefore, from which direction, the aforementioned controller inputs calculation data. If the virtual array computing device can recognize, from which aforementioned array computing device the computing data should be output, the virtual array computing device can recognize. In the present invention, the front input resistor has a storable 21 paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 498290 A7 B7 ------ 5. Description of the invention (1 I). There is a memory capacity of the aforementioned result data output by the aforementioned array computing device, the aforementioned transfer resistance, and the aforementioned counter, and the aforementioned transfer resistance stores the inputted aforementioned result data in a certain order. Therefore, even if the foregoing result data of a plurality of the foregoing array computing devices arranged in a grid are communicated between the two foregoing virtual array computing devices, the order of the foregoing result data can be maintained. The initial value of the counter is set to the number of the array operation device. Each time the array operation table outputs the result data, the counter is calculated in descending order. Therefore, if all the aforementioned result data are output from the aforementioned array computing device, then 値 of the aforementioned counter is zero. The aforementioned controller will set the front input delivery to 1. Thereafter, if the aforementioned processor reads all of the aforementioned result data in the aforementioned transfer resistor ', the aforementioned processor will set the previous input delivery status to zero. In the present invention, a plurality of the aforementioned array computing devices can be packaged as a program on one of the aforementioned virtual array computing devices. Therefore, the present invention can implement many of the aforementioned array computing devices with very little hardware, so various problems related to the manufacture of the aforementioned visual devices can be appropriately solved. The invention of the 12th scope of the patent application is an image sensor. Its functional blocks are arranged in a two-dimensional grid, and it has at least one camera, at least one A / D conversion circuit, and at least one array operation. The device is characterized in that the aforementioned functional block is a circuit that converts the aforementioned photographic element to the aforementioned A / D, and is connected in a one-to-one manner. At least one 1-input digital signal in the computing device, and all the aforementioned array computing devices input clock signals 22 ----------- 1-- · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page), a '*-line-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _________B7____ V. Description of the invention (\ 〇) 1— 1I1II1I · II (Please read the back first (Please fill out this page again) • Online! • number; and between adjacent functional blocks, a one-to-one connection is made between the foregoing array computing devices, thereby performing image processing on the moving image captured by the aforementioned imaging element by the foregoing array computing device. The aforementioned photographic element is realized by using a photodiode and CCD or CMOS. The imaging device, the A / D conversion circuit, and the array computing device are integrated in the embedder using LSr technology and three-dimensional LSI technology. If the aforementioned three-dimensional LSI technology is used, the designer of the aforementioned processor can stack the aforementioned array computing device in the aforementioned functional block, so even if the aforementioned designer does not allow the signal line of the aforementioned array computing device to be adjacent to the aforementioned functional block Intersection is also possible. In the present invention, since the digital signal is transmitted from the A / D conversion circuit to the array operation device in the processor, the A / D conversion circuit and the array operation device can transmit electronic signals for transmitting the digital signal. The circuit is simplified and the aforementioned digital signals can be transmitted at high speed. In addition, in the present invention, because the array computing device communicates asynchronously with the array computing device adjacent to the functional block, it has nothing to do with the number of the functional block of the processor, and the clock signal only needs the functional block. The aforementioned array computing device can be synchronized. Therefore, the present invention can reduce the number of parts and wiring, and also enable the aforementioned processor to operate at high speed. Therefore, various problems related to the design and manufacture of the aforementioned processor will be appropriately solved. The invention in the 13th scope of the patent application is an image sensor whose functional blocks are arranged in a two-dimensional grid, and has a plurality of photographic elements, a plurality of A / D conversion circuits, and at least one parallel / serial conversion. Circuit, and at least one virtual array computing device; characterized in that the aforementioned functional block is to convert the aforementioned photographic element and the aforementioned A / D conversion 23 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male) Love) 498290 A7 ________R7 —__— V. Description of the invention (W) -------------- Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-line. The circuits are connected on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of the aforementioned A / D conversion circuits and the aforementioned parallel / serial conversion circuits are wired on the bandwidth of each of the aforementioned photographic elements. At least one input digital signal in all serial circuits and all the aforementioned virtual array computing devices, and all the aforementioned virtual array computing devices input clock signals; and between adjacent functional blocks, each of the aforementioned arrays The computing cranes are connected on a one-to-one basis, so as to perform image processing on the dynamic images captured by the aforementioned imaging elements with the aforementioned virtual array computing device. The aforementioned imaging element is realized by a CCD and a CMOS. The imaging element, the A / D conversion circuit, the parallel / serial conversion circuit, and the virtual array computing device are integrated in the processor using LSI technology and three-dimensional LSI technology. If the aforementioned three-dimensional LSI technology is used, the designer of the aforementioned processor may stack the aforementioned virtual array computing device in the aforementioned functional block, so even if the aforementioned designer does not allow the signal line of the aforementioned virtual array computing device to be adjacent to the aforementioned function Crossing between blocks is also possible. In the present invention, since the digital signal is transmitted from the parallel / serial conversion circuit to the virtual array computing device in the processor, the parallel / serial conversion circuit and the virtual array computing device, g will transmit the digital The electronic circuit of the signal is simplified, and the aforementioned digital signal can be transmitted at high speed. In addition, in the present invention, the virtual array computing device gj communicates with the virtual array computing device adjacent to the functional block, so it has nothing to do with the number of the functional block of the processor. The virtual array computing device in the aforementioned functional block can just stomach. Therefore, the present invention can reduce the number of parts and wiring, and also enable the aforementioned processor to operate at high speed. Therefore, the design and manufacture of the aforementioned processor are rare. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '* ------ 498290 A7 __________B7___ 5. Description of the invention (w). The problem will be properly resolved. -The invention with the scope of patent application No. 14 is an image sensor such as the scope of patent application No. 12 or 13, where the aforementioned functional block has a synchronous oscillation circuit for generating the aforementioned clock signal and is used for calculation Interlocking counter of the number of pulses of the aforementioned clock signal; the aforementioned synchronous oscillating circuit arranged in a two-dimensional grid form constitutes a first interlocking device by connecting with the adjacent synchronous oscillating circuit; arranged in a two-dimensional grid The aforementioned interlocking counter 'forms a second interlocking device by wiring the adjacent interlocking counter. In the aforementioned synchronous oscillation circuit, an unstable multivibrator, a crystal oscillator, or the like is used. The aforementioned synchronous oscillating circuits are synchronized with the adjacent synchronous oscillating circuits, so the clock signals generated by all of the aforementioned synchronous oscillating circuits are synchronized. Since the aforementioned clock signal is provided only in the aforementioned functional block, the present invention can alleviate the problems of fan-out and clock skew. The aforementioned interlocked counter uses a binary counter. Because the interlocked counters are interconnected with the adjacent interlocked counters, the pulse numbers calculated by all the interlocked counters are consistent. Because the aforementioned interlocked counter can control the input of the reset signal, all the aforementioned functional blocks can be reset together. Therefore, the present invention can reduce power consumption and allow the aforementioned processor to operate at high speed, so various problems related to the design and manufacture of the aforementioned processor will be appropriately solved. The invention in the 15th scope of the patent application is an interlocking device composed of interlocking counters arranged in a square grid and a hexagonal grid. It is characterized by the aforementioned interlocking counters, which are equipped with synchronous counters. 25. The end of the judgment 25 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm). III I ----- I I ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) ·-line · 498290 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (τΛ) -------- --------- < Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Lines 丨 · Fixed NOT brake, interlock lock circuit, interlock NOR brake, and counter NOR brake; The outputted interlock signal stops the adjacent interlocked counters from counting, so that the count numbers of all the interlocked counters are consistent. The aforementioned interlocking counter generates the aforementioned interlocking signal because the NOT gate used for judging termination is used to reverse the ripple-carry-ou signal of the synchronous counter. The interlocking NOR gate may generate a possible signal from the interlocking signal. When the interlocking signal is at a high level, the synchronous counter will calculate and restore the interlocking lock circuit. When the interlock signal is at a low level, the synchronous counter is temporarily stopped. After the interlocking NOR gate integrates an external interlock signal, the interlocking lock circuit stores the integration result. The interlocking lock circuit controls the calculation NOR gate based on the integration result, so that the synchronous counter starts to operate. Therefore, the aforementioned synchronous counter will start to count after being linked to the inputted interlock signal from the outside. In the present invention, a plurality of the aforementioned interlocked counters can be connected to each other to make the aforementioned counts 値 of all the aforementioned interlocked counters consistent. In particular, when one clock signal is distributed to the entire LSI, if the frequency of the clock signal is higher, the transmission delay time of the clock signal becomes a problem. However, even if the aforementioned interlocked counters are dispersedly arranged in the aforementioned LSI, the aforementioned counts of all the aforementioned interlocked counters can be made uniform. Therefore, various issues concerning the synchronization of the aforementioned LSIs will be properly resolved. The invention with the scope of patent application No. 16 is an interlocking device such as the scope of the patent application No. 15 where the aforementioned interlocking counter is provided with a standard for judging 26 paper standards that are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 __B7 _ 5. Explanation of the invention (> /). The NOR gate for determining the end of the aforementioned count, the end of the count, and the determination; the aforementioned synchronous counter has a synchronous erasing device and a synchronous loading device. When the synchronous counter is an up counter, the output of the up counter is connected to the determination of the count, the maximum is the determination termination, and the nor gate is used. The output of the determination termination, the NOR gate is connected to the determination termination, and the NOT is used. brake. When the synchronous counter is a down-counter, the output of the down-counter will be connected to the determination of the count (minimum), the determination of the termination, using the NOR gate, and the determination of termination, the output using the NOR gate will be connected In the foregoing judgment, the NOT gate is terminated. The output of the NOT brake for judging termination is in addition to the lock circuit for interlocking and the NOR brake for the counter, and it is also connected to the elimination terminal for controlling the erasing device and the load terminal for controlling the load device. And the aforementioned load device will input the starting number of the aforementioned count. Therefore, the aforementioned synchronous counter can set any start value in the aforementioned counting value, so the aforementioned synchronous counter can calculate from the aforementioned value to the aforementioned ending value. Since the present invention can freely design the period of the aforementioned interlocking counter, it is easy to adjust the timing of the electronic circuit. Therefore, various issues related to the synchronization of the aforementioned LSIs will be properly resolved. The invention of the 17th patent scope is an interlock device such as the 15th or 16th patent scope. At least one of the aforementioned interlock counters is provided with a signal distribution decoder, a signal distribution lock circuit, The signal distribution NOR gate and the signal distribution flip-flop (fliD-flop) circuit make the input signal a positive multiple of the clock signal period. In the present invention, because all the aforementioned counts of the aforementioned interlocking counters arranged on the entire LSI are the same, the aforementioned signal distribution decoder can simultaneously output the same timing information. 27 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) • 1--1--IIIIII 1 · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order ·-Line! 498290 A7 ___ B7___ V. Description of Invention (4) • No. Then, the time between the specified start time and end time of the two different points in the aforementioned timing signal will be a time that is a positive multiple of the period of the aforementioned clock signal. If the input signal is stored in the signal distribution lock circuit, the input signal of the timing start time is determined according to the signal distribution NOR gate, and the end time of the timing is stored in the signal distribution flip-flop circuit. on. If it is the timing end time, the signal distribution flip-flop circuit is restored by the signal distribution decoder. Therefore, in the present invention, as long as the most common transmission delay time of the aforementioned input signal is considered, the aforementioned input signal synchronized on the aforementioned clock signal can be distributed to any place of the aforementioned LSI. Therefore, various issues concerning the design of the aforementioned LSI will be appropriately resolved. The invention of claim 18 in the scope of patent application is an interlocking device composed of synchronous oscillation circuits arranged in a square grid shape and a hexagonal grid shape, and is characterized by:

前述同步式振盪電路,係具備2個振盪用NOR閘、2 個振盪用電阻、2個振盪用電容、2個同步用鎖定電路、2 個同步用NOR閘、及起始化用NOR閘,並藉從由前述振 盪用電容所輸出之同步訊號使鄰接之前述同步式振盪電路 之時鐘訊號相位錯開,以使全部的前述同步式振盪電路之 前述時鐘訊號相位一致。前述同步式振盪電路之振盪部分 ’ 2個前述振盪用NOR閘與2個前述振盪用電容會環狀連 接’使用前述振盪用電阻連接前述振盪用NOR閘之輸出與 輸入。前述振盪部分係自激振盪,且前述時鐘訊號係由前 述振盪用NOR閘輸出。前述振盪部分被分類爲A端與B 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) * 1 I------I I I I I · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線! 498290 A7 ___—__B7_ 五、發明說明(τΛ) •端2個部分。前述同步式振盪電路之同步部分對應前述振 盪部分被分類爲前述Α端與前述Β端2個部分。無論是前 述同步部分之前述A端或前述B端,前述同步用NOR閘 係統合從外部被輸入之前述同步訊號後,前述同步用鎖定 電路會儲存統合結果。前述同步用鎖定電路會根據前述統 合結果控制前述振盪用NOR閘,將前述同步式振盪電路之 前述同步訊號之相位及週期與從外部被輸入之前述同步訊 號之前述相位及前述週期配合。當電源投入時等之前述同 步式振盪電路之前述同步訊號及從外部被輸入之前述同步 訊號爲不規則之情況時,前述起始化用NOR閘會將前述A 端之前述振盪用NOR閘之輸出固定於低位準,並決定前述 同步訊號之前述相位。本發明,可利用相互連接複數個前 述同步式振盪電路,讓全部的前述同步式振盪電路之前述 同步訊號同步。尤其是將1個時鐘分配於LSI整體上時, 前述時鐘之頻率越高傳送延遲時間就越成問題。不過利用 將前述同步式振盪電路分散配置於前述LSI上,可讓前述 LSI全部之數據電路同步。因此’有關前述LSI之同步各種 問題將獲得適當地解決。 申請專利範圍第19項之發明,一種互鎖裝置,其特徵 在於: 係在申請專利範圍第18項之前述同步式振盪電路中具 有2個輸入電阻而構成。當前述NOR閘由CMOS製造時, 若在前述NOR閘之輸入是儲存於前述振盪用電容之電流直 接流出,則前述CMOS會被破壞。本發明係利用在A端及 29 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------裝--- <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ¥ --線 498290 A7 ______B7___ 五、發明說明(/)) • B端之各個振盪部分上追加前述輸入電阻,以保護前述 N〇R閘之前述CMOS。而前述輸入電阻之電阻値若變大, 則前述NOR閘中流動之前述電流會變少,故根據前述發訊 用電阻及前述振盪用電容,決定時常數會更正確,全部的 前述同步式振盪電路之前述時鐘訊號之週期會更容易掌握 。因此,有關使用前述CMOS之數據電路之同步各種問題 將獲得適當地解決。 【發明之較佳實施例】 以下,係列舉本發明之資訊收集系統之實施例’參照 圖面說明。 首先,如第1圖所示,申請專利範圍第1項之發明’ 係一種系統,用於顯示數位影像111、物體種類、位置及 個數’並將輸出數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個數之 至少1個之人工眼球1,與傳送控制指令之至少1個使用 者終端機4連接於通訊網路8。人工眼球1,係具有由視覺 裝置2所控制之移動式攝影機10,而該視覺裝置2會辨識 數位影像111中之物體種類、固定位置、並計算個數。另 外視覺裝置2,會根據從使用者終端機4輸入之控制指令 ’控制移動式攝影機10之搖攝(水平移動)、俯仰(垂直移動 )、翻滾(輾轉)及變焦(望遠)。每個使用者終端機4,利用選 擇複數個人工眼球1中之1個,可接收被選擇之人工眼球 1之數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個數。使用者終端機 4 ’係由具有與通訊網路8之通訊功能之中央控制裝置221 30 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----I------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·- •線! 498290 A7 _____Β7 __ 五、發明說明(I) ------II I II---· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •、表示數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個數之顯示器222 、與像游標鍵及搜尋轉盤G〇g dial)那樣之控制鈕223所構 成。人工眼球1及使用者終端機4因由使用有線技術及無 線技術之通訊網路8連接,故人工眼球1不一定非設置在 使用者身邊。而視覺裝置2因可辨識物體之種類’故人工 眼球1也不需要常常傳送數位影像。因此使用者不必 不斷地監視著使用者終端機4.也可。 線丨- 另外,申請專利範圍第1項之發明中最簡單之組合, 係利用有線之通訊網路8將1個人工眼球1與1個使用者 終端機4連接,並能一直傳送數位影像111、物體種類、 位置、個數及控制指令之資訊收集系統。這樣之系統,係 如第2圖所示之裝有人工眼球1之行動電話211。此行動電 話211,可將移動式攝影機10所拍下之動態影像顯示在顯 示器222上。因此,行動電話211之使用者,不僅可不管 移動式攝影機10之方向或倍率就把自己之樣子顯示於顯示 器222上,還可透過顯示器222看到移動式攝影機1〇所拍 下之周圍狀況。於是準備複數個這種行動電話211,並使 每個行動電話211經由彼此傳送數位影像111、物體種類、 位置、個數及控制指令,藉以構築如第1圖所示之資訊收 集系統。 到目前爲止我們針對具備人工眼球1與使用者終端機 4之行動電話做了說明,但是若人工眼球1與使用者終端 機4係利用通訊網路8連接,則人工眼球1與使用者終端 機4不一定需要在一起。因此下述,係以當作使用者終端 31 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _________B7_ 五、發明說明(>°[) 機裝設導航系統之汽車321爲例,針對人工眼球1之設置 位置做說明。 • I------111------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 丨線· 如第3圖所示,在汽車321後面防撞桿中央322上設 置人工眼球1時,駕駛者可確認有死角之地方。即,視覺 裝置2 ’自動地搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦移動式攝影機10 ’變更拍攝範圍326,駕駛者就可發現經過汽車321後方之 行人324、腳踏車、機車325及其他汽車321、與在汽車 321後行李箱附近玩之小孩。因此在死角多之停車場及車 庫等地方,駕駛者可安全地倒退。另外若在汽車321車頂 後方中央323設置人工眼球1,則駕駛者可廣範圍地確認 用後照鏡及車邊鏡難以確認之地方(尤其是遠方等)、及必 須轉身才能注意到之地方。即,視覺裝置2,自動地搖攝 、俯仰、翻滾及變焦移動式攝影機10,變更拍攝範圍326 ’駕駛者就可發現從汽車321後方靠近之行人324、腳踏車 、機車325及其他汽車321。因此駕駛者可安全地打開車門 駕駛。 第3圖中,雖說明了有關人工眼球1設置在汽車321 後方之情況,但是有關汽車321兩旁及前方也都一樣。當 在汽車321之車門及車頂側邊裝設人工眼球1時,駕駛者 可確認在車門附近玩耍之小孩及路邊一帶之狀況。而若在 汽車321前方防撞桿中央及車頂前方裝設人工眼球1時, 駕駿者就可發現經過汽車321前方之行人324、腳踏車、機 車325及其他汽車321、與在汽車321引擎蓋附近玩之小孩 。因此駕駛者可在死角多之停車場、車庫及小巷道之十字 32 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ____B7 ___ 五、發明說明(今0) ’路口安全地前進。若在汽車321之車頂內側裝設人工眼球 1時,駕駛者可掌握所有同乘者之狀況。尤其是使用當作 使用者終端機4之行動電話211時,駕駛者即使下了汽車 321後,也可知道車內之狀況。因此即使汽車321遭遇破壞 汽車者,駕駛者也可馬上趕到汽車321處,而即使小孩或 嬰兒等在車內,駕駛者也可知道小孩或嬰兒之狀況。 另外,如第4圖所示,將人工眼球1設置在輪椅之座 位331背部後面,並將使用者終端機4設置在輪椅之座位 331扶手上,則使用者可不用扭轉身體就能確定從輪椅後 方靠近之物體。尤其是輪椅之使用者大多是身體無法自由 行動、或爲了推動輪椅而姿勢需往前等,使用者很難去確 認後方。不過利用本發明,輪椅之使用者就可安全地移動 。而若將人工眼球1設置在座位331上方、或設置在前方 ,則移動式攝影機10可更廣範圍地拍攝紅綠燈及道路標誌 等。另外在座位331上方設置使用者終端機4、或使用可 穿戴式電腦(wearable computer)當作使用者終端機4 ’以使 視力不好之使用者也可看到顯示器222之影像。 到目前爲止,我們說明了有關使用者終端機4之使用 者可不斷地管理人工眼球1之資訊收集系統。不過此資訊 收集系統,即使使用者在睡覺當中,人工眼球1也會傳送 數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個數。而且人工眼球1 傳送來之數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個數對使用者 而言不一定是必要之。因此如第5圖所示,將使用者終端 機4中之幾個設爲監視終端機5,由代替使用者之複數個 33 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----I I.---I--I I · I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 會· 線- 498290 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(、1) 監視者操作監視終端機5’讓使用者可在只有需要之時候 才利用使用者終端機4。此時之監視終端機5 ’會根據監視 者之指示,只要將從適當之人工眼球1所接收之數位影像 111、物體種類、位置及個數轉送到使用者之使用者終端機 4即可。無論是使用者終端機4或監視終端機5都爲電腦 系統,故利用既有之技術’監視者配合需要將狀況之說明 傳送到使用者終端機、及從使用者終端機接收使用者之指 示都非常容易做到。 然而,如果使用者終端機4之使用者不需要即時知道 人工眼球1所傳送之數位影像111、物體種類、位置及個 數,則使用者終端機4及監視終端機5就不需要從人工眼 球1直接接收數位影像ill、物體種類、位置及個數。例 如資訊收集系統要測量道路之交通量、或要計算商店街之 人潮時,使用者就需要以數位影像111、物體種類、位置 及個數爲基礎之統計資料。因此如第6圖所示,申請專利 範圍第2項之發明,係具備關係資料庫及物件導向資料庫 等(具有如SQL之資料庫記述語言)之資料庫6之資訊收集 系統。此資料庫6,會將人工眼球1所傳送之數位影像111 、物體種類、位置及個數儲存爲如第7圖那樣之記錄後, 計算統計資料。例如第7圖之狀況,記錄係由儲存不同記 錄ID之記錄ID區域501、儲存現在時間之時間戳區域502 、儲存人工眼球1所具備之視覺裝置2之號碼之視覺裝置 號碼區域503、儲存表示物體種類及位置組數量之環境資 料數之區域504、儲存物體種類之種類區域505、儲存物體 34 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 498290 — ______Β7 五、發明說明 位置之位置區域506、儲存視覺裝置2所輸出之物體個數 之物體數區域507、及儲存數位影像111之數位影像區域 508所構成。利用此記錄,資料庫6,可用人工眼球1計算 在既定時間內所拍攝下之特定種類物體個數、或推測物體 之移動。而此資料庫6,會利用由使用者終端機4所傳送 之檢索鍵來檢索記錄,並將檢索結果傳至使用者終端機4 。因此使用者,會配合需要對資料庫6做存取,因僅可取 得對象之數位影像111、物體種類、位置、個數及統計資 料,故可減輕使用者及通訊網路8之負擔。 再者,如第8圖所示,在複數個使用者終端機4與資 料庫8之間有複數個監視終端機5存在,則監視者可提供 單獨之資訊及知識。例如便利商店及速食店等之經銷商連 鎖、及經營顧問等,可提供系列商店及顧客需要之資訊及 知識。而想預測交通量及人潮之仲介業者也可提供使用者 資訊。當然因使用者終端機4及監視終端機5都爲電腦系 統,故利用既存之技術,監視者可很容易地配合需要將狀 況之說明傳送到使用者終端機4,及接收從使用者終端機4 來之使用者意見。 最後,如第9圖所示,申請專利範圍第3項之發明, 使用者終端機4至少具備聲音合成裝置226及聲音辨識裝 置227之其中1項。聲音合成裝置226,會將中央控制裝置 221所接收之物體種類、位置及個數轉換成聲音訊號,透 過喇Β八224輸出。聲音辨識裝置227,會將麥克風225所收 集之使用者聲音轉換成暫時原版,輸出至中央控制裝置 35 498290 A7 ___ B7____ 五、發明說明($7) • 221。中央控制裝置221,會將此原版轉換成控制指令及檢 索鍵後傳送至人工眼球1、資料庫6、及監視終端機5。因 行動電話221上已經備有喇叭224、麥克風225、處理器 101及記憶體102,故將聲音合成程式及聲音辨識程式裝入 記憶體102後,行動電話211就可很容易地裝有聲音合成 裝置226及聲音辨識裝置227。另外有關導航系統,裝有聲 音合成裝置226及聲音辨識裝置227之東西已經上市銷售 。因此使用者終端機4之使用者,不用在顯示器222上抓 取視線、也不需操作麻煩之控制鈕223,就是控制移動式 攝影機10之方向、傾斜角度及倍率,就可聽到物體之種類 、位置及個數。 到目前爲止說明了有關由利用通訊網路8所連接之人 工眼球1、使用者終端機4及資料庫6所構成之資訊收集 系統。不過對於人工眼球1上之視覺裝置2及通訊裝置7 、與使用者終端機4上之中央控制裝置221僅做了簡單地 說明。因此以下,係說明有關以視覺裝置2及通訊裝置7 爲中心之人工眼球1之實施例,之後再說明有關中央控制 裝置221之實施例。 首先連接於通訊網路8之人工眼球1用第10圖所示那 樣之結構來表示。移動式攝影機1〇已經大多有上市銷售’ 掌上型之移動式攝影機1〇也有上市銷售。移動式攝影機 10所拍下之影像,係不讓畫面影像(frame image)之畫質降 低並當作模擬動態影像或數據動態影像傳送至視覺裝置2 。另外移動式攝影機1〇會將表示目前移動式攝影機10之 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: 線 498290 A7 ______B7 ___ 五、發明說明 狀態訊號傳送至視覺裝置2,另一方面視覺裝置2會將控 制移動式攝影機10之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦之訊號傳送 至移動式攝影機10。而且人工眼球1之製造者可在通訊裝 置7上使用市面上販賣之商品,也可使用通訊用平台簡單 地製造。 如第11圖所示,通訊裝置7具備影像壓縮裝置701及 影像傳送裝置702。影像壓縮裝置701,會從移動式攝影機 10所拍下之動態影像利用視覺裝置2輸入被產生之數位影 像111(第11圖之實線),並使用MPEG等之動態影像壓縮 技術及】PEG等之靜止影像壓縮技術來壓縮動態影像及畫面 影像,還將MPEG影像及〗PEG影像輸出至影像傳送裝置 702。影像傳送裝置702,可利用裝設TCP/IP等之通訊協定 ,透過網際網路等之通訊網路8將MPEG影像及JPEG影像 傳送至遠處之電腦系統上。並且因當作影像傳送裝置7〇2 之DS-COMA及MC-CDMA等之高區域無線技術’通訊裝 置7,可讓移動式攝影機1〇所拍下之動態影像更權宜’還 可不用選擇場所及時間就傳送訊息。 接著,人工眼球1,可代替數位影像111,輸出組合數 位影像111與物體區域影像142之巨集影像148。巨集影像 148係塗滿數位影像Π1之背景,故影像壓縮裝置701即使 不新增特別之功能也可達到高壓縮率。 截至目前所示之,人工眼球1可利用視覺裝置2控制 移動式攝影機1〇之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦’將拍下物體 之動態影像傳送至遠處。不過僅使用前述之人工眼球1 ’ 37 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The synchronous oscillation circuit includes two NOR gates for oscillation, two resistors for oscillation, two capacitors for oscillation, two lock circuits for synchronization, two NOR gates for synchronization, and a NOR gate for initialization, and The phase of the clock signals of the adjacent synchronous oscillating circuits is staggered by the synchronization signal output from the oscillating capacitor, so that the phases of the clock signals of all the synchronous oscillating circuits are consistent. The oscillating part of the aforementioned synchronous oscillating circuit ′ The two aforementioned NOR gates for oscillating and the two aforementioned oscillating capacitors are connected in a ring shape ′ The output and input of the aforementioned NOR gate for oscillating are connected using the aforementioned oscillation resistor. The aforementioned oscillation part is self-excited oscillation, and the aforementioned clock signal is output by the aforementioned NOR gate for oscillation. The aforementioned oscillating part is classified as A end and B 28. This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) * 1 I ------ IIIII · II (Please read the precautions on the back first Fill out this page again) line! 498290 A7 ___—__ B7_ V. Description of the invention (τΛ) • Two parts. The synchronous part of the synchronous oscillating circuit is classified into the aforementioned A terminal and the aforementioned B terminal corresponding to the aforementioned oscillating section. Regardless of the aforementioned A terminal or the aforementioned B terminal of the aforementioned synchronization section, after the aforementioned synchronous NOR gate system is combined with the aforementioned synchronous signal input from the outside, the aforementioned synchronization lock circuit stores the integration result. The synchronization lock circuit controls the oscillation NOR gate according to the integration result, and matches the phase and period of the synchronization signal of the synchronization oscillation circuit with the phase and period of the synchronization signal input from the outside. When the synchronous signal of the synchronous oscillating circuit and the synchronous signal input from the outside are irregular when the power is turned on, the NOR gate for the initialization will switch the NOR gate for the oscillation at the A terminal. The output is fixed at a low level and determines the aforementioned phase of the aforementioned synchronization signal. According to the present invention, a plurality of the aforementioned synchronous oscillator circuits can be connected to each other to synchronize the aforementioned synchronization signals of all the aforementioned synchronous oscillator circuits. In particular, when one clock is allocated to the entire LSI, the higher the frequency of the clock, the more the transmission delay time becomes a problem. However, by dispersing the synchronous oscillation circuit on the LSI, all the data circuits of the LSI can be synchronized. Therefore, various issues concerning the synchronization of the aforementioned LSIs will be properly resolved. The invention of claim 19 in the scope of patent application, an interlocking device, is characterized in that it is constituted by having two input resistors in the aforementioned synchronous oscillation circuit in the scope of claim 18 of the patent application. When the NOR gate is made of CMOS, if the input of the NOR gate is a current directly stored in the oscillation capacitor, the CMOS will be destroyed. The present invention is used at the A end and 29 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) -------------- install --- < please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page again) ¥-Line 498290 A7 ______B7___ V. Description of the Invention (/)) • Add the aforementioned input resistance to each oscillation part of the B terminal to protect the aforementioned CMOS of the NOR gate. If the resistance of the aforementioned input resistor 变 becomes larger, the aforementioned current flowing in the aforementioned NOR gate will decrease, so the time constant will be determined more accurately based on the aforementioned signaling resistor and the aforementioned oscillating capacitor, and all of the aforementioned synchronous oscillations The cycle of the aforementioned clock signal of the circuit will be easier to grasp. Therefore, various problems related to the synchronization of data circuits using the aforementioned CMOS will be appropriately resolved. [Preferred Embodiment of the Invention] Hereinafter, a series of embodiments of the information collection system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, as shown in FIG. 1, the invention of the first patent application scope is a system for displaying a digital image 111, the type, position, and number of objects, and outputting the digital image 111, the type, position, and number of objects. At least one of the artificial eyeballs 1 is connected to a communication network 8 with at least one user terminal 4 that transmits control commands. The artificial eyeball 1 has a mobile camera 10 controlled by a vision device 2, and the vision device 2 recognizes the types of objects in the digital image 111, a fixed position, and calculates the number. In addition, the visual device 2 controls the panning (horizontal movement), tilting (vertical movement), rolling (rolling), and zooming (telephoto) of the mobile camera 10 according to a control instruction ′ input from the user terminal 4. Each user terminal 4 can receive a digital image 111, an object type, a position, and a number of the selected artificial eyeballs 1 by selecting one of the plurality of artificial eyeballs 1. The user terminal 4 'is a central control device 221 with a communication function with the communication network 8 30 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---- I ---- -------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ·-• Line! 498290 A7 _____ Β7 __ V. Description of the invention (I) ------ II I II --- · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) • Digital image 111, object type, location, and The number of displays 222 and control buttons 223 such as a cursor key and a search dial Gog dial). Since the artificial eyeball 1 and the user terminal 4 are connected by a communication network 8 using wired technology and wireless technology, the artificial eyeball 1 is not necessarily installed beside the user. Since the visual device 2 can recognize the type of the object ', the artificial eyeball 1 does not need to transmit digital images frequently. Therefore, the user does not have to constantly monitor the user terminal 4. Line 丨-In addition, the simplest combination of the first invention in the scope of patent application is to use a wired communication network 8 to connect a manual eyeball 1 to a user terminal 4 and always transmit digital images 111, Information collection system for object type, position, number and control instructions. Such a system is a mobile phone 211 equipped with an artificial eyeball 1 as shown in FIG. This mobile phone 211 can display a moving image taken by the mobile camera 10 on the display 222. Therefore, the user of the mobile phone 211 can not only display his / her appearance on the display 222 regardless of the orientation or magnification of the mobile camera 10, but can also see the surrounding conditions captured by the mobile camera 10 through the display 222. Therefore, a plurality of such mobile phones 211 are prepared, and each mobile phone 211 transmits a digital image 111, an object type, a position, a number, and a control instruction via each other, thereby constructing an information collection system as shown in FIG. So far we have described mobile phones with artificial eyeball 1 and user terminal 4, but if artificial eyeball 1 and user terminal 4 are connected using communication network 8, artificial eyeball 1 and user terminal 4 Not necessarily need to be together. Therefore, the following is regarded as a user terminal. 31 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _________B7_ V. Description of the invention (> ° [) The car 321 is taken as an example to describe the setting position of the artificial eyeball 1. • I ------ 111 ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 丨 Line · As shown in Figure 3, set a manual At eyeball 1, the driver can confirm where there is a dead corner. That is, the vision device 2 'automatically pans, tilts, rolls, and zooms the mobile camera 10' to change the shooting range 326, and the driver can find pedestrians 324, bicycles, motorcycles 325, and other cars 321 passing behind the car 321, and Child playing near the trunk of car 321. Therefore, in parking lots and garages with many dead ends, the driver can safely go backwards. In addition, if the artificial eyeball 1 is provided in the center 323 behind the roof of the car 321, the driver can confirm a wide range of places that are difficult to confirm with the rearview mirror and side mirror (especially in the distance, etc.) and places that must be turned to notice. . That is, the vision device 2 automatically pans, tilts, rolls, and zooms the mobile camera 10, and changes the shooting range 326 ', and the driver can find pedestrians 324, bicycles, motorcycles 325, and other cars 321 approaching from behind the car 321. Therefore, the driver can safely open the door and drive. Although FIG. 3 illustrates the case where the artificial eyeball 1 is installed behind the car 321, the sides and the front of the car 321 are the same. When the artificial eyeball 1 is installed on the door and roof side of the car 321, the driver can confirm the condition of the children playing near the door and the roadside area. If artificial eyeball 1 is installed in the center of the bumper rod in front of the car 321 and in front of the roof, the driver can find pedestrians 324, bicycles, locomotives 325 and other cars 321 passing in front of the car 321, and the hood of the car Children playing nearby. Therefore, drivers can use parking lots, garages, and alleyways with more dead corners. 32 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ____B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (now 0) Move forward safely. If the artificial eyeball 1 is installed inside the roof of the car 321, the driver can grasp the condition of all the passengers. In particular, when the mobile phone 211 serving as the user terminal 4 is used, even if the driver gets out of the car 321, the driver can know the condition inside the car. Therefore, even if the car 321 is damaged, the driver can immediately reach the car 321, and even if a child or an infant is in the car, the driver can know the condition of the child or the infant. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, if the artificial eyeball 1 is installed behind the back of the wheelchair seat 331, and the user terminal 4 is installed on the armrest of the wheelchair seat 331, the user can determine the position of the wheelchair without twisting the body. Objects approaching behind. In particular, users of wheelchairs are mostly unable to move freely, or need to move forward in order to push the wheelchair. It is difficult for users to confirm the rear. However, with the present invention, the user of the wheelchair can move safely. And if the artificial eyeball 1 is set above the seat 331 or is set in the front, the mobile camera 10 can capture a wider range of traffic lights and road signs. In addition, a user terminal 4 is provided above the seat 331, or a wearable computer is used as the user terminal 4 'so that users with poor eyesight can also see the image of the display 222. So far, we have described the information collection system in which the user terminal 4 can continuously manage the artificial eyeball 1. However, with this information collection system, even if the user is sleeping, the artificial eyeball 1 will transmit the digital image 111, the type, position and number of objects. Moreover, the digital image 111, the type, position and number of objects transmitted from the artificial eyeball 1 are not necessarily necessary for the user. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 5, a few of the user terminals 4 are set as the monitoring terminals 5, and a plurality of 33 are replaced by the user. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). (%) ---- I I .--- I--II · II (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Meeting · Line-498290 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (1) Monitor operation The monitoring terminal 5 'allows the user to use the user terminal 4 only when needed. At this time, the monitoring terminal 5 'will simply transfer the digital image 111, the type, position, and number of the objects received from the appropriate artificial eyeball 1 to the user terminal 4 according to the instructions of the monitor. Both the user terminal 4 and the monitoring terminal 5 are computer systems, so using existing technology, the monitor cooperates with the need to transmit a description of the situation to the user terminal and receive instructions from the user terminal. It's very easy to do. However, if the user of the user terminal 4 does not need to know the digital image 111, the type, position and number of objects transmitted by the artificial eyeball 1 in real time, the user terminal 4 and the monitoring terminal 5 need not be retrieved from the artificial eyeball. 1 Directly receive digital image ill, object type, position and number. For example, when the information collection system is to measure the traffic volume on the road or to calculate the pedestrian flow in the shopping street, the user needs statistical data based on the digital image 111, the type, location and number of objects. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 6, the invention in the second scope of the patent application is an information collection system of database 6 having a relational database and an object-oriented database (having a database description language such as SQL). This database 6 stores the digital images 111, object types, positions, and numbers transmitted by the artificial eyeball 1 as records as shown in FIG. 7, and calculates statistical data. For example, in the situation shown in FIG. 7, the record is composed of a record ID area 501 that stores different record IDs, a time stamp area 502 that stores the current time, a visual device number area 503 that stores the number of the visual device 2 included in the artificial eyeball 1, and a storage indication Area 504 of the number of environmental data of the type of object and location group, area 505 of the type of stored object, storage object 34 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the back Note: Please fill in this page again.) 498290 — ______ Β7 5. The location area 506 where the invention is described, the number of objects area 507 that stores the number of objects output by the visual device 2, and the digital image area 508 that stores the digital image 111. Using this record, the database 6 can use the artificial eyeball 1 to calculate the number of specific types of objects captured in a given period of time, or to estimate the movement of the objects. The database 6 will use the search key transmitted by the user terminal 4 to retrieve the records, and transmit the search result to the user terminal 4. Therefore, the user can access the database 6 in accordance with the need. Only the digital image 111 of the object, the type, location, number and statistical data of the object can be obtained, so the burden on the user and the communication network 8 can be reduced. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8, if there are a plurality of monitoring terminals 5 between the plurality of user terminals 4 and the database 8, the monitor can provide separate information and knowledge. For example, dealer chains such as convenience stores and fast-food stores, and business consultants can provide the information and knowledge required by a series of stores and customers. Intermediaries who want to predict traffic and crowds can also provide user information. Of course, since the user terminal 4 and the monitoring terminal 5 are computer systems, using the existing technology, the monitor can easily transmit the description of the situation to the user terminal 4 and receive the user terminal from the user terminal. 4 Comments from users. Finally, as shown in FIG. 9, for the invention in the third scope of the patent application, the user terminal 4 is provided with at least one of the voice synthesis device 226 and the voice recognition device 227. The sound synthesizing device 226 converts the type, position, and number of objects received by the central control device 221 into a sound signal, and outputs the signal through RaB-8224. The voice recognition device 227 converts the user's voice collected by the microphone 225 into a temporary original and outputs it to the central control device 35 498290 A7 ___ B7____ 5. Description of the invention ($ 7) • 221. The central control device 221 converts this original version into a control command and a search key, and transmits it to the artificial eyeball 1, the database 6, and the monitoring terminal 5. Because the mobile phone 221 is already equipped with a speaker 224, a microphone 225, a processor 101, and a memory 102, after the sound synthesis program and the voice recognition program are loaded into the memory 102, the mobile phone 211 can be easily equipped with voice synthesis Device 226 and voice recognition device 227. In addition, the navigation system is equipped with a sound synthesizing device 226 and a voice recognition device 227. Therefore, the user of the user terminal 4 does not need to grab the line of sight on the display 222 and does not need to operate the troublesome control button 223, that is, to control the direction, tilt angle and magnification of the mobile camera 10 to hear the types of objects, Location and number. The information collection system composed of the artificial eyeball 1, the user terminal 4 and the database 6 connected by the communication network 8 has been described so far. However, the visual device 2 and the communication device 7 on the artificial eyeball 1 and the central control device 221 on the user terminal 4 are only briefly explained. Therefore, in the following, an embodiment of the artificial eyeball 1 centered on the visual device 2 and the communication device 7 will be described, and then an embodiment of the central control device 221 will be described later. The artificial eyeball 1 first connected to the communication network 8 is represented by a structure as shown in FIG. Most of the mobile cameras 10 have been sold on the market. 'Palm-type mobile cameras 10 have also been sold on the market. The images captured by the mobile camera 10 are transmitted to the visual device 2 as an analog motion image or a data motion image without degrading the image quality of the frame image. In addition, the mobile camera 10 will indicate that 36 of the current mobile camera 10 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -------------- equipment --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order: Line 498290 A7 ______B7 ___ 5. The invention description status signal is transmitted to the visual device 2, on the other hand the visual device 2 will control the shake of the mobile camera 10. The signals of panning, tilting, rolling and zooming are transmitted to the mobile camera 10. Moreover, the manufacturer of the artificial eyeball 1 can use commercially available products on the communication device 7 or simply use the communication platform. As shown in FIG. 11, the communication device 7 includes an image compression device 701 and an image transmission device 702. The image compression device 701 inputs the generated digital image 111 (solid line in FIG. 11) from the motion image captured by the mobile camera 10 using the vision device 2, and uses a dynamic image compression technology such as MPEG and PEG, etc. The still image compression technology compresses moving images and screen images, and also outputs MPEG images and PEG images to the image transmission device 702. The image transmission device 702 can transmit a MPEG image and a JPEG image to a remote computer system through a communication network 8 such as the Internet by using a communication protocol such as TCP / IP. And because it is a high-area wireless technology such as DS-COMA and MC-CDMA as the image transmission device 7 ', the communication device 7 can make the moving image taken by the mobile camera 10 more convenient. Send a message when it's time. Next, the artificial eyeball 1 can replace the digital image 111, and output a macro image 148 combining the digital image 111 and the object area image 142. The macro image 148 is filled with the background of the digital image Π1, so the image compression device 701 can achieve a high compression rate without adding special functions. As shown so far, the artificial eyeball 1 can use the visual device 2 to control the pan, tilt, roll and zoom of the mobile camera 10 to transmit the motion image of the object to a distance. However, only the aforementioned artificial eyeballs 1 ’37 are used. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _____B7__ 五、發明說明qp ----I---— 111--· I I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、不一定會出現應在數位影像in及巨集影像148上拍攝之 物體。尤其是應在數位影像in上拍攝之物體即使出現也 會沒有在巨集影像148上出現該物體之狀況’故使用巨集 影像148時要注意。因此對於物體區域141視覺裝置2所 產生之辨識結果會根據影像壓縮裝置701之使用方式(第11 圖中之虛線),影像壓縮裝置701,僅壓縮應拍攝物體所顯 示之數位影像111及巨集影像148,傳送至影像傳送裝置 702 中。 對於數位影像111之影像壓縮裝置7〇1之演算法如第 12圖所示。 在步驟711,判斷有無依序輸入之辨識結果。如果沒 有辨識結果(步驟711 : YES),則演算法就結束。如果有辨 識結果(步驟711 : NO),則轉至步驟712。只是若沒必要去 判斷辨識結果,也可設爲無限環形天線° -線- 在步驟712中,輸入辨識結果。 在步驟713中,判斷辨識結果是否爲特定之物體種類 。如果辨識結果不是特定之物體(步驟713 : N0) ’則回到 步驟712。如果辨識結果是特定之物體(步驟713 : YES), 則轉到步驟714。 在步驟714中,輸入數位影像111。 在步驟715中,使用MPEG及JPEG等之壓縮技術產 生壓縮數位影像。 在步驟716中,輸出壓縮數位影像。然後回到步驟 711。 38 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 五、發明說明(>4) 因此,影像壓縮裝置701僅可壓縮顯現特定物體之數 位影像111。另外壓縮巨集影像148時也是一樣。 使用超音波馬達之移動式攝影機10目前正由幾個硏究 機構及企業在開發,已經開發有包含外框直徑不到10公分 之移動式攝影機10。尤其是超音波馬達因不需要齒輪等之 機械式結構,故使用超音波馬達之移動式攝影機10更容易 小型化。如第2圖所示之在彳了動電話211上裝設使用超音 波馬達之移動式攝影機10,則人工眼球1 ’除了可利用又 小型又權宜之通訊裝置7及電池212 ’還可減少電池212之 消耗電力。 因此,使用裝有像超音波馬達那種小型多自由度馬達 之移動式攝影機10,人工眼球1之使用者可將人工眼球1 隨身攜帶。另外在最近,開發出了透過刺激產生器213、 連接器215及電極陣列端子214將CCD(電荷耦合元件)攝 影機之影像直接輸入腦中,使得全盲之人也可取得視覺之 技術。因此如第13圖所示,人工眼球1具備移動式攝影機 10、視覺裝置2、刺激產生器213、電極陣列端子214、連 接器215及電池212時,人工眼球1之使用者可利用在眼 鏡等上安裝人工眼球1、或放入眼窩內,取得廣範圍之視 角,辨識接近之物體,還可數物體之個數。 最後,對於一般用途之視覺裝置2之演算法雖已經被 開發,但若要適用於人工眼球1,則必須做一部分變更。 因此下列就主要對於視覺裝置2做說明。 首先,若爲尋找物體、辨識物體種類、及計算物體數 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _____B7__ V. Description of the invention qp ---- I ---- 111-- · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page), it may not appear in digital images in and macro images 148 On the subject. In particular, even if an object to be captured on the digital image in does not appear on the macro image 148, it is necessary to pay attention when using the macro image 148. Therefore, the recognition result generated by the vision device 2 for the object area 141 will be based on the use method of the image compression device 701 (the dashed line in FIG. 11). The image compression device 701 only compresses the digital image 111 and the macro displayed by the object to be captured. The image 148 is transmitted to the image transmitting device 702. The algorithm of the image compression device 701 for the digital image 111 is shown in FIG. In step 711, it is determined whether there are recognition results input in order. If there is no identification result (step 711: YES), the algorithm ends. If there is a recognition result (step 711: NO), go to step 712. However, if it is not necessary to judge the recognition result, it may be set to an infinite loop antenna ° -line-In step 712, the recognition result is input. In step 713, it is determined whether the recognition result is a specific object type. If the recognition result is not a specific object (step 713: N0) ', the process returns to step 712. If the recognition result is a specific object (step 713: YES), go to step 714. In step 714, a digital image 111 is input. In step 715, compression techniques such as MPEG and JPEG are used to generate a compressed digital image. In step 716, a compressed digital image is output. Then return to step 711. 38 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 V. Description of the invention (> 4) Therefore, the image compression device 701 can only compress the digital image 111 that shows a specific object. It is also the same when compressing a macro image 148. A mobile camera 10 using an ultrasonic motor is currently being developed by several research institutes and enterprises, and a mobile camera 10 including an outer frame diameter of less than 10 cm has been developed. In particular, since the ultrasonic motor does not require a mechanical structure such as a gear, the mobile camera 10 using the ultrasonic motor can be miniaturized more easily. As shown in FIG. 2, a mobile camera 10 using an ultrasonic motor is installed on the mobile phone 211. The artificial eyeball 1 ′ can reduce the battery in addition to a small and expedient communication device 7 and a battery 212 ′. Power consumption of 212. Therefore, using the mobile camera 10 equipped with a small multi-degree-of-freedom motor such as an ultrasonic motor, the user of the artificial eyeball 1 can carry the artificial eyeball 1 with him. In addition, recently, a technology has been developed to directly input the image of a CCD (charge coupled device) camera into the brain through a stimulus generator 213, a connector 215, and an electrode array terminal 214, so that a completely blind person can also obtain vision. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, when the artificial eyeball 1 includes a mobile camera 10, a vision device 2, a stimulus generator 213, an electrode array terminal 214, a connector 215, and a battery 212, a user of the artificial eyeball 1 can use the glasses, etc. Install artificial eyeballs 1 or put it in the eye socket to obtain a wide range of perspectives, identify close objects, and count the number of objects. Finally, although the algorithm for the general-purpose vision device 2 has been developed, if it is to be applied to the artificial eyeball 1, some changes must be made. Therefore, the following mainly describes the visual device 2. First, if you want to find objects, identify the types of objects, and calculate the number of objects 39 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ___B7_ 五、發明說明(υΊ) •量之視覺裝置2(參照特願平11-253634、特願2000-64544) ,則移動式攝影機10具有變更面對水平方向及垂直方向之 機關,從外部輸入控制移動角度之指令,可分別做搖攝及 俯仰。另外移動式攝影機10具備變更拍攝影像之倍率之機 關,從外部輸入控制倍率之指令,就可迅速放大。再加上 移動式攝影機10具備多自由度馬達時,移動式攝影機1〇 因具有以鏡片光軸設爲中心之迴轉機關,並從外部輸入控 制傾斜度之指令,則可翻滾。因此移動式攝影機10可根據 外部之指令讓攝影機本身細微地振動。因此移動式攝影機 10所拍下之動態影像之畫面影像會產生模糊,讓畫面影像 中之物體正好在振動時拍攝。而靜止物體是否正好在移動 畫面影像中被拍攝。 接著,移動式攝影機10可利用搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變 焦等之控制指令配合需要輸出移動後目前之方向、傾斜度 及倍率,而正在移動中或停止之移動式攝影機10之狀態也 會配合需要輸出。此時若視覺裝置2可控制移動式攝影機 ίο之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦,則制移動式攝影機爲 了可用適當之大小拍攝移動物體及靜止物體’此視覺裝置 2可變更移動式攝影機10之方向、傾斜度及倍率。 因此移動式攝影機10爲了可用適當之大小拍攝移動物 體及靜止物體,視覺裝置2會配合功能分爲3個座標系’ 即,攝影機座標系、影像座標系及環境座標系。第1,攝 影機座標系,係如文字移動式攝影機1〇爲了分別用最小之 控制單位控制搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦,所使用之攝影機 40 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (υΊ) • Vision device 2 (refer to Japanese Patent Application No. 11-253634, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-64544), the mobile camera 10 has a mechanism for changing the horizontal and vertical directions, from External input commands for controlling the moving angle can be used for panning and tilting respectively. In addition, the mobile camera 10 is provided with a mechanism for changing the magnification of a captured image, and an external input of a command for controlling the magnification can be quickly enlarged. In addition, when the mobile camera 10 is equipped with a multi-degree-of-freedom motor, the mobile camera 10 can roll because it has a turning mechanism centered on the optical axis of the lens and an external command to control the inclination. Therefore, the mobile camera 10 can cause the camera itself to vibrate slightly according to an external command. Therefore, the screen image of the moving image captured by the mobile camera 10 will be blurred, so that the object in the screen image is shot just when it is vibrating. Whether the stationary object is just captured in the moving image. Next, the mobile camera 10 can use control instructions such as pan, tilt, roll, and zoom to cooperate with the output of the current direction, tilt, and magnification after the movement. The status of the mobile camera 10 while it is moving or stopped will also be matched. Needs output. At this time, if the visual device 2 can control the panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming of the mobile camera, then the mobile camera can be used to shoot moving objects and stationary objects with an appropriate size. Orientation, tilt, and magnification. Therefore, in order for the mobile camera 10 to capture moving objects and stationary objects with appropriate sizes, the visual device 2 will be divided into three coordinate systems according to the function, that is, a camera coordinate system, an image coordinate system, and an environmental coordinate system. First, the camera coordinate system, such as the text mobile camera 10, in order to control the pan, tilt, roll and zoom with the smallest control units, respectively, 40 cameras used in this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _ B7 ______________ 五、發明說明( •內部之三維球形座標系。一般攝影機座標系之零點係被叫 做靜止位置之移動式攝影機10本來之位置。攝影機座標系 是唯一可表示移動物體及靜止物體之物理位置之座標系。 無論如何攝影機座標系因會依每個移動式攝影機1〇之機種 不同,故攝影機座標系並無泛用性。因此視覺裝置2必須 用其他裝置隱藏攝影機座標系。第2,影像座標系,係以 用移動式攝影機10所拍下之畫面影像中央,亦即鏡片光軸 爲零點,以像素當作單位之二維座標系。這是用於表示要 在畫面影像中之哪個像素上放置移動物體及靜止物體。因 此影像座標系雖然適合區分畫面影像中之複數個移動物體 及靜止物體之細部位置,但只有影像座標系並無法表示這 些移動物體及靜止物體之物理上位置。第三,環境座標系 ,係視覺裝置2爲了邏輯性地統一表示在內部之移動物體 及靜止物體之位置而使用之三維球狀座標系。環境座標系 在水平方向及垂直方向會使用以弧度當作單位之角度,爲 表示物體大小與物體之距離面積,距離方向上使用以1.0 爲單位之實數。因一般物體之大小在短時間內不會有極端 之變化,故到物體之距離與移動式攝影機10之倍率可當作 比例。環境座標系之零點係隨意之。即,環境座標系原則 上係爲了表示環境座標系上之隨便2點之相對座標時使用 。視覺裝置2會利用移動式攝影機10將可拍攝之環境中之 移動物體及靜止物體投射在環境座標系上,可區分複數個 移動物體及靜止物體。 因此攝影機座標系及影像座標系必須與每個環境座標 41 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' " --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 線! 498290 A7 ______B7_— ____ 五、發明說明(>°|) i - .系相互轉換座標。達到該任務之裝置有攝影機/環境座標轉 換裝置20、影像/環境座標轉換裝置21及運動控制裝置23( 參照第14圖)。這些裝置係從移動式攝影機10及影像取得 裝置11(參照第14圖)之規格求出攝影機座標系及影像座標 系之各單位,並計算要轉換成環境座標系之行列。還利用 計算從攝影機座標系到環境座標系之轉換行列之相反行列 ,也可求出從環境座標系到攝影機座標系之轉換行列。只 是因攝影機座標系之零點爲移動式攝影機10之靜止位置, 故從攝影機座標系被轉換之環境座標系位置成爲環境座標 系上移動式攝影機10之靜止位置之相對位置。另一方面’ 從環境座標系被轉換之攝影機座標系位置會成爲來自攝影 機座標系上之移動式攝影機10現在位置之相對位置。再加 上,因影像座標系爲二維座標系’故只有在影像座標系不 能轉換成環境座標系。因此在影像/環境座標轉換裝置21 是使用以環境座標系表示之移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率 ,與畫面影像中之移動物體及靜止物體之區域大小’利用 計算隨時轉換行列,設定爲可從影像座標系轉換爲環境座 標系。還有從影像座標系被轉換之環境座標系位置,成爲 來自影像中心之相對位置。 而移動式攝影機10傾斜度時’視覺裝置2不能如前述 那樣求出環境座標系。例如第15圖所示那樣’在形成邊緣 資訊影像115中之位置α上有傾向角度Θ逆時鐘轉動之物 體之形成邊緣資訊丨丨4。此時對於對應鏡片光軸之形成邊 緣資訊影像115中心〇 ’就像逆時鐘轉動時角度6>迴轉那 42 --------------裝—— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} · -線! 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公i ) 498290498290 A7 _ B7 ______________ 5. Description of the invention (• The internal three-dimensional spherical coordinate system. The zero point system of the general camera coordinate system is called the static position of the original position of the mobile camera. The camera coordinate system is the only one that can represent moving objects and stationary objects. The coordinate system of the physical location. In any case, the camera coordinate system is different for each mobile camera 10, so the camera coordinate system is not universal. Therefore, the visual device 2 must use other devices to hide the camera coordinate system. 2. The image coordinate system is a two-dimensional coordinate system based on the center of the screen image captured by the mobile camera 10, that is, the optical axis of the lens is zero and the pixel is the unit. This is used to indicate that Which pixel is placed with a moving object and a stationary object. Therefore, although the image coordinate system is suitable to distinguish the detailed positions of a plurality of moving objects and stationary objects in the screen image, only the image coordinate system cannot represent the physical characteristics of these moving objects and stationary objects. Location. Third, the environmental coordinate system, which is the visual device 2 in order to logically One is a three-dimensional spherical coordinate system used to indicate the position of a moving object and a stationary object inside. The environmental coordinate system uses an angle in radians as the unit in the horizontal and vertical directions to indicate the size of the object and the distance area of the object. Real numbers in units of 1.0 are used in the distance direction. Because the size of a general object will not change extremely in a short time, the distance to the object and the magnification of the mobile camera 10 can be regarded as a ratio. The zero point system of the environmental coordinate system It is arbitrary. That is, the environmental coordinate system is used in principle to indicate the relative coordinates of two points on the environmental coordinate system in principle. The visual device 2 uses the mobile camera 10 to project moving objects and stationary objects in the environment that can be photographed. The environmental coordinate system can distinguish between a plurality of moving objects and stationary objects. Therefore, the camera coordinate system and image coordinate system must be related to each environmental coordinate 41. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '' " -------------- install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · Thread! 498290 A7 ______B7 _— ____ V. Explanation of the invention (> ° |) i-. It is a coordinate conversion system. The devices that achieve this task include a camera / environmental coordinate conversion device 20, an image / environmental coordinate conversion device 21, and a motion control device 23 (see section Figure 14). These devices calculate the camera coordinate system and image coordinate system units from the specifications of the mobile camera 10 and the image acquisition device 11 (refer to Figure 14), and calculate the ranks to be converted into the environmental coordinate system. By calculating the opposite rank of the conversion sequence from the camera coordinate system to the environmental coordinate system, the conversion rank from the environmental coordinate system to the camera coordinate system can also be obtained. However, the zero point of the camera coordinate system is the stationary position of the mobile camera 10, so The position of the environmental coordinate system converted from the camera coordinate system becomes the relative position of the stationary position of the mobile camera 10 on the environmental coordinate system. On the other hand, the position of the camera coordinate system converted from the environmental coordinate system will become the relative position from the current position of the mobile camera 10 on the camera coordinate system. In addition, since the image coordinate system is a two-dimensional coordinate system, it cannot be converted into the environmental coordinate system only in the image coordinate system. Therefore, the image / environmental coordinate conversion device 21 uses the orientation and magnification of the mobile camera 10 represented by the environmental coordinate system, and the area size of moving objects and stationary objects in the screen image. The image coordinate system is converted to the environmental coordinate system. The position of the environmental coordinate system which is converted from the image coordinate system becomes the relative position from the image center. On the other hand, when the tilt angle of the mobile camera 10 is used, the vision device 2 cannot obtain the environmental coordinate system as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 15 ', the formation edge information of the object having a tendency angle θ counterclockwise on the position α in the formation edge information image 115 is formed. At this time, the center of the edge information image 115 corresponding to the optical axis of the lens is like the angle 6 when rotating counterclockwise and turning 42 -------------- installation-(Please read the back first Please pay attention to this page before filling in this page} · -line! This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 male i) 498290

β工 cos9 一 sin0 Οίχ 人 sin0 cosO A7 五、發明說明(^) .樣讓移動式攝影機10迴轉,則邊緣資訊形成裝置15就可 輸出迴轉後形成邊緣資訊影像丨81。即,在迴轉後形成邊 緣資訊影像181中之位置α之物體會變成直立,使得物體 種類之辨識更容易。不過從迴轉後形成邊緣資訊影像181 中之位置α求出之影像座標系之座標,與形成邊緣資訊影 像115中之位置ck所求出之影像座標系之座標比較起來會 成爲時鐘轉動時角度0迴轉之位置。因此角度0變大或隨 著距離σ α變長,兩座標之偏移會變大。因此爲了要從迴 轉後形成邊緣資訊影像181中之位置^求出迴轉前之影像 座標系座標,只要求出讓迴轉後形成邊緣資訊影像181中 之位置α逆時鐘轉動時之角度Θ迴轉之位置/5即可。 在此若將迴轉後形成邊緣資訊影像181中之位置^之 影像座標當作ay);位置冷之影像座標當作(召X,召。 ,則可根據數式1從U X,U y)求出d,冷y)。 ⑴ 因從迴轉後形成邊緣資訊影像181中之位置α可求出 位置/3,亦即形成邊緣資訊影像Η5中之位置α,故當作 結果之影像/環境座標轉換裝置21可從迴轉後形成邊緣資 訊影像181中之位置α正確地求出環境座標。 43 --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(Lf( > ----I------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •線· 使用前述之攝影機座標系、影像座標系及環境座標系 ,說明視覺裝置2之實施例。如第Η圖所示’視覺裝置2 之實施例,利用之裝置有:接受移動式攝影機10之攝影訊 號(畫面影像)後轉換爲適當之格式與大小之數位影像111之 影像取得裝置11;在既定時間儲存數位影像111之影像記 憶裝置12;在輸出地保持到輸出前之數位影像111之影像 保持裝置39;從2個數位影像111產生移動物體之邊緣資 訊影像113之邊緣資訊產生裝置14;將邊緣資訊影像113 更明確地形成明瞭之形成邊緣資訊影像H5之邊緣資訊形 成裝置15;用以分離由形成邊緣資訊114所區分之區域之 物體/背景分離裝置16;用以重合數位影像111與被分離之 區域之遮罩裝置40;在輸出地保持到輸出前之遮罩影像 148之影像保持裝置39;將分離區域正規化爲影像大小之 區域正規化裝置27;在向輸出地輸出前保持正規化影像 145之影像保持裝置39;利用形成邊緣資訊影像115解析 移動物體大致之形狀之幾何解析裝置37;對於已被正規化 之移動物體之區域進行模式匹配之模式匹配裝置38;從匹 配結果影像147及幾何解析結果辨識移動物體種類之影像 辨識裝置29;檢測由粗邊緣資訊112所區分之各區域之位 置及大小之位置/大小檢測裝置17;將表示移動式攝影機 10之方向及倍率之攝影機座標系轉換爲環境座標系(視覺裝 置2之基本的座標系)之攝影機/環境座標轉換裝置20;使 用以環境座標系表示之移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率,將 位置/大小檢測裝置Π檢測出來之移動物體之位置轉換爲 44 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 飞〜9〇 A7 、-------^____B7 _— -- 五、發明說明 ---III.---II---· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 壤境座標系之影像/環境座標轉換裝置21;從位置/大小檢 測裝置17檢測出之複數個移動物體位置選擇1個之位置選 擇裝置22;以1毫秒(ms)單位計算時間之計時裝置32’從 以環境座標系表示之移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率、以環 境座標系表示之複數個移動物體之位置、移動物體之種類 、幾何解析結果、及時刻製作環境地圖之環境理解裝置31 :在輸出地保持輸出前之環境地圖之環境地圖保持裝置33 ;利用環境地圖推測接著應辨識之移動物體位置之物體位 置推算裝置34;從外部輸入要控制移動式攝影機10之方 向及倍率之控制指令之控制指令輸入裝置24;產生讓移動 式攝影機10振動之指令之振動指令產生裝置25;使用以 環境座標系表示之移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率’ 一邊參 照從位置選擇裝置22、控制指令輸入裝置24、.振動指令產 生裝置25及物體位置推算裝置34輸入之4個位置’一邊 決定以攝影機座標系表示之移動式攝影機10之位置之運動 控制裝置23;產生讓移動式攝影機1〇移動至運動控制裝 置23所決定之攝影機座標系位置上之指令之攝影機指令產 生裝置26。 影像取得裝置11從移動式攝影機1〇輸入動態影像之 畫面影像時,若動態影像爲模擬訊號,則會利用A/D轉換 將畫面影像轉換爲數位訊號。尤其是若可直接輸入光電二 極體等攝影元件207之電壓,則只要用A/D轉換轉換成適 當之位元數之數位訊號即可。動態影像爲數位訊號時’若 被壓縮就解壓縮,若未被壓縮就直接輸入。因可用這些區 45 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 五、發明說明(屮)) 分出動態影像中任-畫面影像,故切出此畫面影像定爲數 位影像m。此驗影像111會_適當之格式,保有以前 之任-影像大小,故影像取得裝置11 照以像素爲單位 之影像資料轉換個格式,在視覺裝置2切出必要之影像大 小部份,並當作數位影像11丨輸出。如果影像取得裝置11 可平行地輸出數位影像ill所有像素,則從影像取得裝置 11對影像記憶裝置12之通訊,可根據每個像素平行地進 行。 影像記憶裝置12若從影像取得裝置11輸入數位影像 111,則會配合視覺裝置2之時間分解能或各裝置之計算能 力儲存既定時間數位影像丨11。即,在此既定時間中即使 數位影像111被輸入影像記憶裝置12也不能變更儲存影像 ,故後續之各種裝置可在不同之時間點輸入同樣地數位影 像111。而且因影像記億裝置12對數位影像111並不進行 影像處理,故對於數位影像丨丨1全部的像素會直接保有二 維之相位關係儲存。如果影像記憶裝置12可平行輸出數位 影像111全部的像素,則從影像記億裝置12到影像保持裝 置39、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、色彩資訊產生裝置41及遮 罩裝置40之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 影像保持裝置39若從影像記憶裝置12輸入數位影像 111,如果數位影像1H之輸出地要求適當格式之數位影像 111,則會在數位影像111之輸出地要求之格式上變更數位 影像111。之後影像保持裝置39爲了可確實地將數位影像 111傳送至數位影像111之輸出地’會儲存一定期間之數位 46 ----I--1111---· I I C請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·- --線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公爱) 498290 A7 B7 _______ 五、發明說明 -------------- I --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .影像111。影像保持裝置39若限定轉換之格式,則僅在每 個像素之鄰域處理可轉換數位影像111,故適合平行化。 如果影像保持裝置39可平行輸出數位影像111之所有像素 ,則從影像保持裝置39到數位影像111輸出地之通訊,可 在每個像素上平行地進行。 邊緣資訊產生裝置14若從影像記憶裝置12輸入數位 影像111,則會與之前被輸入之數位影像111比較’產生移 動物體之粗邊緣資訊影像丨13 °邊緣資訊產生裝置14因可 僅在每個像素鄰域處理產生粗邊緣資訊影像113 ’故適合 平行化。如果邊緣資訊產生裝置14可平行地輸出粗邊緣資 訊影像113所有像素’則從邊緣資訊產生裝置14到邊緣資 訊形成裝置15及位置/大小檢測裝置17之通訊’可在每個 像素上平行地進行。 -線· 邊緣資訊形成裝置15若從邊緣資訊產生裝置14輸入 粗邊緣資訊影像113,則用影像記憶裝置12參照被記憶之 數位影像111,產生比粗邊緣資訊影像113更明確之淸楚移 動物體之形成邊緣資訊影像115。邊緣資訊形成裝置15因 可僅在每個像素鄰域處理產生形成粗邊緣資訊影像115, 故適合平行化。如果邊緣資訊形成裝置15可平行地輸出形 成邊緣資訊影像115所有像素,則從邊緣資訊形成裝置15 到物體/背景分離裝置16、幾何解析裝置37及傾斜度檢測 裝置42之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 物體/背景分離裝置16若從邊緣資訊形成裝置15輸入 形成邊緣資訊影像115,則會將包含於移動物體之物體區 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明(L^ ----II---I--I I I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .域141中之像素及包括於背景之像素分離成不同之群組’ 以群組單位依次輸出分離結果。另外物體區域141不管是 否鄰接而用形成邊緣資訊114明確地區分時,物體/背景分 離裝置16可將這些物體區域141分離爲不同群組。因此群 組數也會有3以上。物體/背景分離裝置16因可僅在每個 像素鄰域處理分離物體區域141與背景’故適合平行化。 如果物體/背景分離裝置16可平行地輸出物體區域影像142 所有像素,則從物體/背景分離裝置16到遮罩裝置40及區 域正規化裝置27之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 遮罩裝置40若從物體/背景分離裝置16輸入物體區域 影像142,則參照用影像記憶裝置12儲存之數位影像111 ,利用塗蓋沒與物體區域141重複之像素,產生遮罩影像 148。遮罩裝置40因可僅在每個像素鄰域處理產生遮罩影 像148,故適合平行化。如果遮罩裝置40可平行地輸出遮 罩影像148所有像素,則從遮罩裝置40對影像保持裝置39 之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 影像保持裝置39若從遮罩裝置40輸入遮罩影像H8 ,如果遮罩影像148之輸出地要求適當之格式之遮罩影像 148,則遮罩影像148之輸出地會在要求之格式上轉換遮罩 影像148。之後影像保持裝置39爲了可將遮罩影像148確 實地傳送至遮罩影像148之輸出地,會儲存一定期間遮罩 影像148。影像保持裝置39若限定轉換之格式,因可僅在 每個像素鄰域處理轉換遮罩影像148,故適合平行化。如 果影像保持裝置39可平行地輸出遮罩影像148所有像素’ 48 is尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 2犯公釐) " 498290 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明(id) 則從影像保持裝置39對遮罩影像148之輸出地之通訊’可 在每個像素上平行地進行。 區域正規化裝置27若分別從物體/背景分離裝置16及 影像取得裝置11輸入物體區域影像142及數位影像111, 則會從數位影像111切出移動物體之分離物體區域143 ’ 一 邊使分離物體區域143變形一邊配合數位影像111之影像 大小盡可能地補足及擴大而產生正規化影像145。區域正 規化裝置27因可僅在每個像素鄰域處理將分離物體區域 143正規化,故適合平行化。如果區域正規化裝置27可平 行地輸出正規化影像145所有像素,則從區域正規化裝置 27對模式匹配裝置38及影像保持裝置39之通訊’可在每 個像素上平行地進行。 影像保持裝置39若從區域正規化裝置27輸入正規化 影像145,如果正規化影像145之輸出地要求適當之格式之 正規化影像145,則正規化影像H5之輸出地會在要求之格 式上轉換正規化影像145。之後影像保持裝置39爲了可將 正規化影像145確實地傳送至正規化影像145之輸出地’ 會儲存一定期間正規化影像H5。影像保持裝置39若限定 轉換之格式,因可僅在每個像素鄰域處理轉換正規化影像 145,故適合平行化。如果影像保持裝置39可平行地輸出 正規化影像145所有像素,則從影像保持裝置39對正規化 影像145之輸出地之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 幾何解析裝置37若從邊緣資訊形成裝置15輸入形成 邊緣資訊影像115,則會藉由進行撞擊抽樣法、近交轉換 49 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: -1線' 498290 A7 ______—_B7 五、發明說明(L^j) 、遠交轉換及一半轉換等之幾何解析,推測畫面影像中之 移動物體形狀,並產生幾何解析結果。在習知影像辨識上 ,係藉從影像本身抽出直接直線等,使用不讓移動物體之 位置及大小左右之各種轉換等,進行辨識影像中之物體。 因此,即使處理單純,組合之數量也變龐大,結果需龐大 之計算量,且需耗費長時間才取得期望之結果,或只得到 品質低之辨識結果。不過此視覺裝置2,會對於畫面影像 中之移動物體之模式由物體/背景分離裝置16、區域正規化 裝置27、模式匹配裝置38及影像辨識裝置29進行辨識處 理。但是物體/背景分離裝置16、區域正規化裝置27、模 式匹配裝置38及影像辨識裝置29所進行之辨識處理不擅 長辨識如移動物體之輪廓般之幾何圖形。因此,幾何解析 裝置37藉由以簡單的裝置大約地解析形成邊緣資訊影像 115 ’而使容易辨識幾何圖形之外,也可減低幾何解析裝置 37本身之負擔。又,因使用幾何解析裝置37,故模式匹配 裝置38不需辨識幾何圖形而模式匹配裝置38就被簡化。 再者,利用幾何解析結果,環境理解裝置31將可確實地高 速製作環境地圖。幾何解析結果會從幾何解析裝置37輸出 至影像辨識裝置29及環境理解裝置31。 模式匹配裝置38若從區域正規化裝置27輸入正規化 影像145,則會以像素爲單位將正規化影像145與複數個樣 板影像146比較,並產生匹配結果影像147。另外,模式匹 配裝置38也可配合視覺裝置2之目的,使用事前準備好之 樣板影像146,將被輸入之正規化影像145當作樣板影像 50 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------i--------^ —-------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明(tfl1) ‘ 146使用。一般之正規化影像H5之各像素因爲類似不同之 樣板影像146所對應之像素,故匹配結果影像147將變成 由幾塊所構成之斑紋。如果模式匹配裝置38可平行地輸出 匹配結果影像147之所有像素,則從模式匹配裝置38到影 像辨識裝置29之通訊可在每個像素上平行地進行。 影像辨識裝置29若從模式匹配裝置38輸入匹配結果 影像147,則會使用適當之模式辨識裝置辨識匹配結果影 像147,並輸出辨識結果,即,移動物體之種類。影像辨 識裝置29之模式辨識法上,除了可像多數決那樣單純地選 擇匹配結果影像147中最多的匹配結果,還可利用由誤褰 逆傳播法(back-propagation)所學習之感應器等神經網路 (neural network)。另外使用神經網路時,可使用神經網路專 用加速器做到平行化及高速化。匹配結果影像147之辨識 結果,亦即移動物體之種類會從影像辨識裝置29輸出到辨 識結果保持裝置30及環境理解裝置31。只是,影像辨識 裝置29若從幾何解析裝置37輸入幾何解析結果,則影像 辨識裝置29會先判斷是否爲當作辨識對象之圖形。如果幾 何解析結果爲對象外之圖形,則影像辨識裝置29不會動作 。幾何解析結果若爲對象圖形,則影像辨識裝置29會辨議 匹配結果影像147。例如根據誤差逆傳潘法之學習感應器 之情況,每個對象圖形會利用匹配結果影像147製作學習 資料,之後影像辨識裝置29會根據幾何解析結果選擇學習 資料,感應器也可對於對象圖形進行有效率之模式辨識。 即,幾何解析結果若爲圓形,僅會利用人之臉或球狀之圓 51 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項存填寫本I) 裝 丨線 498290 A7 _ B7____ 五、發明說明(f|) •--------I I---. I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ,形物體之學習資料;幾何解析結果若爲三角形’則僅會利 用道路標誌或山間等之三角形物體之學習資料。如此一來 不僅可利用小規模之感應器辨識多數之物體’感應器本身 也可有效率地學習。 辨識結果保持裝置30若從影像辨識裝置29輸入匹配 結果影像147之辨識結果’如果辨識結果之輸出地要求適 當之格式之訊號,則辨識結果之輸出地會在要求之格式上 轉換辨識結果。之後辨識結果保持裝置30爲了可將辨識結 果確實地傳送至辨識結果之輸出地,會儲存一定期間辨識 結果。 -線! 位置/大小檢測裝置17若從邊緣資訊產生裝置14輸入 粗邊緣資訊影像113,則會根據粗邊緣資訊112檢測被指示 之移動物體之區域位置及大小。位置/大小檢測裝置17因 可僅在每個像素鄰域處理’產生表示移動物體之區域位置 及大小之檢測結果之重複資訊影像132,故適合平行化。 如果位置/大小檢測裝置17可平行地輸出重複資訊影像132 所有像素,則從位置/大小檢測裝置17對影像/環境座標轉 換裝置21之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 攝影機/環境座標轉換裝置20及影像/環境座標轉換裝 置21,將以位置/大小檢測裝置17所產生之重複資訊影像 132表示之移動物體區域之位置轉換爲環境座標系之位置 。此時畫面影像中之移動物體區域之位置總數若爲2個以 上,則環境座標系上也會有2個以上之位置存在。因此控 制移動式攝影機10之搖攝、俯仰及迅速放大對於任何1個 52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明(p) ---- (請先閲讀背面之注意事頊存填寫本頁) --線 移動物體調整移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率,有需要從環 境座標系上之複數個位置中之1個。位置選擇裝置22會根 據一定之判斷基準,選擇環境座標系上之1個位置。在此 所使用之判斷基準主要如下。第1,位置選擇裝置22會選 擇最接近環境座標系上之移動物體位置中之移動式攝影機 10者(或最大者)。當移動物體較遠(或較小)時,因邊緣資訊 產生裝置14會有產生雜訊之可能性,位置'選擇裝置22會 從環境座標系上之複數個位置中選擇移動物體存在之準確 率較高者。第2,在環境座標系上之一定範圍內有複數個 位置集中時,位置選擇裝置22會選擇其中之1。另外在此 可考慮有2個可能性。1個是邊緣資訊產生裝置14有可能 對於1個移動物體產生分散之粗邊緣資訊112,另外1個是 實際上複數個移動物體有存在之可能性。因此位置選擇裝 置22只要選擇適當之1個位置即可。第三,當環境座標系 上大多數之位置幾乎爲相同距離(或幾乎爲相同大小)時, 位置選擇裝置22會選擇最接近之位置,亦即最接近移動式 攝影機10方向之位置。將這些配合用途或狀況利用適當之 組合,位置選擇裝置22可從環境座標系上之複數個位置中 選擇1個。 計時裝置32會用計時器電路以1毫秒單位輸出現在時 間。現在時間會不斷地從計時裝置32輸出至環境理解裝置 31 0 環境理解裝置.31若從影像辨識裝置29輸入移動物體 之物體區域141之辨識結果,會製作辨識結果、移動式攝 53 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _B7__ 五、發明說明(夕I) 影機10之環境座標系上之位置'及從現在時間形成之環境 資料。而環境理解裝置31若從影像/環境座標轉換裝置21 輸入畫面影像中之所有物體區域141之環境座標系上之位 置,則僅物體區域141之數製作加上無效資料形成之辨識 結果、移動式攝影機10之環境座標系上之位置與畫面影像 中之1個物體區域141之環境座標系上之位置之位置、及 現在時間形成之環境資料。此時之環境地圖會成爲從現在 時間到既定時間前製作之環境資料之集合,環境資料中之 位置會用以移動式攝影機10之靜止位置當作零點之環境座 標系表示。環境理解裝置31會對於環境地圖與時刻之經過 一起追加及刪除環境資料。而環境理解裝置31,將重複之 內容之環境資料置換爲位置之變化等與刪除一起,辨識結 果爲無效資料之環境資料中之位置,當辨識結果爲不是無 效資料之其他環境資料中之位置附近時,辨識結果會刪除 無效資料之環境資料。再加上,辨識結果爲無不是效資料 之環境資料中之位置,辨識結果不是無效資料之其他環境 資料中位置之附近時,如果這些環境資料中之辨識結果爲 —致,則會刪除前者之環境資料。根據環境資料之記錄時 間與環境資料中位置之附近範圍,決定環境地圖之精確度 。環境座標系上之現在移動式攝影機10之位置被追加於環 境地圖後,環境地圖會從環境理解裝置31輸出至環境地圖 保持裝置33、35、及物體位置推算裝置34。不過,環境理 解裝置31若從幾何解析裝置37輸入幾何解析結果,首先 影像辨識裝置29會判斷是否爲當作辨識對象之圖形。如果 54 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) " (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂: 498290 A7 _____ B7_^_ 五、發明說明 幾何解析結果爲對象外之圖形,會在移動式攝影機10環境 座標系上之位置附近,而且環境理解裝置31會立即從環境 地圖刪除辨識結果爲無效資料之環境資料。藉此從環境地 圖刪除不必要之環境資料,物體位置推算裝置34等也不用 輸出不必要之物體推測位置。幾何解析結果爲對象圖形時 ,環境理解裝置31會等待來自既定時間影像辨識裝置29 之辨識結果。 環境地圖保持裝置33若從環境理解裝置31輸入環境 地圖,如果環境地圖之輸出地要求適當之格式之訊號,則 環境地圖之輸出地會在要求之格式上轉換環境地圖。之後 環境地圖保持裝置33爲了可將環境地圖確實地傳送至環境 地圖之輸出地,會儲存一定期間環境地圖。 物體計數裝置35若從環境理解裝置31輸入環境地圖 ,會計算環境地圖中,具有指示特定物體之辨識結果之環 境資料數,產生任意物體數。環境資料中之辨識結果,可 利用影像辨識裝置29從被辨識物體種類中選擇好幾項。任 意物體數會從物體計數裝置35被輸出至物體數保持裝置 36。另外,配合用途若有需要,可藉由變更物體計數裝置 35,簡單地從外部指定應計算之物體種類。 物體數保持裝置36若從物體計數裝置35輸入任意物 體數,會了確實將任意物體數傳送至任意物體數之輸出地 ,會記憶一定期間之任意物體數。 物體位置推算裝置34若從環境理解裝置31輸入環境 地圖,會選擇1個辨識結果爲無效資料之環境資料,並抽 55 ^[張尺度剌巾酬家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂· · -線· 498290 A7 ^______B7_____ 五、發明說明 出該環境資料中之位置。從這個位置利用攝影機/環境座標 轉換裝置20帶出被計算之移動式攝影機10之環境座標系 上之現在位置,物體位置推算裝置34 ’無論過去是否產生 粗邊緣資訊112,都是以移動式攝影機之環境座標系上 之現在位置作爲零點,還可求出沒有辨識結果之移動物體 之環境座標系上之相對位置。只是不一定是存在於目前該 位置之移動物體。因此此位置成爲移動物體有可能存在之 移動物體之推測位置。另一方面,如果在環境地圖中沒有 辨識結果爲無效資料之環境資料,則在移動式攝影機1〇可 移動之範圍內產生適當之環境座標系上之位置。此時產生 適當位置之基準如下。第1,由疑似亂數產生任一位置。 第2,計算環境地圖中環境資料裡位置密度低之位置。第 三,以適當之順序依次產生移動式攝影機10可能移動範圍 中之位置。例如,在移動式攝影機10可能移動之範圍中從 左上方之位置往右依序產生位置,到達右方後就降一層往 後左依序產生位置,到了左邊再降一層往後右依序產生位 置,一直重複進行。配合用途或狀況組合這些基準,可有 效率地推測移動式攝影機10尙未拍攝之移動物體之推測位 置。物體推測位置會從物體位置推算裝置34輸出至運動控 制裝置23。 色彩資訊產生裝置41若從影像記憶裝置12輸入數位 影像111,則數位影像111各像素中之色彩會選擇與事先指 定之至少1個之色彩及色彩區域一致者,產生色彩資訊影 像172。色彩資訊產生裝置41因可以像素爲單位產生色彩 56 %張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) . 1 -11 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂-. •線 498290 A7 ____B7______ 五、發明說明(pf) •資訊171,故適合平行化。如果色彩資訊產生裝置41可平 行地輸出色彩資訊影像Π2所有像素,則從色彩資訊產生 裝置41對位置/大小檢測裝置17之通訊,可在每個像素上 平行地進行。 位置/大小檢測裝置17若從色彩資訊產生裝置41輸入 色彩資訊影像172,則會利用色彩資訊171檢測出被指示之 移動物體之區域位置及大小。位置/大小檢測裝置17因可 僅在每個像素鄰域處理,產生表示移動物體之區域位置及 大小之檢測結果之重複資訊影像132,故適合平行化。如 果位置/大小檢測裝置17可平行地輸出重複資訊影像132 所有像素,則從位置/大小檢測裝置17對影像/環境座標轉 換裝置21之通訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。之後根據 影像/環境座標轉換裝置21及位置選擇裝置.22選擇1個重 複資訊影像132中之移動物體位置,並輸出至運動控制裝 置23。 位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44若從邊緣資訊形成裝置 15輸入形成邊緣資訊影像115,則會利用形成邊緣資訊1U 檢測出被指示之移動物體之區域位置、大小及傾斜度。位 置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44因可僅在每個像素鄰域處理, 產生表示移動物體之區域傾斜角度之角度影像,故適合平 行化。如果位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44可平行地輸出重 複資訊影像132所有像素及傾斜角度影像之所有像素,則 從位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44對傾斜度檢測裝置42之通 訊,可在每個像素上平行地進行。 57 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' ' --------------^--------^---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 五、發明說明(0) 傾斜度檢測裝置42若從位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44 輸入傾斜角度影像,則會檢測出位於最中央位置之傾斜角 度。藉此移動式攝影機1〇可配合在中央拍攝之物體轉動。 傾斜角度會從傾斜度檢測裝置42輸出至運動控制裝置23 〇 另外,視覺裝置2,不一定要用第14圖所示之所有裝 置’也可控制移動式攝影機10、辨識物體種類、及特定物 體位置。因此視覺裝置2之製造者及程式設計者,實際在 製造視覺裝置2時,只要配合應拍攝之物體、被要求之功 能、被提供之電腦資源即可利用之LSI技術去取捨選擇需 要之裝置即可。 視覺裝置2,除了用位置選擇裝置22選擇之位置外, 還可在下列位置要求移動式攝影機10做搖攝、俯仰、翻滾 及變焦。首先是移動式攝影機10要拍攝靜止物體移動時, 此視覺裝置2必須讓移動式攝影機10振動。而振動指令產 生裝置25會將移動式攝影機10應移動之位置當作環境座 標系上之位置來指定。振動指令產生裝置25指定之位置極 端地在移動式攝影機10不振動之範圍內會由疑似亂數等來 決定之。再加上,此視覺裝置2,可從外部輸入控制指令 要求移動式攝影機10做搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦。一般性 之用途中,因係以移動式攝影機10目前之方向、傾斜度及 倍率爲基準使其搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦,故利用控制指 令輸入裝置24,儲存暫時控制指令後算出以移動式攝影機 ‘ 1〇之現在位置當作零點之環境座標系上之位置。另外藉由 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) — II------I------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Ίδτ‘ *. --線· 498290 A7 B7___ 五、發明說明(<L) ,改良控制指令輸入裝置24,可很容易地讓移動式攝影機1〇 移動至特定之位置。 -------- - ------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 因此爲了控制移動式攝影機10之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及 變焦,運動控制裝置23會從前述之環境座標系上之5個位 置中選擇1個。此時運動控制裝置23 ’會在控制指令輸入 裝置24、物體位置推算裝置34、邊緣資訊產生裝置14上 產生位置選擇裝置22;在色彩資訊產生裝置41上產生位 置選擇裝置22,依振動指令產生裝置25之順序’從可提 供之裝置中選擇輸入位置。被選擇之位置會利用運動控制 裝置23從環境座標系轉換成攝影機座標系。之後利用攝影 機指令產生裝置26置換成移動式攝影機1〇可辨識之指令 ,傳送至移動式攝影機10。因此視覺裝置2可控制移動式 攝影機10之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦。 -丨線- 另外根據移動式攝影機10之機種,有之機種若不對移 動式攝影機10傳送特定之指令’就無法取得移動式攝影機 10之狀態,即,移動式攝影機1〇之方向、傾斜度及倍率 、或移動式攝影機10是否正在移動或停止中之資訊。因此 運動控制裝置23,從前述之5個位置中選出1個輸出到攝 影機指令產生裝置26後,爲了可將查詢移動式攝影機1〇 是否爲移動中等之資訊之指令傳送至移動式攝影機10,運 動控制裝置23會指示攝影機指令產生裝置26,從移動式 攝影機10透過攝影機/環境座標轉換裝置20等待接收到此 資訊爲止。如果接收之資訊表示移動中,則詢問移動式攝 影機10是否在移動中資訊之指令就會傳送至移動式攝影機 59 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 五、發明說明(fj) • 10,運動控制裝置23會再度指示攝影機指令產生裝置26。 如果接收之資訊表示停止中,則詢問移動式攝影機1〇目前 方向、傾斜度及倍率之指令就會傳送至移動式攝影機10, 運動控制裝置23會指示攝影機指令產生裝置26。該段期 間中運動控制裝置23不選擇5個位置。攝影機指令產生裝 置26會根據運動控制裝置23來之指示’將對應之指令傳 送至移動式攝影機10。攝影機/環境座標轉換裝置20會將 移動式攝影機10是否在移動中之資訊完全傳送至運動控制 裝置23,並將移動式攝影機10目前方向、傾斜度及倍率 從攝影機座標系轉換爲環境座標系之位置。藉此視覺裝置 2,可一邊逐次調查移動式攝影機1〇之狀態,一邊控制移 動式攝影機10搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦。 最後,視覺裝置2,在邊緣資訊產生裝置14及位置/大 小檢測裝置17、與邊緣資訊形成裝置15、位置/大小/傾斜 度檢測裝置44、物體/背景分離裝置16、區域正規化裝置 27、影像保持裝置39、及模式匹配裝置38之間,每個裝置 並不一定要讓輸入之影像解析度或影像大小一致。例如, 在此視覺裝置2中,在邊緣資訊產生裝置14輸入降低數位 影像111解析度之低解析度數位影像116;另一方面’在邊 緣資訊形成裝置15,輸入用適當之裝置將邊緣資訊產生裝 置14產生之低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117之影像大小擴大 爲數位影像111之影像大小之粗邊緣資訊影像113;在物體 /背景分離裝置16及區域正規化裝置27上輸入數位影像 111,可減少邊緣資訊產生裝置14之負荷(參照第25圖)。 60 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----1---- ---- I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · · --線· 498290 五、發明說明( ----1 11------I 1 --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} .線! 即’幾乎不改變在邊緣資訊形成裝置15以後所產生之正規 化影像145之品質’就可更加高速地控制位置/大小檢測裝 置17以後之移動式攝影機1〇之搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦 。而此裝置更進一步之話’在邊緣資訊形成裝置15 ’輸入 劃分出邊緣資訊產生裝置14所產生之低解析度粗邊緣資訊' 影像117中之粗邊緣資訊所存在之區域之粗邊緣資訊 影像119;在物體/背景分離裝置16及區域正規化裝置27 上,輸入切出與從數位影像111切出之粗邊緣資訊影像U9 相同之位置區域之切出數位影像120,可減輕邊緣資訊形 成裝置15以後之正規化影像145之產生負荷(參照第26圖) 。在此利用該視覺裝置2,如果移動式攝影機10可用適當 之大小在畫面影像之中央拍攝移動物體,就可對於數位影 像111事先決定切出粗邊緣資訊影像119及切出數位影像 120之切出區域。利用此裝置,該視覺裝置2就可用1台移 動式攝影機10,做到與使用廣角攝影機與高解析度攝影機 之物體搜尋裝置有同樣地功能。 視覺裝置2中所用之影像記憶裝置12、色彩資訊產生 裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、邊緣資訊形成裝置15、位 置/大小檢測裝置17、位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44、物體/ 背景分離裝置16、區域正規化裝置27、遮罩裝置40、影像 保持裝置39、及模式匹配裝置38,可使用由陣列運算裝置 100(ARRAY OPERATION UNIT)所構成之資料處理裝置110) 來實際裝設。以下,係以利用陣列運算裝置1〇〇之資料處 理裝置110之實施例爲例,參照圖面來說明該視覺裝置2 61 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___B7__ 五、f明說明( 首先陣列運算裝置100,係利用輸入影像之1個像素 與其附近像素,產生輸出影像之1個像素。而如第16圖所 示,會將陣列運算裝置100配合輸入影像之大小,再利用 排列成格子狀之資料處理裝置110,陣列運算裝置100就可 從輸入影像產生輸出影像。另外在第16圖中,將陣列運算 裝置100略既爲AOU。接著陣列運算裝置·100可用專用硬 體去安裝,也可在一般之電腦上用軟體安裝。即,如果可 從輸入影像產生輸出影像,安裝裝置就不受限制。因此藉 由表示陣列運算裝置100之演算法,可表示資料處理裝置 110之影像處理。而爲了表示陣列運算裝置100之演算法, 在此說明有關在第14圖所示之影像記憶裝置丨2、色彩資 訊產生裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、邊緣資訊形成裝置 15、位置/大小檢測裝置17、位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44 、區域正規化裝置27、遮罩裝置40、影像保持裝置39、及 模式匹配裝置38所使用之公式。 若假設寬w、高h、帶域數b之任一之2η階調影像爲2L ν 、I、及,則2L、i、w使用每個位置P(i,j,k)之帶域像素 値、yuk、wUk如公式2、3及4中所示。還有,畫有底 線之文字係表示向量。而η爲非負之整數,w、h、b、i、j 、k爲自然數。 x = {xijk\xijk is value at k),l < i < Wil < j < h,l < k < b} (2) 62 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------I---· 11 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂.· 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明(/b) V = {Vijklyijk is value at p(ij, k),l <i <w,l w = {wijk\wijk is value at k),l < i < w,l M<k<b} (3) lKl<k<b} (4) 首先就有關針對前述影像之各帶域像素値之點處理之 函數做如下說明。 若要將影像轉換爲二値影像,則根據公式5將帶域 像素値二値化。 = < 1 if xijk > 0, Ο otherwise. (5) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 若要將影像2LJ專換爲帶域最大値影像時,則根據公式 6從1行j列之像素之各帶域之値當中選擇最大値。還有, 前述帶域最大値影像因成爲單帶域影像,故權宜上當作帶 域數1之前述影像來處理。因此,函數ByOO之下標第3字 爲1 〇 Βίη(χ) = max{xijk} ⑹ 線! 假設影像爲二値影像,若要反轉影像1,則根據公 式7來計算。 ⑺ 影像L之位置Ρ(ι,」,k)上之對數轉換係根據公式8 來進行。在此,e係偏差量,因用於要讓自然對數函數所 輸出之値進入有效範圍內,故一般e=l就夠了。藉由此對 63 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 ⑻β 工 cos9 a sin0 Οίχ person sin0 cosO A7 V. Description of the Invention (^). If the mobile camera 10 is rotated, the edge information forming device 15 can output the rotated information to form an edge information image 81. That is, the object forming the position α in the edge information image 181 after turning will become upright, making it easier to identify the type of object. However, the coordinates of the image coordinate system obtained from the position α in the edge information image 181 after the rotation are compared with the coordinates of the image coordinate system obtained from the position ck in the edge information image 115, which becomes the angle 0 when the clock rotates. Turning position. Therefore, as the angle 0 becomes larger or the distance σ α becomes longer, the offset between the two coordinates becomes larger. Therefore, in order to obtain the position in the edge information image 181 after the rotation ^ to obtain the image coordinate system coordinates before the rotation, it is only required to let the position in the edge information image 181 formed after the rotation α the angle θ when rotated counterclockwise / 5 is fine. Here, if the image coordinates of the position ^ in the edge information image 181 after the rotation are taken as ay); the image coordinates of the cold position are taken as (zhao X, zhao.), Then it can be obtained from UX, U y) according to Equation 1. Out d, cold y). ⑴ Since position α in edge information image 181 can be obtained from rotation after position / 3, that is, position α in edge information image Η5 is formed, the resulting image / environment coordinate conversion device 21 can be formed from rotation The position α in the edge information image 181 accurately obtains the environmental coordinates. 43 -------------- Loading --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) (%) 498290 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (Lf (> ---- I ------------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) • Line · Use the foregoing The camera coordinate system, image coordinate system, and environmental coordinate system describe the embodiment of the visual device 2. As shown in the second figure, the embodiment of the "visual device 2" uses the following devices: it accepts the photography signal of the mobile camera 10 (picture Image) and then converted into an appropriate format and size digital image 111 image acquisition device 11; an image memory device 12 that stores the digital image 111 at a predetermined time; an image retention device 39 that holds the digital image 111 before output to the output; An edge information generating device 14 for generating edge information image 113 of a moving object from two digital images 111; an edge information image forming device 15 for forming the edge information image 113 more clearly and forming an edge information image H5; used to separate the edge formed by forming the edge Information 114 Objects / Backs in Areas Differentiated Separation device 16; masking device 40 for overlapping the digital image 111 with the area to be separated; image holding device 39 for masking the image 148 before output to the output; normalization of the separation area to the area of the image size Normalization device 27; image holding device 39 that holds a normalized image 145 before outputting to an output place; geometric analysis device 37 that analyzes the approximate shape of a moving object by forming an edge information image 115; performs analysis on the area of a normalized moving object Pattern matching device 38 for pattern matching; image recognition device 29 that recognizes the type of moving object from the matching result image 147 and the geometric analysis result; position / size detection device 17 that detects the position and size of each area distinguished by the rough edge information 112; Camera / environment coordinate conversion device 20 that converts the camera coordinate system representing the direction and magnification of the mobile camera 10 to the environmental coordinate system (the basic coordinate system of the visual device 2); uses the mobile camera 10 represented by the environmental coordinate system Direction and magnification, convert the position of the moving object detected by the position / size detection device Π into 44 books Zhang scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm). Fly ~ 9〇A7, ------- ^ ____ B7 _---5. Description of the invention --- III .--- II --- · II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Image / environmental coordinate conversion device 21 of the soil coordinate system; select one of the multiple moving object positions detected by the position / size detection device 17 Position selection device 22; timing device 32 'which calculates time in units of 1 millisecond (ms) from the orientation and magnification of the mobile camera 10 represented by the environmental coordinate system, the position of a plurality of moving objects represented by the environmental coordinate system, moving objects Type, geometric analysis result, and environment understanding device 31 for making environment maps at all times: environment map holding device 33 that holds environment maps before output, and object position estimation devices that use environmental maps to estimate the positions of moving objects that should be recognized next 34; a control instruction input device 24 for inputting a control instruction to control the direction and magnification of the mobile camera 10 from the outside; a vibration instruction generation device 25 for generating a instruction to vibrate the mobile camera 10; using The direction and magnification of the mobile camera 10 indicated by the environmental coordinate system are determined by referring to the four positions input from the position selection device 22, the control command input device 24, the vibration command generation device 25, and the object position estimation device 34. The coordinate system is a motion control device 23 indicating the position of the mobile camera 10; a camera instruction generating device 26 that generates an instruction to move the mobile camera 10 to the position of the camera coordinate system determined by the motion control device 23. When the image acquisition device 11 inputs a screen image of a moving image from the mobile camera 10, if the moving image is an analog signal, the screen image is converted into a digital signal by A / D conversion. In particular, if the voltage of the photographic element 207, such as a photodiode, can be directly input, it is only necessary to use A / D conversion to convert to a digital signal of an appropriate number of bits. When a moving image is a digital signal, it is decompressed if it is compressed, and directly input if it is not compressed. Because these areas are available, 45 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 V. Description of the invention (屮)) The motion image is divided into the screen image. Is a digital image m. This inspection image 111 will be in an appropriate format and retain the previous size-image size, so the image acquisition device 11 converts the format according to the image data in pixels, and cuts out the necessary image size part in the visual device 2 and Make digital image 11 丨 output. If the image acquisition device 11 can output all pixels of the digital image ill in parallel, communication from the image acquisition device 11 to the image memory device 12 can be performed in parallel for each pixel. If the image memory device 12 inputs the digital image 111 from the image acquisition device 11, it will store the digital image at a predetermined time in accordance with the time resolution capability of the visual device 2 or the computing power of each device. That is, even if the digital image 111 is input to the image memory device 12 during this predetermined time, the stored image cannot be changed, so various subsequent devices can input the same digital image 111 at different time points. In addition, since the image recording device 12 does not perform image processing on the digital image 111, all pixels of the digital image 1 will be directly stored in a two-dimensional phase relationship. If the image memory device 12 can output all the pixels of the digital image 111 in parallel, the communication from the image recording device 12 to the image holding device 39, the edge information generating device 14, the color information generating device 41, and the masking device 40 can be performed at each The pixels are performed in parallel. If the image holding device 39 inputs the digital image 111 from the image memory device 12, and if the output location of the digital image 1H requires a digital image 111 of an appropriate format, the digital image 111 will be changed in the format requested by the output location of the digital image 111. After that, the image holding device 39 will surely transmit the digital image 111 to the output place of the digital image 111. 'The digital number of a certain period will be stored. 46 I--1111 --- IIC Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) · --- The paper size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 public love) 498290 A7 B7 _______ V. Description of the invention -------------- I --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page). Image 111. If the image holding device 39 limits the conversion format, it can process the convertible digital image 111 only in the neighborhood of each pixel, so it is suitable for parallelization. If the image holding device 39 can output all pixels of the digital image 111 in parallel, communication from the image holding device 39 to the output location of the digital image 111 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the edge information generating device 14 inputs a digital image 111 from the image memory device 12, it will be compared with the previously input digital image 111 to generate a coarse edge information image of a moving object. 13 ° The edge information generating device 14 can The pixel neighborhood processing produces a rough edge information image 113 ', so it is suitable for parallelization. If the edge information generating device 14 can output all the pixels of the coarse edge information image 113 in parallel, then the communication from the edge information generating device 14 to the edge information forming device 15 and the position / size detection device 17 can be performed in parallel on each pixel . -Line and edge information forming device 15 When inputting the rough edge information image 113 from the edge information generating device 14, the image memory device 12 refers to the stored digital image 111 to generate a clear moving object that is more specific than the rough edge information image 113. It forms an edge information image 115. The edge information forming device 15 is suitable for parallelization because it can generate a rough edge information image 115 by processing only in the neighborhood of each pixel. If the edge information forming device 15 can output all pixels forming the edge information image 115 in parallel, the communication from the edge information forming device 15 to the object / background separation device 16, the geometric analysis device 37, and the inclination detection device 42 can be performed in each Pixels proceed in parallel. If the object / background separation device 16 inputs the edge information image 115 from the edge information forming device 15, it will include the object area included in the moving object 47. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ___B7____ V. Description of the invention (L ^ ---- II --- I--IIII (please read the notes on the back before filling this page). The pixels in domain 141 and the pixels included in the background are separated into different The group 'sequentially outputs the separation results in groups. In addition, the object / background separation device 16 can separate these object regions 141 into different groups when the object regions 141 are clearly distinguished by forming the edge information 114 regardless of whether they are adjacent or not. The number of groups will also be more than 3. The object / background separation device 16 is suitable for parallelization because it can process the separated object area 141 and the background 'in each pixel neighborhood. If the object / background separation device 16 can output the object area in parallel For all pixels of the image 142, communication from the object / background separation device 16 to the mask device 40 and the area normalization device 27 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. 40 If the object area image 142 is input from the object / background separation device 16, the digital image 111 stored by the image memory device 12 is referred to, and the pixels that are not overlapped with the object area 141 are covered to generate a mask image 148. Mask device 40 Since the mask image 148 can be generated only in the neighborhood of each pixel, it is suitable for parallelization. If the mask device 40 can output all pixels of the mask image 148 in parallel, the communication of the image holding device 39 from the mask device 40 is performed. Can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the image holding device 39 inputs a mask image H8 from the mask device 40, if the output location of the mask image 148 requires a mask image 148 in an appropriate format, the mask image 148 The output destination will convert the mask image 148 in the required format. After that, the image holding device 39 will store the mask image 148 for a certain period in order to reliably transmit the mask image 148 to the output destination of the mask image 148. Image retention If the format of the conversion is limited by the device 39, since the conversion mask image 148 can be processed only in each pixel neighborhood, it is suitable for parallelization. If the image holding device 39 can output in parallel All pixels of the mask image 148 '48 is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 2 criminal millimeters) " 498290 A7 ___B7____ V. Description of the invention (id) From the image holding device 39 to the mask image 148 The communication of the output place can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the area normalization device 27 inputs the object area image 142 and the digital image 111 from the object / background separation device 16 and the image acquisition device 11, respectively, the digital image 111 Cut out the separated object region 143 ′ of the moving object while deforming the separated object region 143 while complementing and expanding the image size of the digital image 111 as much as possible to produce a normalized image 145. The area normalization device 27 is suitable for parallelization because it can normalize the separated object area 143 only in the neighborhood of each pixel. If the area normalization device 27 can output all pixels of the normalized image 145 in parallel, communication from the area normalization device 27 to the pattern matching device 38 and the image holding device 39 'can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the image holding device 39 inputs the normalized image 145 from the area normalization device 27, and if the output location of the normalized image 145 requires a normalized image 145 in an appropriate format, the output location of the normalized image H5 will be converted in the required format. Normalized image 145. Thereafter, the image holding device 39 stores the normalized image H5 for a certain period of time so that the normalized image 145 can be surely transmitted to the output location of the normalized image 145. If the image holding device 39 limits the format of the conversion, the normalized image 145 can be processed only in the neighborhood of each pixel, so it is suitable for parallelization. If the image holding device 39 can output all pixels of the normalized image 145 in parallel, communication from the image holding device 39 to the output location of the normalized image 145 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the geometry analysis device 37 inputs the edge information image 115 from the edge information forming device 15, it will perform collision sampling method and inbreeding conversion. 49 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love). Equipment --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order: -1 line '498290 A7 ______ — _B7 V. Geometric analysis of the invention description (L ^ j), far-crossing conversion and half conversion, etc. The shape of the moving object in the screen image, and produce the geometric analysis result. In conventional image recognition, it is to identify objects in the image by extracting direct lines from the image itself, etc., and using various transformations that do not allow the position and size of moving objects to be controlled. Therefore, even if the processing is simple, the number of combinations becomes huge, and the result requires a huge amount of calculation, and it takes a long time to obtain the desired result, or only a low-quality identification result. However, the visual device 2 recognizes and processes the moving objects in the screen image by the object / background separation device 16, the area normalization device 27, the pattern matching device 38, and the image recognition device 29. However, the recognition processing performed by the object / background separation device 16, the area normalization device 27, the pattern matching device 38, and the image recognition device 29 is not good at recognizing geometric figures such as the outline of a moving object. Therefore, the geometric analysis device 37 can easily analyze the geometric figure by analyzing and forming the edge information image 115 'with a simple device, and can also reduce the burden of the geometric analysis device 37 itself. In addition, since the geometric analysis device 37 is used, the pattern matching device 38 does not need to recognize geometric figures, and the pattern matching device 38 is simplified. Furthermore, using the results of geometric analysis, the environment understanding device 31 can reliably create an environment map at a high speed. The geometric analysis result is output from the geometric analysis device 37 to the image recognition device 29 and the environment understanding device 31. When the pattern matching device 38 inputs a normalized image 145 from the area normalization device 27, it compares the normalized image 145 with a plurality of template images 146 in pixels, and generates a matching result image 147. In addition, the pattern matching device 38 can also cooperate with the purpose of the visual device 2 by using the template image 146 prepared in advance, and using the input normalized image 145 as the template image 50. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) ------------- i -------- ^ --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page ) 498290 A7 ___B7____ 5. Description of the invention (tfl1) '146. Each pixel of the normalized normal image H5 is similar to the pixels corresponding to different template images 146, so the matching result image 147 will become a speckle composed of several pieces. If the pattern matching device 38 can output all the pixels of the matching result image 147 in parallel, the communication from the pattern matching device 38 to the image recognition device 29 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the image recognition device 29 inputs a matching result image 147 from the pattern matching device 38, it uses a suitable pattern recognition device to recognize the matching result image 147 and outputs the recognition result, that is, the type of the moving object. In the pattern recognition method of the image recognition device 29, in addition to simply selecting the most matching result in the matching result image 147 as in the majority decision, it is also possible to use nerves such as sensors learned by the back-propagation method Network (neural network). In addition, when using a neural network, a dedicated accelerator for neural network can be used to achieve parallelization and high speed. The recognition result of the matching result image 147, that is, the type of the moving object is output from the image recognition device 29 to the recognition result holding device 30 and the environment understanding device 31. However, if the image recognition device 29 inputs a geometric analysis result from the geometric analysis device 37, the image recognition device 29 first determines whether it is a figure to be recognized. If the geometry analysis result is a figure out of the object, the image recognition device 29 will not operate. If the geometric analysis result is an object figure, the image recognition device 29 recognizes the matching result image 147. For example, according to the situation of the back-propagation learning sensor of Pan method, each object graphic will use the matching result image 147 to make learning data, and then the image recognition device 29 will select the learning data according to the geometric analysis result. The sensor can also efficiently perform the object graphics. Pattern recognition. That is, if the geometric analysis result is a circle, only the human face or spherical circle will be used. 51 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). (Please read the precautions on the back first to save Fill out this I) Assembly 丨 line 498290 A7 _ B7____ V. Description of the invention (f |) • -------- I I ---. II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page), form Object learning data; if the geometric analysis result is a triangle, only the learning data of triangular objects such as road signs or mountains will be used. In this way, not only small-scale sensors can be used to recognize most objects, but the sensor itself can also learn efficiently. If the recognition result holding device 30 inputs the recognition result of the matching result image 147 from the image recognition device 29, if the output location of the recognition result requires a signal of an appropriate format, the output location of the recognition result will convert the recognition result in the requested format. Thereafter, the identification result holding device 30 stores the identification result for a certain period in order to reliably transmit the identification result to the output location of the identification result. -line! When the position / size detection device 17 inputs the rough edge information image 113 from the edge information generating device 14, it detects the position and size of the indicated moving object based on the rough edge information 112. The position / size detection device 17 is suitable for parallelization because it can process only each pixel neighborhood 'to generate a repeated information image 132 indicating the detection result of the position and size of the area of the moving object. If the position / size detection device 17 can output all pixels of the repeated information image 132 in parallel, the communication of the image / environment coordinate conversion device 21 from the position / size detection device 17 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. The camera / environmental coordinate conversion device 20 and the image / environmental coordinate conversion device 21 convert the position of the moving object area indicated by the repeated information image 132 generated by the position / size detection device 17 into the position of the environmental coordinate system. At this time, if the total number of positions of the moving object area in the screen image is 2 or more, there will also be more than 2 positions on the environmental coordinate system. Therefore, controlling the panning, tilting, and rapid zooming of the mobile camera 10 is applicable to any one 52-sheet paper in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (p)- -(Please read the cautions on the back and save this page to fill in this page first)-To adjust the direction and magnification of the mobile camera 10 by moving a line, you need to select one of the multiple positions on the environmental coordinate system. The position selecting device 22 selects one position on the environmental coordinate system based on a certain judgment criterion. The judgment criteria used here are mainly as follows. First, the position selecting device 22 selects the mobile camera 10 (or the largest one) at the position closest to the moving object on the environmental coordinate system. When the moving object is far (or smaller), because the edge information generating device 14 may generate noise, the position selection device 22 will select the accuracy of the existence of the moving object from a plurality of positions on the environmental coordinate system. The higher. Secondly, when there are a plurality of position clusters within a certain range on the environmental coordinate system, the position selecting device 22 selects one of them. In addition, two possibilities can be considered here. One is that the edge information generating device 14 may generate scattered coarse edge information 112 for one moving object, and the other is that a plurality of moving objects may actually exist. Therefore, the position selection device 22 only needs to select an appropriate position. Third, when most of the positions on the environmental coordinate system are almost the same distance (or almost the same size), the position selection device 22 selects the closest position, that is, the position closest to the direction of the mobile camera 10. By using an appropriate combination of these coordinated uses or conditions, the position selecting device 22 can select one of a plurality of positions on the environmental coordinate system. The timer device 32 outputs the current time in units of 1 millisecond using a timer circuit. Now the time will be continuously output from the timing device 32 to the environment understanding device 31 0 environment understanding device. 31 If the recognition result of the object area 141 of the moving object is input from the image recognition device 29, the recognition result will be produced and the mobile camera will be 53 paper sizes Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _B7__ V. Description of the invention (Xi I) Location of the environmental coordinate system of the camera 10 'and environmental information formed from the current time. When the environment understanding device 31 inputs the positions of the environmental coordinate system of all the object areas 141 in the screen image from the image / environment coordinate conversion device 21, only the number of the object areas 141 is generated and the identification result formed by invalid data is generated. The position on the environmental coordinate system of the camera 10 and the position on the environmental coordinate system of an object area 141 in the screen image, and the environmental data formed by the current time. The environment map at this time will become a collection of environmental data made from the present time to a predetermined time, and the position in the environmental data will be represented by the environmental position of the zero position of the moving camera 10 as the zero point. The environment understanding device 31 adds and deletes environmental data to and from the environment map and the passage of time. The environment understanding device 31 replaces the environmental data of the duplicated content with a change in position, etc. and deletes the position in the environmental data whose identification result is invalid data. When the identification result is near the position in other environmental data which is not invalid data, , The identification result will delete the environmental data of invalid data. In addition, when the recognition result is the location in the environmental data without valid data, and the location in other environmental data where the recognition result is not invalid data, if the recognition result in these environmental data is consistent, the former will be deleted. Environmental information. Determine the accuracy of the environmental map based on the recording time of the environmental data and the vicinity of the location in the environmental data. After the position of the current mobile camera 10 on the environmental coordinate system is added to the environmental map, the environmental map is output from the environmental understanding device 31 to the environmental map holding devices 33 and 35, and the object position estimating device 34. However, if the environmental understanding device 31 inputs the geometric analysis result from the geometric analysis device 37, the image recognition device 29 first determines whether it is a figure to be recognized. If the 54 ^ paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) " (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding: 498290 A7 _____ B7 _ ^ _ V. Geometric Analysis of the Invention The result is a figure outside the object, which will be near the position on the environmental coordinate system of the mobile camera 10, and the environment understanding device 31 will immediately delete the environmental data whose identification result is invalid data from the environmental map. Thereby, unnecessary environmental data is deleted from the environmental map, and the object position estimation device 34 and the like do not need to output unnecessary object estimated positions. When the geometric analysis result is an object figure, the environment understanding device 31 waits for the recognition result from the image recognition device 29 at a predetermined time. If the environment map holding device 33 inputs an environment map from the environment understanding device 31, and if the output location of the environment map requires a signal of an appropriate format, the output location of the environment map will convert the environment map in the requested format. Thereafter, the environmental map holding device 33 stores the environmental map for a certain period of time in order to reliably transmit the environmental map to the output location of the environmental map. If the object counting device 35 inputs an environment map from the environment understanding device 31, it will calculate the number of environmental data in the environment map that has the recognition result indicating the specific object, and generate an arbitrary number of objects. The identification results in the environmental data can be selected from the identified object types using the image recognition device 29. Any number of objects is output from the object counting device 35 to the object number holding device 36. In addition, if necessary for the application, the object counting device 35 can be changed to easily specify the type of the object to be calculated from the outside. If the object number holding device 36 inputs an arbitrary number of objects from the object counting device 35, it will surely transfer the arbitrary number of objects to the output destination of the arbitrary number of objects, and it will memorize the arbitrary number of objects for a certain period. If the object position estimation device 34 inputs an environment map from the environment understanding device 31, it will select 1 environmental data whose identification result is invalid data, and draw 55 ^ [张 级 剌 巾 剌 家 standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X '( Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Binding · ·-Thread · 498290 A7 ^ ______ B7_____ 5. The invention explains the position in the environmental data. From this position, use the camera / environmental coordinate conversion device 20 to bring out the calculated The current position on the environmental coordinate system of the mobile camera 10 and the object position estimation device 34 ′ Regardless of whether the rough edge information 112 has been generated in the past, the current position on the environmental coordinate system of the mobile camera is used as the zero point. The relative position on the environmental coordinates of the moving object in the recognition result is only the moving object that does not necessarily exist at the current position. Therefore, this position becomes the speculative position of the moving object that the moving object may exist. On the other hand, There is no environmental data in the map whose identification result is invalid data, so it is within the range that the mobile camera 10 can move. The position on the appropriate environmental coordinate system is generated. The criterion for generating the appropriate position is as follows. First, any position is generated from the suspected random number. Second, the position with low density in the environmental data in the environmental map is calculated. Third , In the proper order, sequentially generate the positions in the possible range of the mobile camera 10. For example, in the range that the mobile camera 10 may move, the positions are sequentially generated from the upper left position to the right, and when it reaches the right, it will descend one level Positions are generated sequentially from the back left, to the left and then one level down, and positions are generated sequentially from the right. Repeatedly. These combinations can be used to efficiently estimate the estimated position of the moving object that was not captured by the mobile camera 10 尙The object's estimated position will be output from the object position estimation device 34 to the motion control device 23. If the color information generating device 41 inputs a digital image 111 from the image memory device 12, the color in each pixel of the digital image 111 will be selected and at least specified in advance. If the color and color area of one are consistent, a color information image 172 is generated. The color information generating device 41 Can produce color in units of pixels 56% Zhang scale Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love). 1 -11 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-. • Line 498290 A7 ____B7______ 5. Description of the invention (pf) • Information 171, so it is suitable for parallelization. If the color information generating device 41 can output all pixels of the color information image Π2 in parallel, then the communication from the color information generating device 41 to the position / size detection device 17 , Can be performed in parallel on each pixel. If the position / size detection device 17 inputs a color information image 172 from the color information generating device 41, it will use the color information 171 to detect the position and size of the indicated moving object area. The position / size detection device 17 is suitable for parallelization because it can process only in the neighborhood of each pixel and generate a repeated information image 132 indicating the detection result of the position and size of the area of the moving object. If the position / size detection device 17 can output all pixels of the repeated information image 132 in parallel, the communication of the image / environment coordinate conversion device 21 from the position / size detection device 17 can be performed in parallel on each pixel. After that, the position of the moving object in the repeated information image 132 is selected based on the image / environment coordinate conversion device 21 and the position selection device. 22 and output to the motion control device 23. If the position / size / inclination detection device 44 inputs the edge information image 115 from the edge information forming device 15, it will use the edge information 1U to detect the position, size, and inclination of the indicated moving object. The position / size / tilt detection device 44 can be processed only in the neighborhood of each pixel to generate an angle image representing the tilt angle of the area of a moving object, and is therefore suitable for parallelization. If the position / size / tilt detection device 44 can output all pixels of the repeated information image 132 and all pixels of the tilt angle image in parallel, the communication from the position / size / tilt detection device 44 to the tilt detection device 42 can be performed in Each pixel is performed in parallel. 57 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) '' -------------- ^ -------- ^ ---- ----- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498290 V. Description of the invention (0) If the tilt detection device 42 inputs the tilt angle image from the position / size / tilt detection device 44, it will The tilt angle at the most central position is detected. In this way, the mobile camera 10 can rotate with the object shot in the center. The inclination angle is output from the inclination detection device 42 to the motion control device 23 〇 In addition, the vision device 2 does not need to use all the devices shown in FIG. 14. The mobile camera 10 can also be controlled, the type of the identified object, and the specific object can be controlled. position. Therefore, the makers and programmers of the visual device 2 actually use the LSI technology to choose the required device when cooperating with the object to be photographed, the required functions, and the provided computer resources. can. In addition to the position selected by the position selection device 22, the vision device 2 may also require the mobile camera 10 to perform panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming at the following positions. The first is that when the moving camera 10 is to capture the movement of a stationary object, the visual device 2 must make the moving camera 10 vibrate. The vibration command generating device 25 specifies the position where the mobile camera 10 should move as the position on the environmental coordinate system. The position designated by the vibration command generating device 25 is extremely determined by a suspected random number or the like within the range where the mobile camera 10 does not vibrate. In addition, this vision device 2 can input control instructions from the outside to request the mobile camera 10 to pan, tilt, roll and zoom. In general applications, the pan, tilt, roll, and zoom are based on the current direction, tilt, and magnification of the mobile camera 10. Therefore, the control instruction input device 24 is used to store the temporary control instruction to calculate and move. The current position of the camera '10 is taken as the position on the environmental coordinate system of zero. In addition, with 58 paper sizes, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applicable — II ------ I ------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) Ίδτ '*.-Line · 498290 A7 B7___ V. Description of the invention ( < L), the control command input device 24 is improved, and the mobile camera 10 can be easily moved to a specific position. ---------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) So in order to control the pan, tilt, roll and zoom of the mobile camera 10, the motion control device 23 One of the five positions on the aforementioned environmental coordinate system will be selected. At this time, the motion control device 23 ′ will generate a position selection device 22 on the control instruction input device 24, an object position estimation device 34, and an edge information generation device 14; a position selection device 22 will be generated on the color information generation device 41, and will be generated according to the vibration instruction. The sequence of the device 25 'selects an input position from the available devices. The selected position is converted from the environmental coordinate system to the camera coordinate system using the motion control device 23. Thereafter, the camera command generating device 26 is used to replace the command recognizable by the mobile camera 10 and transmitted to the mobile camera 10. Therefore, the vision device 2 can control the pan, tilt, roll and zoom of the mobile camera 10. -丨 Line- In addition, depending on the model of the mobile camera 10, some models cannot obtain the status of the mobile camera 10 without transmitting specific instructions to the mobile camera 10, that is, the direction, tilt, and direction of the mobile camera 10. Magnification or information on whether the mobile camera 10 is moving or stopped. Therefore, the motion control device 23 selects one of the above five positions and outputs it to the camera command generating device 26, so that the command for querying whether the mobile camera 10 is moving or not can be transmitted to the mobile camera 10, and the motion The control device 23 instructs the camera instruction generating device 26 to wait for receiving this information from the mobile camera 10 through the camera / environment coordinate conversion device 20. If the received information indicates that it is in motion, a command asking whether the mobile camera 10 is in motion will be transmitted to the mobile camera. 59 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7. 5. Description of the invention (fj) • 10, the motion control device 23 will instruct the camera instruction generating device 26 again. If the received information indicates that it is stopped, a command inquiring the current direction, tilt and magnification of the mobile camera 10 will be transmitted to the mobile camera 10, and the motion control device 23 will instruct the camera instruction generating device 26. The motion control device 23 does not select 5 positions during this period. The camera command generating device 26 transmits the corresponding command to the mobile camera 10 according to the instruction from the motion control device 23. The camera / environment coordinate conversion device 20 will completely transmit the information of whether the mobile camera 10 is moving to the motion control device 23, and convert the current direction, tilt and magnification of the mobile camera 10 from the camera coordinate system to the environmental coordinate system. position. With this, the visual device 2 can control the panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming of the mobile camera 10 while sequentially inspecting the state of the mobile camera 10. Finally, the vision device 2 includes an edge information generation device 14 and a position / size detection device 17, an edge information formation device 15, a position / size / tilt detection device 44, an object / background separation device 16, an area normalization device 27, Between the image holding device 39 and the pattern matching device 38, each device does not necessarily make the input image resolution or image size the same. For example, in this visual device 2, the edge information generating device 14 inputs a low-resolution digital image 116 that reduces the resolution of the digital image 111; on the other hand, in the edge information forming device 15, the input generates edge information with a suitable device. The image size of the low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117 generated by the device 14 is enlarged to the coarse-edge information image 113 of the image size of the digital image 111; the digital image 111 is input on the object / background separation device 16 and the area normalization device 27. Reduce the load on the edge information generating device 14 (see FIG. 25). 60 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---- 1 ---- ---- II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · ·- -Line · 498290 V. Description of the invention (---- 1 11 ------ I 1 --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page}. Line! That is, 'the information on the edge is hardly changed The quality of the normalized image 145 generated after the formation device 15 can control the panning, tilting, rolling and zooming of the mobile camera 10 after the position / size detection device 17 at a higher speed. And this device goes further 'In the edge information forming device 15' Input the low resolution coarse edge information generated by the edge information generating device 14 to divide the coarse edge information image 119 of the area where the coarse edge information in the image 117 exists; in the object / background separation device 16 and area normalization device 27, input a cut-out digital image 120 in the same position as the rough edge information image U9 cut out from the digital image 111, which can reduce the number of normalized images 145 after the edge information forming device 15 Generate a load (refer to Figure 26). With this visual device 2, if the mobile camera 10 can capture a moving object in the center of the screen image with an appropriate size, it can decide in advance the digital image 111 to cut out the rough edge information image 119 and the digital image 120. Using this device, the vision device 2 can use a mobile camera 10, which has the same function as the object search device using a wide-angle camera and a high-resolution camera. The image memory device 12 used in the vision device 2, color Information generation device 41, edge information generation device 14, edge information formation device 15, position / size detection device 17, position / size / tilt detection device 44, object / background separation device 16, area normalization device 27, masking device 40. The image holding device 39 and the pattern matching device 38 can be actually installed using a data processing device 110 composed of an array computing device 100 (ARRAY OPERATION UNIT). Hereinafter, the array computing device 100 is used. The embodiment of the data processing device 110 is taken as an example to describe the visual device 2 61 with reference to the drawing. National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ___B7__ F. Explanation (Firstly, the array computing device 100 uses 1 pixel of the input image and its nearby pixels to generate 1 pixel of the output image As shown in FIG. 16, the array computing device 100 is matched with the size of the input image, and then the data processing device 110 arranged in a grid is used, and the array computing device 100 can generate an output image from the input image. In the figure, the array computing device 100 is referred to as an AOU. Then, the array computing device · 100 can be installed with dedicated hardware, or it can be installed with software on a general computer. That is, if an output image can be generated from an input image, the installation device is not limited. Therefore, by representing the algorithm of the array computing device 100, the image processing of the data processing device 110 can be represented. In order to show the algorithm of the array computing device 100, the image memory device shown in FIG. 14, the color information generating device 41, the edge information generating device 14, the edge information forming device 15, and position / size detection will be described here. Formulas used by the device 17, the position / size / tilt detection device 44, the area normalization device 27, the mask device 40, the image holding device 39, and the pattern matching device 38. If it is assumed that the 2η tone image of any of width w, height h, and number of bands b is 2L ν, I, and, then 2L, i, w use band pixels at each position P (i, j, k)値, yuk, wUk are as shown in Equations 2, 3, and 4. In addition, the underlined characters represent vectors. Η is a non-negative integer, and w, h, b, i, j, and k are natural numbers. x = (xijk \ xijk is value at k), l < i < Wil < j < h, l < k < b} (2) 62 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---------- I --- · 11 (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) Order. · 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (/ b) V = {Vijklyijk is value at p (ij, k), l < i < w, l w = (wijk \ wijk is value at k), l < i < w, l M < k < b} (3) lKl < k < b} (4) First, the following describes the functions related to the processing of the points of each band pixel of the aforementioned image. To convert the image to a two-dimensional image, the band pixels are binarized according to Equation 5. = < 1 if xijk > 0, 〇 otherwise. (5) ----------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) To copy the image 2LJ When specifically changing to the maximum band image, the maximum band is selected from the band bands of pixels in row j and column j according to Formula 6. In addition, since the largest band image in the band becomes a single band image, it is expedient to process the image with the band number 1. Therefore, the third subscript of the function ByOO is 1 〇 Βίη (χ) = max {xijk} 线 line! Assume that the image is a two-frame image. If you want to reverse image 1, calculate it according to Equation 7.对 The logarithmic transformation at the position P (ι, ", k) of the image L is performed according to Equation 8. Here, the e-series deviation is used to make the 値 output by the natural logarithmic function within the effective range, so generally e = l is sufficient. Based on this, the 63 paper sizes apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 ⑻

Pijk{〇) =< A7 B7 五、發明說明(u) .數化可將帶域像素値之間之除法變成減法。又,影像t若 爲2°階調之數位影像111,則如果與帶域數無關地將含有 個元素之查用表帶到記憶體102上,就不需要每次計算 自然對數函數’也不需要具有標準之對數表。Pijk {〇) = < A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (u). Digitization can change the division between band pixels 値 into subtraction. In addition, if the image t is a digital image 111 of 2 ° tone, if the checklist containing elements is brought to the memory 102 regardless of the number of bands, it is not necessary to calculate the natural logarithmic function every time A standard logarithmic table is required.

Lijk(x) = ln(xijk + e) 影像位置p(i,j,k)上q附近之位置之集合Pijk(q)由 公式 9 表示。但,Q 爲 4、8、24、48、80、120、(2r+ 1)2-1 之連續數列,r爲自然數。還有,超出影像大小之位置若包 含於集合Pijk(q)中’則只要沒有特別指定就用位置P(i,j ’ k)代替。又,在除此之外之狀況,則按照指定,像素値相 當於0,而且用不包含於影像內之虛構位置來代替。藉此 ,邊緣處理將自動進行。因此,集合Pijk(Q)之元素數Nuk — 直爲Q。 {p(i + p(ij + 1, A;), p(i - p(ij - 1? A:)} if ? = 4, {p(l,m,k) \i — r<l<i + r,j — r<m<j + r,p[l,m,k)妾 p(i,j,k)} if $ = (2r + l)2 — 1. (9) 接著,就有關針對影像之各帶域像素値之最大8附近 182之鄰域處理之函數及運算子做以下說明。 影像L之位置p(i,j,k)上之平滑化係根據公式10 64 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Lijk (x) = ln (xijk + e) The set of positions Pijk (q) near q on the image position p (i, j, k) is represented by Equation 9. However, Q is a continuous sequence of 4, 8, 24, 48, 80, 120, (2r + 1) 2-1, and r is a natural number. In addition, if the position exceeding the image size is included in the set Pijk (q) ', the position P (i, j'k) will be used instead unless otherwise specified. In other cases, pixels are equivalent to 0 as specified, and imaginary positions not included in the image are used instead. With this, edge processing will be performed automatically. Therefore, the number of elements Nuk in the set Pijk (Q) is Q. {p (i + p (ij + 1, A;), p (i-p (ij-1? A :)} if? = 4, {p (l, m, k) \ i — r < l < i + r, j — r < m < j + r, p [l, m, k) 妾 p (i, j, k)} if $ = (2r + l) 2 — 1. (9) The following describes the functions and operators for the neighborhood processing of 182 around the maximum 8 pixels in each band of the image. The smoothing at the position p (i, j, k) of the image L is based on formula 10 64 (Please (Read the notes on the back before filling out this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ______Β7____ 五、發明說明 --------— II------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •而進行。不過,int(v)係表示實數v之小數點以下捨去之意 思。如果影像2^之帶域像素値爲整數値,則在硬體安裝時 變更爲對於Njik=4時之xlmk之總和執行2次右Shift指令, 並對於8時之xlmk之總和執行3次右Shift指令之電路 ,而可省去執行除法之電路。This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ______ Β7 ____ V. Description of the invention ------------ II ------ (Please read the notes on the back first Fill out this page again) • and proceed. However, int (v) means the real number v is rounded down to the decimal point. If the band pixels 影像 of the image 2 ^ are integers, then during hardware installation, change to execute the right Shift instruction twice for the sum of xlmk when Njik = 4, and perform the right Shift 3 times for the sum of xlmk at 8 The circuit of instructions, and the circuit of performing division can be omitted.

Sijk(x) = int(—— X) ^imk) ljk p{^k)^pijk{q) (10) 拉普拉斯(Laplacian)之計算係如公式11所示,只是2 次差分運算子。8附近182因捕捉聲音微妙之變化,故零 點及零交叉變多而適合本發明。不過,因Nijk爲4或8,如 果硬體安裝時要變更爲Nik= 4時對xljk執行2次左shift指 令,並且Njik= 8時對xijk執彳了 3次左shift指令之電路,則 可省去執行實數乘法之電路。 線丨 玉= > : 工Imk 一 ^ijk^ijk p{l,m,k)ePijk{<l) (11) 就從由拉普拉斯所求出之値而找到零點之方法而言, 雖然習知找到了從正變化至負之像素,但是本發明係根據 公式12,除了找到從負到正之零交叉之像素外,並找到從 負到零及從零到正等之零點經過或零繼續之像素。本發明 中,公式12所找到之零點係不是有邊緣之地方’而是有雜 訊之地方,即,沒有邊緣之地方。又,藉由公式12使實數 値之二値化同時進行。 65 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明(b =< 1 if Xijk < 〇 and xirnk > 0 for 3p(l, m, k) 6 Pijk(q), 0 otherwise. (12) 假設影像爲任意之二値影像,若要將有孔之像素塡 入影像L中,則依照公式13計算。在此f爲表示應塡入孔 之大小之參數,一般而言f= l就夠了。另外,在4附近時 因無法檢測其性質上對角線,故盡量設爲8附近182較好Sijk (x) = int (—— X) ^ imk) ljk p (^ k) ^ pijk (q) (10) The calculation system of Laplacian is shown in Equation 11, except that it is a second-order difference operator. . The vicinity of 182 is suitable for the present invention because it captures subtle changes in the sound, so the zero point and the zero crossing are increased. However, because Nijk is 4 or 8, if the hardware installation is changed to Nik = 4, the left shift instruction is executed twice on xljk, and Njik = 8 is the circuit on which the left shift instruction is executed 3 times on xijk. Eliminates the need for circuits that perform real multiplication. Line 丨 Jade = >: Imk ^ ijk ^ ijk p (l, m, k) ePijk {< l) (11) As far as the method of finding the zero point from the 値 obtained by Laplace Although it is known to find pixels that change from positive to negative, the present invention is based on Equation 12, in addition to finding pixels that cross from negative to positive zero, and find zeros that pass from negative to zero and from zero to positive, etc. Zero continues pixels. In the present invention, the zero point found in Equation 12 is not a place where there are edges' but a place where there is noise, that is, a place where there is no edge. In addition, the conversion of two of the real numbers 値 by Equation 12 is performed simultaneously. 65 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (b = < 1 if Xijk < 〇and xirnk > 0 for 3p (l, m, k) 6 Pijk (q), 0 otherwise. (12) Assume that the image is an arbitrary two-dimensional image. If a pixel with holes is to be incorporated into the image L, it is calculated according to formula 13. Here f is the expression that should be entered. The parameter of the size of the hole is generally enough that f = l. In addition, it is better to set it to 182 near 8 because it cannot be detected diagonally in the vicinity of 4.

Fijk{x) =< 1 if ^p(l,m,k)€Pijk(Q) ^ / Xijk otherwise. (13) 影像爲任一二値影像,影像L中沒有單獨點或刪除 單獨孔時,會根據公式14計算。另外因在4附近時因無法 檢測其性質上對角線,故盡量設爲8附近182較好。Fijk (x) = < 1 if ^ p (l, m, k) € Pijk (Q) ^ / Xijk otherwise. (13) When the image is any binary image, there are no separate points in image L or separate holes are deleted Will be calculated according to Equation 14. In addition, since it is impossible to detect a diagonal line when it is near 4, it is better to set it to 182 near 8.

Aijk{x) =< 0 if ^ijk — 1 3,nd Ylp(l,m,k)^Pijk(q) ^Imk ^ 〇? 1 if Xijk — 〇 3,nd Σρ(/,τ?ι,Α;)€ΡϋΑ:(^) == ^ijk Xijk otherwise. (14) 影像L爲任一二値影像,爲了檢測影像L中線寬爲1 之像素,會使用4附近像素根據公式15計算。 66 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Aijk (x) = < 0 if ^ ijk — 1 3, nd Ylp (l, m, k) ^ Pijk (q) ^ Imk ^ 〇? 1 if Xijk — 〇3, nd Σρ (/, τ? Ι, Α;) € ΡϋΑ: (^) == ^ ijk Xijk otherwise. (14) Image L is any binary image. In order to detect pixels with a line width of 1 in image L, 4 nearby pixels will be used to calculate according to formula 15. 66 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 五 、發明說明(bpThis paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (bp

Xijk if + = 0 or xij-lk + = 0, =< n otherwise. (15) 2個像素2L、爲任一二値影像’若像素L當作是檢測 像素2L·中線寬爲1之像素之影像’則爲了擴充像素[中線 寬爲1之像素線寬’會使用4附近像素根據公式16計算。Xijk if + = 0 or xij-lk + = 0, = < n otherwise. (15) 2 pixels 2L, for any two-frame image The pixel image 'is used to expand the pixel [pixel line width with a center line width of 1' will use 4 nearby pixels to calculate according to formula 16.

Ktjkis-'i y) =<Ktjkis-'i y) = <

Xijk if 队一+ 2/i+ljA: + 2/ij —1左 + ϊ/ij.+ lA: > 0, otherwise. ----I---------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) (16) 因此若使用公式15之線寬檢測與公式16之線寬擴大 ,可按照公式17簡單地記述二値影像之線寬補充。 ^ijk (s): = Kijk(x,lU)) (17) 有關對於下列影像之各帶域像素値之鄰域處理’就_ 數及運算子做以下說明。 八 有2個影像2L、1時,這些影像之最大値像素可根據> 式18算出。 y) ^ijk if jk ^ Vijki yijk otherwise. (18) 有2個影像1、l時,這些影像之差異可根據公式 算出 67 訂· · _線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 19 498290Xijk if team one + 2 / i + ljA: + 2 / ij —1 left + ϊ / ij. + LA: > 0, otherwise. ---- I --------- install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) (16) Therefore, if you use the line width detection of formula 15 and the line width expansion of formula 16, you can simply describe the line width supplement of the second image according to formula 17. ^ ijk (s): = Kijk (x, lU)) (17) Regarding the neighborhood processing of each band pixel 値 of the following image, the following description will be made on the number and operator. Eight When there are 2 images 2L and 1, the maximum pixel size of these images can be calculated according to > y) ^ ijk if jk ^ Vijki yijk otherwise. (18) When there are two images 1, l, the difference between these images can be calculated according to the formula. (210 x 297 mm) 19 498290

五 、發明說明(L^) (19)V. Description of the Invention (L ^) (19)

Dijk y) ^ xijk y^k 在此若用公式11之拉普拉斯與公式19之差異,就可 按照公式20簡單地記述影像之鮮明化。Dijk y) ^ xijk y ^ k If the difference between Laplace in Formula 11 and Formula 19 is used, the sharpness of the image can be simply described according to Formula 20.

Eijkiy) ^ Dijk{s.j V^·^) (2〇) 有2個影像2L、I,且影像^爲單區域二値影像時1 根據公式21,用影像iL之帶域像素値去遮罩影像2L之各區 域影像値。 〇ijk(S.T V) = ^ijkVijl _ (21) 有2個影像1i,並且影像2L與iL爲二値影像時’可 根據公式22,以影像X爲基準整形影像I ° 工ijk if Uijk + Yjp(l,m,k)ePijk{<l) > 0 otherwise. (22) 有2個影像2L、I,並且影像L爲二値影像時,會根據 公式23,將影像L中未被指定之影像2L·之帶域像素値’以 在影像帶域像素値附近之影像旨定之影像x帶域像素 値之平均値來補。不過int(v)之意思爲貫數v之小數點以下 要捨去。另外因影像y爲二値影像之分母爲正數’故在記 憶體102上會儲存從1到q之倒數,藉此可將整數之除法 置換成實數之乘法。 68 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 一aj. 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明(Lt vijk{x^ y) l^P(^ma)€Pi-1(,) yimi ) lf = 0 and ZP(i^i)ePijl{q) yiml > 0, 工ijk otherwise. (23) 本發明,是將像素位置或移動量等都如同影像資料一 樣之處理單純化。這就叫做位置之影像化p以下就有關位 置之影像化之幾個函數及運算子加以說明。 首先是將位置p(l,m,〇)之每個1,m,〇値當作 影像資料並轉換爲帶域像素値,其運算子爲#,轉換後之帶 域像素値爲#p(l,m,〇)。接著考慮帶域像素値從位置p(i ,j,k)移動到位置p(i = 1,j + m,k+〇)的情形。此時 帶域像素値之移動量係以p(l,m,〇)來表示。亦即移動 量可視爲從某位置來之向量。最後用於將從帶域像素値取 出位置之運算子令爲扩1。因此#_1#p(l,m,o) = p(l,m ,ο) ο 因此根據公式24,在以寬度及高度方向表示移動量 P(i,j,k)之平面內可朝180度反方向轉。 (24) 有影像1,當影像^爲單區域二値影像時,在影像\ 位置p(i,:i,1)上對重心位置之移動量會根據公式25計 算。另外,雖然計算原來重心之需要用除法,但因計算往 8附近182內之移動量時用除法而相抵,故在公式25省略 除法。 69 ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) *tr°J· 線. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明( ⑷=P( E Σ (m-j)^mU〇) p{Um,l)ePij\{q) p(“m,l)€Piji ⑷ (25) 從移動量P(i,j ’ k) ’利用公式26及27 δ十算對8附 近182內之移動量,可在移動量影像上影像化。還有公式 27,只有在由於影像之數位化而使公式26無法對應時使用 眇(1,0,A〇 ifz>0, \j\ < |z|/2, 鉍(1,一 1,々)ifi >0,;<0, \i\/2<\j\<2\il ttp(0, 一:U) ifi<0,2|z|<|j|, ίίρ(-1? -1, k) if z < 0, j < 0„ \i\/2 < \j\ < 2|i|, ㈣一 1,0,A〇 if z < 0, \j\ < \i\f2, 眇(一1,1,A) if z <0,;>0, |i|/2 < |j| < 2|z|, 鉍(0,1,幻 ifi>0, 2|z|<|i|, ftp(l,l,fc) ifi>0,j>0, |z|/2< |j| <2|i|, jjp(0,0, k) otherwise.Eijkiy) ^ Dijk {sj V ^ · ^) (2〇) When there are 2 images 2L, I, and the image ^ is a single-region two-frame image 1 According to Equation 21, the band pixels of the image iL are used to mask the image. 2L image of each area. 〇ijk (ST V) = ^ ijkVijl _ (21) When there are two images 1i, and the images 2L and iL are two-dimensional images, you can reshape the image based on the image X based on Equation 22 I ° ijk if Uijk + Yjp (l, m, k) ePijk {< l) > 0 otherwise. (22) When there are two images 2L, I, and the image L is a two-dimensional image, the unspecified image L will be specified according to formula 23. The band pixel 値 'of the image 2L · is supplemented by the average value of the image x band pixels 定 defined by the image near the image band pixel 値. However, int (v) means that the number below the decimal point of v must be rounded off. In addition, since the denominator of the image y is a positive number, the inverse number from 1 to q is stored on the memory 102, so that the division of the integer can be replaced by the multiplication of the real number. 68 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Pack aj. 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Lt vijk {x ^ y) l ^ P (^ ma) € Pi-1 (,) yimi) lf = 0 and ZP (i ^ i) ePijl (q) yiml > 0, ijk otherwise. (23) The present invention is to convert pixels The position or movement amount is treated as simple as the image data. This is called the imaging of position p. Several functions and operators related to imaging of position are explained below. The first is to treat each 1, m, 〇 値 at position p (l, m, 〇) as image data and convert it into band pixels 値, whose operator is #, and the converted band pixels 値 are #p ( l, m, 0). Next, consider a case where the band pixel 値 moves from a position p (i, j, k) to a position p (i = 1, j + m, k + 0). At this time, the movement amount of the band pixel 値 is expressed by p (l, m, 0). That is, the amount of movement can be regarded as a vector from a certain position. Finally, the operator used to obtain the position from the band pixel 令 is expanded by one. Therefore # _1 # p (l, m, o) = p (l, m, ο) ο Therefore, according to formula 24, the plane can be moved to 180 in a plane representing the movement amount P (i, j, k) in the width and height directions. Degrees turn in opposite directions. (24) There is image 1. When image ^ is a single-area two-frame image, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position on image \ position p (i,: i, 1) will be calculated according to formula 25. In addition, although the division of the original center of gravity is required for calculation, the division is used to calculate the amount of movement in the vicinity of 8 to 182, so the division is omitted in Equation 25. 69 ----------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) * tr ° J · line. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention 25) From the amount of movement P (i, j'k) ', using equations 26 and 27 δ ten pairs of movements within 182 near 8 can be imaged on the amount of movement image. There is also formula 27, only Use 眇 (1,0, A〇ifz > 0, \ j \ < | z | / 2, bismuth (1, -1, 々) ifi >0,; < 0, \ i \ / 2 < \ j \ < 2 \ il ttp (0, one: U) ifi < 0,2 | z | < | j |, ίίρ (-1? -1, k) if z < 0, j < 0 „\ i \ / 2 < \ j \ < 2 | i |, ㈣ 一 1,0, A〇if z < 0, \ j \ < \ i \ f2,眇 (-1,1, A) if z <0,; > 0, | i | / 2 < | j | < 2 | z |, bismuth (0,1, magic ifi > 0, 2 | z | < | i |, ftp (l, l, fc) ifi > 0, j > 0, | z | / 2 < | j | < 2 | i |, jjp (0,0, k) otherwise.

Jtp(l,0,A;) if i > 0, \j\ < \i\/2, ttp(l?0^) iii>〇J <〇^\i\/2<\j\<2\il itp(071, k) if z < 0, j > 0, \i\/2 < lil < 2|z|, fcp(0,l,fc) ifj>0,2|i|<|j|, if z >0,;>0, |i|/2 < |j| < 2|i|, Up(0,0, k) otherwise. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (26) (27) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Jtp (l, 0, A;) if i > 0, \ j \ < \ i \ / 2, ttp (l? 0 ^) iii > 〇J < 〇 ^ \ i \ / 2 < \ j \ < 2 \ il itp (071, k) if z < 0, j > 0, \ i \ / 2 < lil < 2 | z |, fcp (0, l, fc) ifj > 0,2 | i | < | j |, if z >0,; > 0, | i | / 2 < | j | < 2 | i |, Up (0,0, k) otherwise. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (26) (27) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明(0) ' 因此若使用公式25、26及27,可根據公式28及29, 簡單地記述對單區域二値影像重心方向之移動量影像之 帶域像素値。而移動量影像之帶域數爲1。 = QiGi^ix)) (28) Δ·;1(χ) = &(Giji(x)) (29) 另一方面因使用公式24可求出重心位置之相反位置, 故利用公式30,可簡單地記述對單區域二値影像重心與 相反方向之移動量影像之帶域像素値。而移動量影像之帶 域數爲1。498290 A7 ___B7____ V. Description of the Invention (0) 'Therefore, if formulas 25, 26, and 27 are used, according to formulas 28 and 29, the band pixels 域 of the moving image in the direction of the center of gravity of the single-region secondary image can be simply described. The number of bands of the moving image is 1. = QiGi ^ ix)) (28) Δ ·; 1 (χ) = & (Giji (x)) (29) On the other hand, since the opposite position of the center of gravity can be obtained by using formula 24, using formula 30, we can Briefly describe the band pixels of the image center of gravity of a single area and the image of the moving amount in the opposite direction. The number of bands in the moving image is one.

Riji(x) = Q(T(Giji(x))) (30) 有2個影像1、I,影像l爲移動量影像,可利用公式 31,將影像[之帶域像素値移動至以影像旨定之移動位 置上後,會將移動至同區域像素上之帶域像素値合計定爲 濃淡影像。 y) = Σ ^imk for p(l, m, 1) 6 Piji(q) and tlyimi = p(i - IJ - m, 0). (31) 因此用公式5、28、29及31,根據公式31或公式33 ,可將單區域濃淡影像2^移動至附近之重心方向後,簡單 地記述移動至同區域像素之帶域像素値合計。 (32) Λ^·ι(χ) = Γ^·ι(χ, Δ(Φ(χ))) 71 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 入-0· 線! 498290 A7 ___B7___ 五、發明說明(t/|) Λ〇) = riyi(2,^!(錄))) (33) 不過,在公式31中之附近數Q若被限定爲8,則移動 量像素3L·可從每個像素上8附近182中特定移動源。因此 ,影像2L·爲重複資訊影像132,而且如第17圖所示,對於 2L個各像素8附近182逆時鐘方向加上1到之號碼,則公 式34到公式41之8個公式,可分別判斷8個移動源上是 否個別有可移動之重複資訊131。Riji (x) = Q (T (Giji (x))) (30) There are two images 1, I, and image l is a moving image. You can use formula 31 to move the image [band pixel 値 to the image After the intended moving position is set, the band pixels moved to the pixels in the same area are collectively determined as the shaded image. y) = Σ ^ imk for p (l, m, 1) 6 Piji (q) and tlyimi = p (i-IJ-m, 0). (31) Therefore use formulas 5, 28, 29, and 31, according to the formula 31 or Formula 33, after moving the single-area shading image 2 ^ to the direction of the center of gravity nearby, simply describe the total number of band pixels that move to the pixels in the same area. (32) Λ ^ · ι (χ) = Γ ^ · ι (χ, Δ (Φ (χ))) 71 The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) ---- ------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Enter the-· line! 498290 A7 ___B7___ V. Description of the invention (t / |) Λ〇) = riyi (2, ^! (Record))) (33) However, if the number Q in the vicinity of Formula 31 is limited to 8, the amount of pixels is moved 3L. A specific movement source can be selected from 182 near 8 on each pixel. Therefore, image 2L · is a repeated information image 132, and as shown in FIG. 17, for 2L pixels 182 in the vicinity of the counterclockwise direction 182 plus 1 to the number, then the eight formulas of formula 34 to formula 41, respectively It is determined whether there is movable duplicate information 131 on each of the 8 moving sources.

Hjife y)= 1 if r'yz-fij,!= p(-l,0, 0), (34) 1° otherwise. if it = p(-l,l,0), (35) ί 0 otherwise. Γ^·3 ν)二 if Γ ^Μ-ι,ι = :P(0,1,0), (36) 1° otherwise. f -lj—u(£) if it-i—lj-ia = p(U,〇), (37) 0 otherwise. f (τ ι,\ - ) W 1 ij5\^ 2/J — s ^ it 1yi~ij,i = p(i,〇,〇), (38) otherwise. 72 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Hjife y) = 1 if r'yz-fij ,! = p (-l, 0, 0), (34) 1 ° otherwise. If it = p (-l, l, 0), (35) ί 0 otherwise Γ ^ · 3 ν) two if Γ ^ Μ-ι, ι =: P (0,1,0), (36) 1 ° otherwise. F -lj—u (£) if it-i—lj-ia = p (U, 〇), (37) 0 otherwise. f (τ ι, \-) W 1 ij5 \ ^ 2 / J — s ^ it 1yi ~ ij, i = p (i, 〇, 〇), ( 38) otherwise. 72 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明( Γ^·6(χ, y) =< Φ^υ+1ι1(χ)· if Γ^ζ-υ+ι,ι = p(l, -l, 〇), 0 otherwise.(^) if ft = p(0, 一 1,0), (39) (40) 0 otherwise. ^i+l,j+l,l ㈤ if it = p( —1,一1,0), 0 otherwise. (41) -------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 因此代替公式32及33使用公式42及43,會從由8個 移動源重複資訊183構成之8區域濃淡影像&、及由重複資 訊131構成之單區域濃淡影像i,產生8個每一移動源之移 動源重複資訊183。 ~ Γΐ7Α;(χ, Δ(Φ(^))) + Δ(Φ(^)))八^匕,2) = 金⑼))+ Γ;;遍,“(企㈤)) (42) (43) 線·· 有2個影像l、y_,影像2L爲二値影像;影像iL爲移動 量影像時,因可求出影像L之各帶域像素値之移動源位置 ,故移動源可發現重複之帶域像素値。因此影像2^之各帶 域像素値之移動源不會有重複,而且表示移動之各帶域像 素値存在之可移動影像之帶域像素値,會根據公式44產生 。還有可移動影像之帶域數爲1。 73 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 =< (44) 五、發明說明 1 if xi:/1 = 0 and r^mi = 一 D — m,〇) for only one of p(Z,m,1) S 尸〇1 ⑷, 0 otherwise. 有3個影像2L、I、义,當影像2L爲可移動影像,影^像I 爲移動量影像時,可根據公式45移動影像、2L之帶域像素値498290 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Γ ^ · 6 (χ, y) = < Φ ^ υ + 1ι1 (χ) · if Γ ^ ζ-υ + ι, ι = p (l, -l, 〇), 0 otherwise. (^) If ft = p (0, a 1,0), (39) (40) 0 otherwise. ^ I + l, j + l, l ㈤ if it = p (—1, a 1, 0), 0 otherwise. (41) ------------- Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Therefore, use formulas 42 and 43 instead of formulas 32 and 33 , From the 8-area shading image & consisting of 8 moving source repeat information 183 and the single-area shading image i consisting of repeating information 131, 8 moving source repeat information 183 for each moving source are generated. ~ Γΐ7Α; (χ, Δ (Φ (^))) + Δ (Φ (^))) Eight ^ dagger, 2) = Jin ⑼)) + Γ ;; times, "(企 ㈤)) (42) (43) line ·· There are two images l, y_, and image 2L is a two-frame image; when image iL is a moving image, the position of the source of the movement of each band pixel 値 of the image L can be obtained, so the moving source can find duplicate bands Domain pixels 因此. Therefore, the moving sources of each band pixel 値 of image 2 ^ will not be duplicated, and the band pixels 表示 of the movable image that represent the moving band pixels 値 will be rooted. Generated according to formula 44. The number of bands of the movable image is 1. 73 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 = < (44) 5. Description of the invention 1 if xi: / 1 = 0 and r ^ mi = one D — m, 〇) for only one of p (Z, m, 1) S corpse 〇1 ⑷, 0 otherwise. There are 3 images 2L, I, meaning When the image 2L is a movable image and the image I is a moving image, the image can be moved according to Formula 45, and the band pixels of 2L are 値

Ximk if Viji = 1 and ^ ^ ^ 〇) for 3p(l,m,l) e Piji(q),Ximk if Viji = 1 and ^ ^ ^ 〇) for 3p (l, m, l) e Piji (q),

Tijk(x,y,w) == \ 〇 if 队mi = 1 and j{一=pG 一之爪一:?·,0) for 3p(Z,m, 1) G Piji(q), Χφ otherwise. (45) 因此若利用公式30、公式44及公式45,可根據公式 46,簡單地記述由二値影像y計算出之重心位置與相反方 向上移動影像X之區域像素所取得之影像帶域像素値。 (46) 因此,藉利用公式2到公式46,可記述安裝有如第14 圖所示之影像記憶裝置12、色彩資訊產生裝置41、邊緣資 訊產生裝置14、邊緣資訊形成裝置15、位置/大小檢測裝 置17、位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44、區域正規化裝置27 、遮罩裝置40、及影像保持裝置39之資料處理裝置Uo之 所有陣列運算裝置1〇〇之演算法。下列,係使用資料處理 74 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ---------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 498290 A7 -—_____B7_____ 五、發明說明(p) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •裝置110中之任一陣列運算裝置100演算法,說明影像記 憶裝置12、色彩資訊產生裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、 邊緣資訊形成裝置15、位置/大小檢測裝置17、位置/大小/ 傾斜度檢測裝置44、區域正規化裝置27、遮罩裝置40、及 影像保持裝置39。 利用資料處理裝置110所實現之影像記憶裝置12爲了 要儲存數位影像111,排列成格子狀之陣列運算裝置1〇〇會 同步平行動作。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置 100當作AO%,則AO%之演算法如第18圖所示。 步驟1201中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是邏輯上或實際上,都是用來決定AO%之附近 〇 步驟1202中,設定A0%之附近或變數之起始値。 •線! 步驟1203中,判斷有無被依序輸入之數位影像1U。 如果無數位影像111(步驟1203 · YES) ’則結束演算法。如 果有數位影像111(步驟1203 : NO),則轉移至步驟1204。 但,當僅對特定之影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置1〇〇時,也 可設定爲無限迴圈。 步驟1204中,等到數位影像111準備好後輸入。 步驟1205中,輸入和帶域數一樣多的數位影像111之 i行」列之像素。因此AO%需要用於至少儲存和帶域數一 樣多的影像資料之記憶體1〇2 ° 步驟1206中,爲了在等待輸入時可輸出,儲存數位影 像111之i行j列之像素。 75 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___ B7 __ 五、發明說明("] $) 步驟1207中,輸出數位影像111之帶域像素値。之後 再回到步驟1203。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構成之資料處理裝置 110,影像記憶裝置12可儲存數位影像111。 如第19圖所示,利用資料處理裝置11〇達到之色彩資 訊產生裝置41爲了要從數位影像111之各像素產生色彩資 訊171,排列成格子狀之陣列運算裝置1〇〇會同步平行動作 。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置1〇〇當作 AO%,則AOUij之演算法如第20圖所示。 步驟4101中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定AO%之附近。 步驟4102中,設定AO%之附近或變數之起始値。 步驟4103中,會判斷有無被依序輸入之數位影像111 。如果無數位影像111(步驟4103 : YES),則會結束演算法 。如果有數位影像111(步驟4103 : NO),則會轉移至步驟 4104。只是當僅對特定之影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置100 時,也可設定爲無限迴圏。 步驟4104中,會分帶域數輸入數位影像111之i行j 列。因此AO%需要至少儲存帶域數部分之影像資料之記 憶體102。 步驟4105中,會從數位影像111之i行j列中抽出特 定色彩後產生色彩資訊171。被產生之色彩資訊171會被當 作色彩資訊影像172之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4106中,會輸出色彩資訊影像Π2之帶域像素値 76 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 線! 498290 A7 ___B7 _____- 五、發明說明 。之後會回到步驟4103。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構成之資料處理裝置 110,色彩資訊產生裝置41可從數位影像111產生色彩資 訊影像172。 如第21圖所示,由資料處理裝置11〇所實現之邊緣資 訊產生裝置14爲了要從數位影像111產生粗邊緣資訊影像 113,排列成格子狀之陣列運算裝置1〇〇會同步平行地動作 。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置100當作 AO%,則對於邊緣資訊產生裝置14之AO%之演算法會如 第22圖所不。 步驟1401中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是邏輯上或實際上,都用於決定AO%之附近。 步驟1402中,設定AOUij之附近及變數之起始値等。 在附近之設定上,可將前述各函數所使用之附近大小Q分 別決定爲4或8,也可全部統一爲4或8。爲了提高本發明 之邊緣資訊產生裝置Η所產生之粗邊緣資訊112之正確性 ,希望將附近大小q全部設定爲8。但是,藉由產生粗邊 緣資訊112之計算時間之限制、及數位影像111之帶域數 等,而使邊緣資訊產生裝置14可配合需要變更適當之附近 大小來因應。 步驟1403中,判斷數位影像111是否結束。如果無數 位影像11U步驟1403 : YES),則結束演算法。如果有數位 影像111(步驟1403 : NO),則轉移至步驟1404。但,當對 特定之帶域數及影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置100時,也可 77 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- 線! 498290 A7 _____B7 ____Tijk (x, y, w) == \ 〇if team mi = 1 and j {一 = pG one claw one:? ·, 0) for 3p (Z, m, 1) G Piji (q), χφ otherwise (45) Therefore, if formula 30, formula 44 and formula 45 are used, according to formula 46, the position of the center of gravity calculated from the second image y and the image bands obtained by moving the area pixels of the image X in opposite directions can be simply described Pixels. (46) Therefore, by using Equation 2 to Equation 46, it can be described that the image memory device 12, the color information generating device 41, the edge information generating device 14, the edge information forming device 15, and the position / size detection shown in FIG. 14 are installed. Algorithms of device 17, position / magnitude / tilt detection device 44, area normalization device 27, mask device 40, and image processing device Uo of all data processing devices Uo 100 algorithm. The following is the use of data processing 74 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) ---------------- (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again) · 498290 A7 -_____ B7_____ V. Description of the invention (p) -------------- Installation --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) • An algorithm of any of the array computing devices 100 in the device 110, explaining the image memory device 12, the color information generating device 41, the edge information generating device 14, the edge information forming device 15, the position / size detection device 17, the position / size / tilt The detection device 44, the area normalization device 27, the mask device 40, and the image holding device 39. In order to store the digital image 111, the image memory device 12 implemented by the data processing device 110, the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid shape will move in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the algorithm of AO% is shown in FIG. In step 1201, AO% is arranged on the rows i and j of the grid. Whether it is logical or practical, it is used to determine the vicinity of AO%. In step 1202, the vicinity of A0% or the start of the variable is set. •line! In step 1203, it is determined whether there are digital images 1U that are sequentially input. If there is no digital image 111 (step 1203 · YES) ', the algorithm ends. If there is a digital image 111 (step 1203: NO), the process proceeds to step 1204. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it may be set to an infinite loop. In step 1204, wait until the digital image 111 is ready for input. In step 1205, as many pixels as the number of bands of the digital image 111 are input. Therefore, AO% needs a memory for storing at least as much image data as the number of bands. 102 ° In step 1206, in order to be output while waiting for input, the pixels of rows i and j of the digital image 111 are stored. 75 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ___ B7 __ V. Description of the invention ("] $) In step 1207, the band pixels of the digital image 111 are output. After that, go back to step 1203. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the image memory device 12 can store the digital image 111. As shown in FIG. 19, in order to generate the color information 171 from each pixel of the digital image 111, the color information generating device 41 reached by the data processing device 110, the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid form moves in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the algorithm of AOUij is shown in FIG. 20. In step 4101, AO% is arranged on the row i and column j of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around the AO%. In step 4102, the vicinity of AO% or the starting point of the variable is set. In step 4103, it is determined whether there are digital images 111 that are sequentially input. If there is no digital image 111 (step 4103: YES), the algorithm will end. If there is a digital image 111 (step 4103: NO), the process proceeds to step 4104. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it can also be set to infinite loop. In step 4104, the i-th row and j-th column of the digital image 111 are input into the number of band fields. Therefore, the AO% needs to store at least the memory 102 of the image data of the number of bands. In step 4105, color information 171 is generated after extracting a specific color from the i-th row and j-th column of the digital image 111. The generated color information 171 is processed as band pixels of the color information image 172. In step 4106, the band information pixels of the color information image Π2 are output. 76 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 ___B7 _____- 5. Description of the invention. It will then return to step 4103. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the color information generating device 41 can generate a color information image 172 from the digital image 111. As shown in FIG. 21, in order to generate a rough edge information image 113 from the digital image 111, the edge information generating device 14 implemented by the data processing device 11 will operate in parallel and in parallel. . If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the algorithm for the AO% of the edge information generating device 14 will be as shown in FIG. 22. In step 1401, AO% is arranged on i rows and j columns on the grid. Whether this is logical or practical, it is used to determine the vicinity of AO%. In step 1402, the vicinity of AOUij and the starting point of the variables are set. In the setting of the neighborhood, the nearby size Q used by each of the aforementioned functions may be determined to be 4 or 8, respectively, or all may be unified to 4 or 8. In order to improve the accuracy of the rough edge information 112 generated by the edge information generating device Η of the present invention, it is desirable to set all nearby sizes q to 8. However, the limitation of the calculation time for generating the rough edge information 112 and the number of bands of the digital image 111 allow the edge information generating device 14 to respond to the need to change the appropriate nearby size. In step 1403, it is determined whether the digital image 111 is finished. If there is no digital image 11U (step 1403: YES), the algorithm ends. If there is a digital image 111 (step 1403: NO), the process proceeds to step 1404. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed for a specific number of bands and image size, 77 paper sizes can also apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------- ----------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order-line! 498290 A7 _____B7 ____

五、發明說明("/A •設定爲無限迴圏。 步驟1404中,輸入和帶域數一樣多之數位影像111之 i行j列之像素。這是爲了 AO%要整批處理數位影像111 之i行j列之像素。因此AO%至少需要儲存和帶域數一樣 多的影像資料之記憶體102。 步驟1405中,A0%藉與附近之陣列運算裝置100通 訊,而使對於已輸入之數位影像111之各帶域像素値按照 函數SUk〇L)進行平滑化。被平滑化之帶域像素値被當作平 滑化影像之帶域像素値來處理。在此函數Sljk(2〇也可配合 需要重複好幾次。一般來說多帶域影像,這種次數2次就 夠了。 步驟1406中,對於平滑化影像之各帶域像素値會根據 函數LUk(2〇進行對數轉換。被對數轉換之各帶域像素値會 被當作對數轉換影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1407中,AO%會利用與附近之陣列運算裝置 100通訊,對於對數轉換影像之各帶域像素値根據函數 EijkQ0進行鮮明化。被鮮明化之帶域像素値會被當作鮮明化 影像之帶域像素値處理。還有當數位影像111中有多量之 雜訊時,此步驟可省略。 步驟1408中,對於鮮明化影像之各帶域像素値會根據 函數DUk(2L,I)引出輸入1前之鮮明化影像之各帶域像素値 。被計算差異之帶域像素値會被當作時間差分影像之帶域 像素値處理。 步驟1409中,會用鮮明化影像之對應各帶域像素値置 78 ^--------^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 B7____ 五、發明說明("]A) 、換輸入1前之鮮明化影像之各帶域像素値。 步驟1410中,AOUij會利用與附近陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於時間差分影像之帶域像素値根據運算子進 行拉普拉斯之計算。計算了拉普拉斯之帶域像素値會被當 作時間差分拉普拉斯影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1411中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於時間差分拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値會根據 函數Zljk〇〇抽出零點。被抽出零點之帶域像素値會被當作 時間差分零點影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1412中,對於時間差分拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像 素値根據函數BUk〇〇檢測各帶域像素値中之最大値。被檢 測出之最大値帶域像素値會被當作最大値時間差分零點影 像之帶域像素値處理。還有權宜上帶域數爲1。 步驟1413中,A0%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置 通訊,對於鮮明化影像之各帶域像素値會根據運算子Vu送 進行拉普拉斯之計算。被計算拉普拉斯之帶域像素値會被 當作拉普拉斯影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1414中,AOUij會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇() 通訊,對於拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値會根據函數 Zljk〇L)抽出零點。被抽出零點之帶域像素値會被當作零點影 像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1415中,對於拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値會根 據函數BUkQ0檢測各帶域像素値中之最大値。被檢測出之 最大帶域像素値會被當作最大値零點影像之帶域像素値處 79 __-_____ ___^--- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------I---i I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·- 線丨· 498290 A7 ___B7 ___ 五、發明說明Ο"]) •理。還有權宜上帶域數爲1。 步驟1416中,對於拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値與時 間差分拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値會根據函數MUk(2L, 檢測位於各個影像之相同位置上之帶域像素値中之最大値 。被檢測出之最大帶域像素値會被當作混合零點影像之帶 域像素値處理。還有權宜上帶域數爲1。、 步驟1417中,AOUij會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於混合零點影像之帶域像素値會根據函數Fijk(2〇 除去孔。被除去孔之帶域像素値會被當作除去孔混合零點 影像之帶域像素値處理。還有權宜上帶域數爲1。在此之 函數函數Fijk〇〇也可配合需要重複好幾次。一般之多帶域 影像狀況,這種次數1次就夠了。 步驟1418中,ΑΟ%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置ι〇〇 通訊’對於除去孔混合零點影像之帶域像素値會根據函數 AljkQ0除去孤立點及孤立孔。被除去孤立點及孤立孔之帶域 像素値會被當作雜訊淸除混合零點影像之帶域像素値處理 。還有權宜上帶域數爲1。 步驟1419中,對於淸除雜點混合零點影像之帶域像素 値會根據函數IUk〇L)反轉0與1。被反轉之帶域像素値會被 當作粗邊緣資訊影像113之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1420中,會輸出粗邊緣資訊影像113之帶域像素 値。之後就回到步驟1403。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構成之資料處理裝置 110 ’邊緣資訊產生裝置14可從數位影像111產生粗邊緣 80 本紙張尺度過用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)5. Description of the invention (" / A • Set to infinite loopback. In step 1404, enter as many pixels as the number of bands in the 111th row of the digital image 111. This is for AO% to process the batches of digits. Pixels in rows i and j of image 111. Therefore, AO% needs to store at least as much image data as memory 102. In step 1405, A0% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100 to make Each band pixel 値 of the input digital image 111 is smoothed according to a function SUkoL). The smoothed band pixels 値 are treated as band pixels 平 of the smoothed image. In this function Sljk (20 can also be repeated several times as needed. Generally speaking, for multi-band images, this number of times is sufficient. In step 1406, for each band pixel of the smoothed image, the function will be based on the function LUk. (20 Perform logarithmic conversion. Each band pixel that has undergone logarithmic conversion will be treated as a band pixel that undergoes logarithmic conversion. In step 1407, AO% will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100 to perform logarithmic conversion. The band pixels of the image are sharpened according to the function EijkQ0. The band pixels that are sharpened are treated as band pixels of the sharpened image. Also, when there is a lot of noise in the digital image 111, This step can be omitted. In step 1408, for each band pixel of the sharpened image, each band pixel of the sharpened image before input 1 will be derived according to the function DUk (2L, I). The band pixel for which the difference is calculated Will be treated as the band pixels of the time difference image. In step 1409, the corresponding band pixels of the sharpened image will be set to 78 ^ -------- ^ ------- -(Please read the notes on the back before filling (Page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 B7____ 5. Description of the invention ("] A), each pixel in the band of the sharpened image before input 1 is changed. In 1410, AOUij will use the communication with the nearby array computing device 100 to perform Laplace calculations on the band pixels of the time-difference image according to the operator. The band pixels of Laplace are calculated as time Band pixel processing of the differential Laplacian image. In step 1411, AO% will use the communication with the nearby array computing device 100, and for each band pixel of the time differential Laplacian image, it will be extracted according to the function Zljk〇〇. Zero point. The band pixels from which the zero point is extracted will be treated as the band pixels of the time difference zero point image. In step 1412, each band pixel of the time difference Laplacian image is detected according to the function BUk〇〇. The largest one of the band pixels. The detected maximum band pixels will be treated as the band pixels of the maximum time-difference zero-point image. It is also expedient that the number of bands is 1. In step 1413, A0% will use the communication with the nearby array computing device to calculate the Laplacian for each band pixel of the sharpened image according to the operator Vu. The Laplacian band pixel is calculated. Will be treated as band pixels in the Laplacian image. In step 1414, AOUij will communicate with the nearby array computing device 10 (). For each band pixel in the Laplacian image, it will be based on the function Zljk 〇L) Extract the zero point. The band pixels of the extracted zero point will be treated as the band pixels of the zero point image. In step 1415, for each band pixel of the Laplacian image, each band will be detected according to the function BUkQ0. The largest pixel in a domain pixel. The detected maximum band pixel will be regarded as the maximum band pixel of the zero point image. 79 __-_____ ___ ^ --- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Li) ---------- I --- i I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order ·-Line 丨 498290 A7 ___B7 ___ 5. Description of the invention 〇 "]) • Management. There are also expedient upper-band domains of 1. In step 1416, for each band pixel of the Laplacian image, and each band pixel of the time-differential Laplacian image, a band pixel located at the same position in each image is detected according to the function MUk (2L). The largest pixel in the range. The detected maximum band pixel will be treated as the band pixel of the mixed zero point image. Also, the expedient band number is 1. In step 1417, AOUij will use the calculation with the nearby array. Device 100 communication, for the band pixels of the mixed zero point image, will remove the hole according to the function Fijk (20. The band pixels of the removed hole will be treated as the band pixel of the mixed zero point image of the hole. The right number of bands is 1. The function Fijk〇〇 can also be repeated several times according to the needs. In general, the number of bands in the band is 1 time. In step 1418, Α % will be used. Communication with the nearby array computing device ι〇〇 'For the band pixels of the mixed zero point image of removing holes, the outliers and isolated holes will be removed according to the function AljkQ0. The band pixels of the isolated points and isolated holes will be treated as The noise is processed by removing the band pixels of the mixed zero point image. It is also expedient to set the number of band regions to 1. In step 1419, the band pixels of the mixed noise zero point image are not inverted according to the function IUkOL). 0 and 1. The inverted band pixels 被 will be treated as band pixels 粗 of the rough edge information image 113. In step 1420, the band pixels 粗 of the rough edge information image 113 will be output. Then return to step 1403. Therefore, using a data processing device 110 composed of an array computing device 100, the edge information generating device 14 can generate a rough edge from a digital image 111. This paper has been scaled to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297). Public (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page)

498290 A7 _____B7___ 五、發明說明 •資訊影像113。 如第23圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110達到之邊緣資 訊形成裝置15爲了要從由粗邊緣資訊112構成之粗邊緣資 訊影像113、及數位影像111,產生由形成邊緣資訊114構 成之形成邊緣資訊影像115,排列成格子狀之陣列運算裝 置100會同步平行動作。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列 運算裝置100當作AOUij,則AO%演算法會如第24圖所 示。 步驟1501中,係將AOl^排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定AO%之附近。 步驟1502中,會設定AOUij之附近或變數之起始値。 在附近之設定上,可個別將前述各函數使用之附近大小Q 決定爲4或8,也可全部統一爲4或8。爲了提高本發明之 邊緣資訊形成裝置15形成之形成邊緣資訊114之正確性’ 將附近大小q全部設定爲8較佳。但是利用形成粗邊緣資 訊112之計算時間或限制,或被輸入之數位影像111之帶 域數等,邊緣資訊形成裝置15可配合需要變更適當之附近 大小來處理。 步驟1503中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之數位影像111 或粗邊緣資訊影像113。如果無數位影像111或粗邊緣資訊 影像113其中之一(步驟1503 : YES),則會結束演算法。如 果有數位影像111或粗邊緣資訊影像113其中之一(步驟 1503 ·· NO),則會轉移至步驟1504。只是當對特定之帶域 數與影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置100時,也可設定爲無限 81 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂··498290 A7 _____B7___ V. Description of the invention • Information image 113. As shown in FIG. 23, the edge information forming device 15 reached by the data processing device 110 generates a formation edge composed of the formation edge information 114 from the rough edge information image 113 composed of the rough edge information 112 and the digital image 111. The information image 115 and the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid form move in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is taken as AOUij, the AO% algorithm will be as shown in FIG. In step 1501, AO1 ^ is arranged on the rows i and j of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around the AO%. In step 1502, the vicinity of AOUij or the starting point of the variable is set. In the setting of the neighborhood, the nearby size Q used by the foregoing functions can be individually determined to be 4 or 8, or all of them can be unified to 4 or 8. In order to improve the accuracy of forming the edge information 114 formed by the edge information forming device 15 of the present invention, it is better to set all the nearby sizes q to 8. However, using the calculation time or limitation of forming the rough edge information 112, or the number of bands of the input digital image 111, etc., the edge information forming device 15 can change the appropriate nearby size for processing as needed. In step 1503, it is determined whether there is a digital image 111 or a rough edge information image 113 input in order. If there is no digital image 111 or rough edge information image 113 (step 1503: YES), the algorithm is ended. If there is one of the digital image 111 or the rough edge information image 113 (step 1503 · · NO), the process proceeds to step 1504. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed for a specific number of bands and image size, it can also be set to infinite. 81 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ ----------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 __B7__ 五、發明說明( T1) .迴圈。 步驟1504中,會分帶域數輸入數位影像111及粗邊緣 資訊影像113之i行」列之像素。這是爲了八01^要整批處 理數位影像111及粗邊緣資訊影像113之i行:j列之像素。 因此AO%至少需要儲存帶域數部分之影像資料之記憶體 102。 , 步驟1505中,會分離數位影像111之i行j列之像素 及粗邊緣資訊影像113之i行j列之像素。這是因A0U,·要 將數位影像111之i行j列之像素及粗邊緣資訊影像113之 ^行列之像素當作個別獨立之影像之像素處理。如果數位 影像111之i行《j列之像素及粗邊緣資訊影像113之i行j 列之像素從一開始就被分離輸入之話,就不必特別做處理 〇 步驟1506中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於已輸入之數位影像111之各帶域像素値按照函 數SUk〇0進行平滑化。被平滑化之各帶域像素値會被當作 平滑化影像之帶域像素値處理。在此函數SUk(2〇也可配合 需要重複好幾次。一般來說多帶域影像,這種次數2次就 夠了。 步驟1507中,對於平滑化影像之各帶域像素値會根據 函數LUk〇〇進行對數轉換。被對數轉換之帶域像素値會被 當作對數轉換影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1508中,AO%會利用與附近之陣列運算裝置 100通訊,對於對數轉換影像之各帶域像素値根據函數 82 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 __B7__ 5. Description of the invention (T1). Loop. In step 1504, the pixels in the "i-row" row of the digital image 111 and the rough edge information image 113 are input in the number of bands. This is to process the i-th row of the digital image 111 and the coarse-edge information image 113 in a batch: pixels in the j-th column. Therefore, AO% needs at least a memory 102 for storing image data with a number of fields. In step 1505, pixels in rows i and j of the digital image 111 and pixels in rows i and j of the rough edge information image 113 are separated. This is because A0U, · The pixels in the i rows and j columns of the digital image 111 and the pixels in the ^ rows and columns of the rough edge information image 113 are treated as pixels of individual independent images. If the i-th row of the digital image 111, the pixels of the j-th column and the pixels of the i-th row and the j-th column of the coarse-edge information image 113 are separated and input from the beginning, no special processing is required. In step 1506, AO% passes through and nearby The array computing device 100 communicates and smoothes each band pixel 値 of the input digital image 111 according to a function SUk00. The band pixels that are smoothed are treated as band pixels of the smoothed image. In this function SUk (20 can also be repeated several times as needed. Generally speaking, for multi-band images, this number of times is sufficient. In step 1507, for each band pixel of the smoothed image, the function will be based on the function LUk. 〇〇 Perform logarithmic conversion. The band-converted pixels of the logarithmic conversion will be treated as the band-pixels of the log-converted image. In step 1508, AO% will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100 to process the log-converted image. Pixels in each band: According to function 82, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 __B7 ___ 五、發明說明(?飞) .EukQO進行鮮明化。被鮮明化之帶域像素値會被當作鮮明化 影像之帶域像素値處理° 步驟1509中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於鮮明化影像之各帶域像素値根據運算子▽ijkl進 行拉普拉斯之計算。被計算拉普拉斯之帶域像素値會被當 作拉普拉斯影像之帶域像素値處理。 、 步驟1510中,AOUij會利用與附近陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於拉普拉斯影像之各帶域像素値會根據函數 Zljk(2〇抽出零點。被抽出零點之帶域像素値會被當作零點影 像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1511中,對於零點影像之各帶域像素値根據函數 Bijk〇0檢測各帶域像素値中之最大値。被檢測出之最大帶域 像素値會被當作最大値零點影像之帶域像素値處理°還有 權宜上帶域數爲1。 步驟1512中,對於最大値零點影像之帶域像素値會根 據函數Iijk(2〇反轉〇與1。被反轉之帶域像素値會被當作基 礎邊緣資訊影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1513中,已輸入之粗邊緣資訊影像113之帶域像 素値會被當作開始整形粗邊緣資訊影像之帶域像素丨直__ ,因AO%會與附近陣列運算裝置100通訊,使用基礎邊 緣資訊影像之帶域像素値,對於整形粗邊緣資訊影像之帶 域像素値會根據函數QUk〇L,進行整形。被整形之帶域像 素値會再次被當作整形粗邊緣資訊影像之帶域像素値處理 。在此之函數QUk〇L,ϊ)會一直重複到原本之整形粗邊緣資 83 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁> 裝 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 __S----一 五、發明說明(穸丨) ; . •訊影像之帶域像素値無變化爲止。不過在計算時間之節約 、被輸入之粗邊緣資訊影像113之品質、被形成之形成邊 緣資訊影像115中追求之品質等,整形處理以適當之重複 次數計算較佳。 步驟1514中,ΑΟΙ^會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於整形粗邊緣資訊影像之帶域像素値會根據函數 CijkQ0進行線寬補修。被補修之帶域像素値會被當作形成邊 緣資訊影像115之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1515中,會輸出形成邊緣資訊影像115之帶域像 素値。之後就回到步驟1503。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,邊緣資訊形成裝置15可將粗邊緣資訊影像113形成 爲形成邊緣資訊影像115。 在此所謂從粗邊緣資訊影像113到形成邊緣資訊影像 115之形成,就是可從由拍攝某一情況之低解析度之數位 影像111作成之邊緣資訊’推定從由拍攝同一情況之高解 析度之數位影像111應作成之邊緣資訊。因此對於自然數 ,如第25圖所示,從將數位影像111之解析度設爲低於 1/n之低解析度數位影像116,利用邊緣資訊產生裝置14作 成低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117時,可用η倍擴大低解析 度粗邊緣資訊影像117作成粗邊緣資訊影像113。不過因數 位影像111之解析度設爲1/n,只要對水平及垂直方向單純 地抽出數位影像111之連續η個當中之1個即可。又因η 倍擴大低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117,對水平及垂直方向 84 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 __B7 ___ V. Description of the Invention (? Fly) .EukQO sharpens. The sharpened band pixels will be treated as sharp band images. In step 1509, the AO% will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100 for each band pixel of the sharpened image. Laplace calculation is performed according to the operator ▽ ijkl. The calculated band pixels of Laplace will not be treated as band pixels of Laplace images. In step 1510, AOUij will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100. For each band pixel of the Laplacian image, the zero point will be extracted according to the function Zljk (20. The band pixel with the extracted zero point will be regarded as Processing of the band pixels of the zero point image. In step 1511, for each band pixel of the zero point image, the maximum value of each band pixel value is detected according to the function Bijk0. The detected maximum band pixel value will be regarded as The band pixels of the maximum 値 zero point image are processed. It is also expedient that the number of bands is 1. In step 1512, the band pixels of the maximum 値 zero point image will be inverted according to the function Iijk (2〇0 and 1). The inverted band pixels 値 will be treated as band pixels of the basic edge information image. In step 1513, the band pixels 粗 of the coarse edge information image 113 that has been input will be used as a starting point for shaping the coarse edge information image. Band pixels Straight __, because AO% will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100. Band pixels of the basic edge information image will be used. For band pixels of the shaped coarse edge information image, it will be based on the function QUk. L, reshaping. The reshaped band pixels 値 will be treated again as band pixels of the reshaping rough edge information image. Here the function QUk0L, ϊ) will be repeated until the original reshaping rough edge information 83 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page> The size of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 __S ---- One or five. Description of the invention (穸 丨) ;. • The band pixels of the information image have not changed. However, in the calculation time saving, the quality of the input coarse edge information image 113, the quality pursued in the formed edge information image 115, etc., the shaping processing is performed appropriately. The number of repetitions is better. In step 1514, ΑΙΙ ^ will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100, and perform band width repair on the band pixels of the shaped rough edge information image according to the function CijkQ0. The band to be repaired The pixels 値 will be treated as band pixels 形成 forming the edge information image 115. In step 1515, the band pixels 形成 forming the edge information image 115 will be output. Then return to step 15 03. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the edge information forming device 15 can form the rough edge information image 113 to form the edge information image 115. Here, the so-called rough edge information image 113 is used to form the edge information. The formation of the image 115 is to estimate the edge information to be created from the high-resolution digital image 111 of the same situation from the edge information created by shooting a low-resolution digital image 111 of a certain situation. Therefore, for natural numbers As shown in FIG. 25, when the resolution of the digital image 111 is set to a low-resolution digital image 116 lower than 1 / n, and the edge information generating device 14 is used to create a low-resolution coarse edge information image 117, η can be used. The low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117 is enlarged to create a coarse-edge information image 113. However, since the resolution of the digital image 111 is set to 1 / n, it is only necessary to simply extract one of the n consecutive digital images 111 for the horizontal and vertical directions. Because of the η-fold expansion of the low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117, the horizontal and vertical directions 84 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 __MI_^----^ 五、發明說明( .只要單純地在低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117之連續像素t 間放入η— 1個帶域像素値爲0之像素即可。如果此時之n 不太大,則實現邊緣資訊形成裝置15之資料處理裝置 ,與形成擴大低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117之粗*1,緣 影像113之形成邊緣資訊影像115幾乎會相同;而實f ^ 緣資訊形成裝置15之資料處理裝置11〇,與形成由數位影 像111作成之粗邊緣資訊影像113之形成邊緣資訊影像115 也幾乎爲相同。此原因係,爲了參考邊緣資訊形成裝置15 使用數位影像111,利用在內部作成之邊緣資訊中之哪個1 邊緣資訊,因邊緣資訊形成裝置15只使用粗邊,緣7資訊象 113。因此將擴大低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117之粗邊緣資 訊影像113輸入邊緣資訊形成裝置15時’從低解析度數位 影像116實現作成低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像117之邊緣f 訊產生裝置14之資料處理裝置110可減低計算量或硬體量 〇 若再繼續發展此方法,會如第26圖所示,在從降低數 位影像111解析度之低解析度數位影像116作成之低解析 度粗邊緣資訊影像117之中,可作成切出粗邊緣資訊112 周圍之低解析度切出粗邊緣資訊影像118。若將擴大此低 解析度切出粗邊緣資訊影像118之切出粗邊資訊影像119、 與切出數位影像111中相同區域之切出數位影像120輸入 實現邊緣資訊形成裝置15之資料處理裝置11〇 ’則可作成 切出作成邊緣資訊影像121。此情況下,實現邊緣資訊形 成裝置15之資料處理裝置110可減少硬體量。還有視覺裝 85 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 __MI _ ^ ---- ^ V. Description of the invention (... As long as the continuous pixels t of the low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117 is simply It is sufficient to put η— 1 pixel with a band pixel 値 0. If n is not too large at this time, the data processing device of the edge information forming device 15 is realized, and an enlarged low-resolution coarse edge information image 117 is formed. Thickness * 1, the edge information image 115 of the edge image 113 will be almost the same; and the data processing device 11 of the edge information forming device 15 will form the edge of the thick edge information image 113 made of the digital image 111. The information image 115 is also almost the same. The reason is that in order to refer to the edge information forming device 15, a digital image 111 is used, which one of the edge information created inside is used. Since the edge information forming device 15 uses only thick edges, 7 information image 113. Therefore, when the coarse edge information image 113 of the enlarged low-resolution coarse edge information image 117 is input to the edge information forming device 15, it is realized from the low-resolution digital image 116 The low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117 edge f data processing device 110 of the data generating device 14 can reduce the amount of calculation or hardware. If this method is further developed, it will be reduced from the digital image as shown in Figure 26. Of the low-resolution coarse-edge information image 117 created by the 111-resolution low-resolution digital image 116, the rough-edge information 112 can be cut out. The surrounding low-resolution rough-edge information image 118 can be cut. If this low-resolution is expanded, Cut out the rough edge information image 118, cut out the rough edge information image 119, cut out the digital image 120 of the same area as the cut out digital image 111, and input the data processing device 11 ′ that realizes the edge information forming device 15 to make the cut. Produce the edge information image 121. In this case, the data processing device 110 that realizes the edge information forming device 15 can reduce the amount of hardware. There is also a visual device 85 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _ B7 __ 五、發明說明(0) 置2,也可當作切出數位影像120要經常在數位影像111之 中央,而讓移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率變化。 如第27圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110達到之位置/ 大小檢測裝置17爲了要從以粗邊緣資訊112當作像素之粗 邊緣資訊影像113作成以重複資訊131當作像素之重複資 訊影像132,格子狀上排列之陣列運算裝置、100會同步平行 動作。若將配置於格子上1行j列之陣列運算裝置100當作 AO%,貝[j AOIV演算法會如第28圖所示。 步驟1701中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定A0%之附近。 步驟1702中,會設定AO%之附近或變數之起始値。 在附近之設定上,可個別決定前述各函數使用之附近大小 q,也可全部統一。爲了提高本發明之資料處理裝置11〇作 成之重複資訊影像132之正確性,將附近大小Q全部設定 爲大値較佳。但是因計算物體之粗邊緣資訊112重心之計 算時間之規定、被輸入粗邊緣資訊影像113之大小等’位 置/大小檢測裝置17可配合需要變更適當之附近大小來處 理。 步驟1703中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之粗邊緣資訊影 像113。如果無粗邊緣資訊影像113(步驟1703 ·· YES),則 會結束演算法。如果有粗邊緣資訊影像113(步驟Π03: N〇),則會轉移至步驟1704。只是當僅對特定之影像大小 裝設陣列運算裝置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圈。 步驟1704中,會1區域分輸入粗邊緣資訊影像113之 86 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _ B7 __ V. Description of the invention (0) Set to 2, can also be used to cut out the digital image 120 must always be in the digital image 111 The center, and the orientation and magnification of the mobile camera 10 are changed. As shown in FIG. 27, the position / size detection device 17 reached by the data processing device 110 is to create a repeating information image 132 from the rough edge information image 113 having the rough edge information 112 as a pixel and repeating information 131 as a pixel. The array computing devices 100 arranged in a grid form move in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in one row and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the AOIV algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 28. In step 1701, AO% is arranged on the rows i and j of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around A0%. In step 1702, the vicinity of AO% or the starting point of the variable is set. In the neighborhood setting, the neighborhood size q used by the aforementioned functions can be individually determined, or all of them can be unified. In order to improve the accuracy of the repeated information image 132 created by the data processing device 110 of the present invention, it is better to set all the nearby sizes Q to large. However, the position / size detection device 17 can adjust the size of the rough edge information 112 for calculation of the center of gravity of the object, the size of the input rough edge information image 113, and the like. In step 1703, it is determined whether or not the coarse edge information image 113 is sequentially input. If there is no rough edge information image 113 (step 1703 ··· YES), the algorithm is ended. If there is a rough edge information image 113 (step Π03: No), the process proceeds to step 1704. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it may be set to an infinite loop. In step 1704, 1 area will be input into the rough edge information image 113 of 86. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明(0) i行j列之像素。因此AO%至少需要儲存1區域分之影像 資料之記憶體102。 步驟1705中,會將粗邊緣資訊影像113之粗邊緣資訊 112轉換爲重複資訊影像132之重複資訊131。重複資訊 131會成爲相當於1或〇之帶域像素値。 步驟1706中,AOUu透過與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 △诉00計算移動量。將移動量影像化之帶域像素値會被當 作移動量影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1707中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 AukQ0將之移動至移動量指示地。移動後之帶域像素値會被 當作新之重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1708中,會判斷表示從步驟1706到步驟1707之 重複次數之移動次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果移動次數 未達指定次數(步驟1708 : NO),則會返回步驟Π06。如果 移動次數有達到指定次數(步驟1708 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟1709。該指定次數係根據形成邊緣資訊影像115之大小 或形成邊緣資訊114表示之物體大小’還有附近之大小q 決:定。若配合使用目之設定適當之參數,即使指定次數決 定很多也沒問題,但是指定次數太多之話’檢測位置及大 小之所需時間就會變長。 步驟1709中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置100 通訊’對於重複資訊影像13 2之各帶域像素値會按照函數 87 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _B7___ 5. Description of the invention (0) Pixels in row i and column j. Therefore, the AO% needs to store at least 1 area of image data in the memory 102. In step 1705, the rough edge information 112 of the rough edge information image 113 is converted into the repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132. The repeated information 131 becomes a band pixel 値 equivalent to 1 or 0. In step 1706, AOUu communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and calculates the movement amount for each band pixel of the repeated information image 132 according to the function Δv00. Band pixels that are imaged by the amount of motion will be treated as band pixels of the amount of motion image. In step 1707, the AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and each band pixel of the repeated information image 132 will be moved to the moving amount indication place according to the function AukQ0. The band pixels after the movement will be treated as band pixels of the new repeated information image 132. In step 1708, it is judged whether the number of movements indicating the number of repetitions from step 1706 to step 1707 has reached the specified number. If the number of movements has not reached the specified number (step 1708: NO), it returns to step Π06. If the number of moves reaches the specified number (step 1708: YES), it moves to step 1709. The specified number of times is determined according to the size of the formed edge information image 115 or the size of the object indicated by the formed edge information 114 and the nearby size q. If you set appropriate parameters in conjunction with the purpose of use, it is not a problem even if you specify a large number of times, but if you specify too many times, the time required to detect the position and size will become longer. In step 1709, the AO% will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100. For each band pixel of the repeated information image 13 2, it will be in accordance with the function 87. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297) ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(4) • △#00計算移動量。將移動量影像化之帶域像素値會被當 作移動量影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1710中,AOU。·會利用與附近陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 AUk(2〇將之移動至移動量指示地。移動後之帶域像素値會被 當作新之重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値處理。 步驟1711中,會輸出重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値 。之後就回到步驟1703。 另外重複資訊影像132之各重複資訊131因會表示以 其位置爲中心之周圍上之粗邊緣資訊112總數,結果就變 成表示以該位置爲中心之物體大小。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,位置/大小檢測裝置17可從粗邊緣資訊影像113作成 重複資訊影像132。 在此第28圖演算法中,若使用表示物體區域141之物 體區域影像142代替由粗邊緣資訊112構成之粗邊緣資訊 影像113,則會如第29圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110實 現之位置/大小檢測裝置17也可從表示物體區域141之物 體區域影像142作成表示重複資訊131之重複資訊影像132 。不過當使用物體區域影像142時,重複資訊影像132之 各重複資訊131係表示以該位置爲中心之物體區域141之 像素總數,故結果會成爲表示以該位置爲中心之物體面積 。因此要從重複資訊影像132求出物體之大小時,要注意 取重複資訊131之平方根等。還有在使用形成邊緣資訊影 88 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _B7_ V. Explanation of the invention (4) • △ # 00 calculates the movement amount. Band pixels that are imaged by the amount of motion will be treated as band pixels of the amount of motion image. In step 1710, AOU. · Using communication with the nearby array computing device 100, for each band pixel of the repeated information image 132, it will be moved to the position indicated by the movement amount according to the function AUk (20). The band pixel after the movement will be regarded as new The band pixels 値 of the repeated information image 132 are processed. In step 1711, the band pixels 重复 of the repeated information image 132 are output. After that, the process returns to step 1703. In addition, each of the repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132 is expressed as The position is the total number of rough edge information 112 around the center, and the result becomes the size of the object centered at the position. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the position / size detection device 17 The edge information image 113 is made into a repeated information image 132. In this algorithm of FIG. 28, if the object area image 142 representing the object area 141 is used instead of the coarse edge information image 113 composed of the coarse edge information 112, it will be as shown in FIG. As shown, the position / size detection device 17 implemented by the data processing device 110 can also be created from an object area image 142 representing the object area 141 The repeated information image 132 of the repeated information 131 is displayed. However, when the object area image 142 is used, each repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132 indicates the total number of pixels of the object area 141 centered on the position, so the result will be expressed as The area of the object at the center. Therefore, to obtain the size of the object from the repeated information image 132, pay attention to the square root of the repeated information 131. Also, use the edge information shadow to form the paper. 88 This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _ _B7_ 五、發明說明(F"i) •像115及色彩資訊影像172時也一樣。 如第30圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110實現之位置/ 大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44,爲了要從以粗邊緣資訊112當作 像素之粗邊緣資訊影像113作成以重複資訊131當作像素 之重複資訊影像132,格子狀上排列之陣列運算裝置100會 同步平行動作。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置 100當作AOl^,則AO%演算法會如第31圖所示。 步驟4401中,係將A0%排列於格子上之i行:j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定AO%之附近。 步驟4402中,會設定AOUij之附近或變數之起始値。 在附近之設定上,可個別決定前述各函數使用之附近大小 q,也可全部統一。爲了提高本發明之資料處理裝置110作 成之重複資訊影像132之正確性,將附近大小q全部設定 爲大値較佳。但是因計算物體之粗邊緣資訊112重心之計 算時間之規定、被輸入粗邊緣資訊影像113之大小等,位 置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44可配合需要變更適當之附近大 小來處理。 步驟4403中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之粗邊緣資訊影 像113。如果無粗邊緣資訊影像113(步驟4403 : YES),則 會結束演算法。如果有粗邊緣資訊影像113(步驟4403 : N〇),則會轉移至步驟4404。只是當僅對特定之影像大小 裝設陣列運算裝置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圏。 步驟4404中,會1區域分輸入粗邊緣資訊影像113之 1行j列之像素。因此ΑΟΙ^至少需要儲存1區域分之影像 89 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _ _B7_ V. Description of the invention (F " i) • The same is true for 115 and color information image 172. As shown in FIG. 30, the position / size / tilt detection device 44 implemented by the data processing device 110 is used to create a rough edge information image 113 with coarse edge information 112 as pixels and repeat information 131 as pixels. The information image 132 is repeated, and the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid form moves in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO1 ^, the AO% algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 31. In step 4401, A0% is arranged on the i row: j column of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around the AO%. In step 4402, the vicinity of AOUij or the starting point of the variable is set. In the neighborhood setting, the neighborhood size q used by the aforementioned functions can be individually determined, or all of them can be unified. In order to improve the accuracy of the repeated information image 132 produced by the data processing device 110 of the present invention, it is better to set all the nearby sizes q to large. However, the position / size / inclination detection device 44 can be changed according to the need to change the appropriate nearby size for processing due to the calculation time of the center of gravity of the rough edge information 112 of the object and the size of the rough edge information image 113 to be input. In step 4403, it is judged whether the coarse edge information image 113 is input in order. If there is no rough edge information image 113 (step 4403: YES), the algorithm ends. If there is a rough edge information image 113 (step 4403: No), the process proceeds to step 4404. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it can also be set to infinite loop. In step 4404, pixels of one row and column j of the rough edge information image 113 are divided into one area. Therefore, ΑΟΙ ^ needs to store at least 1 area of the image. 89 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(f/) 資料之記憶體102。 步驟4405中,會將粗邊緣資訊影像113之粗邊緣資訊 112轉換爲重複資訊影像132之重複資訊131。重複資訊 131會成爲相當於1或0之帶域像素値。又8個移動源重複 資訊183會用相當於0之帶域像素値弄淸楚。 步驟4406中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 △ 計算移動量。將移動量影像化之帶域像素値會被當 作移動量影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4407中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於移動源重複資訊影像184之各帶域像素値會按 照函數AijkQ〇將之移動至移動量指示地。移動後之帶域像 素値會被當作新之移動源重複資訊影像184之帶域像素値 處理。 步驟4408中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於源重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函 數AUk〇〇將之移動至移動量指示地。移動後之帶域像素値 會被當作新之重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4409中,會判斷表示從步驟4406到步驟4408之 重複次數之移動次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果移動次數 未達指定次數(步驟4409 : NO),則會返回步驟4406。如果 移動次數有達到指定次數(步驟4409 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟4410。該指定次數係根據粗邊緣資訊影像113之大小或 粗邊緣資訊112表示之物體大小,還有附近之大小q決定 90 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _B7_ V. Memory 102 for the description of the invention (f /). In step 4405, the rough edge information 112 of the rough edge information image 113 is converted into the repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132. The repeated information 131 becomes a band pixel 値 equivalent to 1 or 0. Repeated information for 8 other mobile sources is 183, which will be confusing with band pixels equivalent to 0. In step 4406, AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and for each band pixel of the repeated information image 132, the movement amount is calculated according to the function △. Band pixels that are imaged by the amount of motion will be treated as band pixels of the amount of motion image. In step 4407, the AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and each band pixel of the repeating information image 184 of the moving source will be moved to the moving amount indication place according to the function AijkQ0. The band pixels 値 after the movement will be treated as band pixels 重复 of the new moving source repeat information image 184. In step 4408, the AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and for each band pixel of the source repeated information image 132, it will be moved to the moving amount indication place according to the function AUkOO. The band pixels 値 after the movement are treated as band pixels 新 of the new repeated information image 132. In step 4409, it is judged whether the number of movements indicating the number of repetitions from step 4406 to step 4408 has reached the specified number. If the number of movements has not reached the specified number (step 4409: NO), it returns to step 4406. If the number of moves reaches the specified number (step 4409: YES), it moves to step 4410. The specified number of times is determined based on the size of the rough edge information image 113 or the size of the object indicated by the rough edge information 112 and the nearby size q. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page)

498290 A7 _ B7___ 五、發明說明(β) ,。若配合使用目之設定適當之參數,即使指定次數決定很 多也沒問題,但是指定次數太多之話,檢測位置、大小及 傾斜度之所需時間就會變長。 步驟4410中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 △ ukQO計算移動量。將移動量影像化之帶域像素値會被當 作移動量影像之帶域像素値處理° 步驟4411中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於移動源重複資訊影像184之各帶域像素値會按 照函數AUk(2〇將之移動至移動量指示地。移動後之帶域像 素値會被當作新之重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4412中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於重複資訊影像132之各帶域像素値會按照函數 AUk(2〇將之移動至移動量指不地。移動後之帶域像素値會被 當作新之重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4413中,會判斷表示從步驟4406到步驟4412之 重複次數之退縮次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果退縮次數 未達指定次數(步驟4413 : NO),則會返回步驟4406。如果 退縮次數有達到指定次數(步驟4413 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟4414。該指定次數係根據粗邊緣資訊影像113之大小或 粗邊緣資訊112表示之物體大小,還有附近之大小q決定 。若配合使用目之設定適當之參數,即使指定次數決定很 多也沒問題,但是指定次數太多之話,檢測位置、大小及 傾斜度之所需時間就會變長。 91 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公i ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _ B7___ 5. Description of the invention (β). If you set the appropriate parameters in conjunction with the purpose of use, it is not a problem even if the number of specified times is determined, but if the number of specified times is too much, the time required to detect the position, size, and inclination will become longer. In step 4410, AO% will use 100 to communicate with the nearby array computing device 100, and for each band pixel of the repeated information image 132, the movement amount will be calculated according to the function △ ukQO. Band pixels that are imaged by the moving amount will be treated as band pixels of the moving amount image. In step 4411, AO% will use 100 to communicate with the nearby array computing device 100 to repeat the information image 184 for the moving source. Each band pixel 値 will be moved to the position indicated by the movement amount according to the function AUk (20). The band pixel 移动 after the movement will be treated as a band pixel 新 of the new repeated information image 132. In step 4412, AO % Will use 100 to communicate with the nearby array computing device, and for each band pixel of the repeated information image 132, it will be moved to the amount of movement according to the function AUk (20. The band pixel after the movement will be Processed as band pixels of the new repeated information image 132. In step 4413, it is judged whether the number of retractions indicating the number of repetitions from step 4406 to step 4412 has reached the specified number. If the number of retractions has not reached the specified number (step 4413) : NO), it will return to step 4406. If the number of withdrawals reaches the specified number of times (step 4413: YES), it will move to step 4414. The specified number of times is based on the size of the rough edge information image 113 Or the size of the object indicated by the rough edge information 112 and the nearby size q are determined. If the appropriate parameters are used in conjunction with the purpose, even if the number of designated times is determined, it is not a problem. The time required for the inclination will become longer. 91 ^ The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male i '(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

^8290 A7 〜 B7 一 五、發明說明(0) ---------------I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 步驟4414中,會輸出重複資訊影像132之帶域像素値 及移動源重複資訊影像184之各帶域像素値。之後就回到 步驟4403。 另外重複資訊影像132之各重複資訊131因會表示以 其位置爲中心之周圍上之粗邊緣資訊112總數’結果就變 成表示以該位置爲中心之物體大小。又因只在重複資訊 131有像素時才有移動源重複資訊183 ’故結果就成爲表示 以該位置爲中心之物體傾斜度。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44可從粗邊緣資訊影像 113作成重複資訊影像132及移動源重複資訊影像184 ° 在此第31圖之演算法中,可用由形成邊緣資訊114構 成之形成邊緣資訊影像115,代替由粗邊緣資訊112構成之 粗邊緣資訊影像113。若使用表示物體區域141之物體區域 影像142代替由粗邊緣資訊112構成之粗邊緣資訊影像113 ,則會如第32圖所示’位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44也可 從表示物體區域H1之物體區域影像142作成重複資訊影 像132及移動源重複資訊影像184。不過當使用物體區域影 像142時,重複資訊影像132之各重複資訊131係表示以 該位置爲中心之物體區域141之像素總數,故結果會成爲 表示以該位置爲中心之物體面積。因此要從重複資訊影像 132求出物體之大小時,要注意取重複資訊131之平方根等 。還有在使用由表示物體有無特定色彩之色彩資訊171構 成之色彩資訊影像172代替物體區域影像142時也一樣。 92 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ___B7__ 五、發明說明 到目前爲止,說明了有關從粗邊緣資訊影像113、形 成邊緣資訊影像115、物體區域影像142及色彩資訊影像 172作成移動源重複資訊影像184之方法。以下則說明有關 從移動源重複資訊183求出物體傾斜角度之方法。 首先在第17圖所示之將以從附近1到附近8當作移動 源之移動源重複資訊183分別視爲從N1 S{ N8,則以逆時 鐘轉表不之傾斜角度0會根據如公式47求出。而傾斜角度 Θ係以弧度表示,物體若爲水平及垂直時,傾斜角度θ會 呈0弧度。 arctan(^±g|) - f if iVl + ΑΓ5 > iV3 + ΝΊ, ) (47) arctan(^|^~|) - | otherwise. 例如,從N1到N8之移動源重複資訊183成爲第33 圖所示時,傾斜角度0約呈一0.4弧度。公式47雖爲求出 傾斜角度β之簡單公式,但是當然如果用比公式47更詳細 之條件,本發明之使用者可更正確地求出傾斜角度0。如 申請專利範圍第8項陣列運算裝置1〇〇若計算公式47,則 陣列運算裝置100若與輸出8個移動源重複資訊183比較 ’可輸出更少之資料量。再者傾斜角度0如果也可用一定. 之刻幅表示之話,記憶體102相對於有對數表只要儲存準 備了需要數之傾斜角度之往上檔案即可。 而在第30圖及第32圖,雖然對於個別1個物體會將 包含被作成之粗邊緣資訊112之粗邊緣資訊影像113及包 、 93 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)^ 8290 A7 ~ B7 One or five, the description of the invention (0) --------------- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Step 4414, duplicate information will be output The band pixels 値 of the image 132 and the band pixels 移动 of the moving source repeat information image 184. Then it returns to step 4403. In addition, since each of the repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132 indicates the total number of coarse edge information 112 on the periphery with its position as the center, the result becomes the size of an object centered on the position. Also, because there is moving source repeat information 183 'only when the repeat information 131 has pixels, the result becomes the inclination of the object centered on the position. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 constituted by the array computing device 100, the position / size / tilt detection device 44 can create a repeating information image 132 from a rough edge information image 113 and a moving source repeating information image 184 °. In the algorithm, the formed edge information image 115 composed of the formed edge information 114 may be used instead of the rough edge information image 113 composed of the rough edge information 112. If an object area image 142 representing the object area 141 is used instead of the coarse edge information image 113 composed of the coarse edge information 112, then as shown in FIG. 32, the 'position / size / tilt detection device 44 may The object area image 142 is a duplicate information image 132 and a moving source duplicate information image 184. However, when the object area image 142 is used, each repeated information 131 of the repeated information image 132 indicates the total number of pixels of the object area 141 centered on the position, so the result will be the area of the object centered on the position. Therefore, to obtain the size of the object from the repeated information image 132, it is necessary to take the square root of the repeated information 131, etc. The same applies when a color information image 172 composed of color information 171 indicating the presence or absence of a specific color of the object is used instead of the object area image 142. 92 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ___B7__ V. Description of the invention So far, it has explained the information from the coarse edge information image 113, the formation of the edge information image 115, and the object area image 142 and color information image 172 create a method of moving source repeat information image 184. The following describes how to obtain the tilt angle of an object from the moving source repeat information 183. First of all, as shown in Figure 17, the mobile source repeating information 183 using nearby 1 to nearby 8 as the moving source is regarded as N1 S {N8 respectively, and the inclination angle 0 expressed by counterclockwise will be based on the formula Find it out. The tilt angle Θ is expressed in radians. If the object is horizontal and vertical, the tilt angle θ will be 0 radians. arctan (^ ± g |)-f if iVl + ΑΓ5 > iV3 + ΝΊ,) (47) arctan (^ | ^ ~ |)-| otherwise. For example, the mobile source repeat information 183 from N1 to N8 becomes the 33rd In the figure, the inclination angle 0 is approximately 0.4 radians. Although the formula 47 is a simple formula for obtaining the inclination angle β, it is a matter of course that the user of the present invention can obtain the inclination angle 0 more accurately if conditions more detailed than the formula 47 are used. For example, if the array computing device 100 in the eighth item of the patent application calculates the formula 47, the array computing device 100 can output a smaller amount of data if it is compared with the output of repeated information 183 from eight mobile sources. Moreover, if the inclination angle 0 can also be expressed by a certain number, the memory 102 only needs to store a file of the inclination angle upwards relative to the logarithmic table. In Figures 30 and 32, although for a single object, the rough edge information image 113 and package containing the rough edge information 112 will be created, the paper size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 〇X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page)

498290 A7 _____B7 _ 五、發明說明Λ ί ) 含物體區域141之物體區域影像142輸入位置/大小/傾斜度 檢測裝置44,但是即使有複數個物體,位置/大小/傾斜度 檢測裝置44也可檢測個別之物體位置、大小及傾斜度。還 有如第34圖所示色彩資訊影像172爲結構時,位置/大小/ 傾斜度檢測裝置44也可從個別之色彩資訊171之區塊檢測 位置、大小及傾斜度。因此位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44 也可在結構解析上利用。 如第35圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110實現之區域正 規化裝置27,爲了從包括物體區域141之物體區域影像 142、及包含與物體區域141重疊之分離物體區域143之數 位影像111作成包含正規化區域144之正規化影像145,格 子狀上排列之陣列運算裝置100會同步平行動作。若將配 置於格子上i行Γ列之陣列運算裝置100當作AOUij,則 AOl^演算法會如第36圖所示。 步驟2701中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定八01^之附近。 步驟2702中,會設定AO%之附近或變數之起始値。 在附近之設定上,可個別決定前述各函數使用之附近大小 q,也可全部統一。爲了提高本發明之區域正規化裝置27 作成之正規化影像145之正確性,將附近大小q全部設定 爲大値較佳。但是因要將分離物體區域143正規化之計算 時間之規定、被輸入數位影像111之大小等,區域正規化 裝置27可配合需要變更適當之附近大小來處理。 步驟2703中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之物體區域影像 94 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _____B7 _ V. Description of the invention Λ) Object area image 142 including object area 141 Input position / size / tilt detection device 44, but even if there are multiple objects, position / size / tilt detection device 44 can detect Individual object position, size and inclination. When the color information image 172 has a structure as shown in FIG. 34, the position / size / inclination detection device 44 can also detect the position, size, and inclination from the blocks of the individual color information 171. Therefore, the position / size / tilt detection device 44 can also be used for structural analysis. As shown in FIG. 35, the area normalization device 27 implemented by the data processing device 110 is used to create an image including an object area image 142 including an object area 141 and a digital image 111 including a separate object area 143 overlapping the object area 141. In the normalized image 145 of the normalized area 144, the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid shape moves in parallel and synchronously. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and Γ columns on the grid is regarded as AOUij, the AOl ^ algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 36. In step 2701, AO% is arranged on the rows i and j of the grid. Regardless of whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around 0101 ^. In step 2702, the vicinity of AO% or the starting point of the variable is set. In the neighborhood setting, the neighborhood size q used by the aforementioned functions can be individually determined, or all of them can be unified. In order to improve the accuracy of the normalized image 145 prepared by the area normalization device 27 of the present invention, it is better to set all the nearby sizes q to be large. However, because of the calculation time for normalizing the separated object area 143, the size of the digital image 111 to be input, etc., the area normalization device 27 can change the appropriate nearby size to handle the need. In step 2703, it will be judged whether the image of the object area has been input in order. 94 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(fl) .142或數位影像111。如果無物體區域影像142或數位影像 111(步驟2703 : YES),則會結束演算法。如果有物體區域 影像142或數位影像111(步驟2703 : NO),則會轉移至步 驟2704。只是當僅對特定之帶域數及影像大小裝設陣列運 算裝置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圈。 步驟2704中,會1區域分輸入物體區|域影像142之i 行J列之像素、與數位影像111之1行j列之像素。這是因 AO%會整批處理物體區域影像142之i行j列之像素與數 位影像111之^行^]列之像素。因此六01^至少需要儲存總 帶域數分之影像資料之記憶體102。 步驟2705中,會分離物體區域影像142之i行列之 像素與數位影像111之i行j列之像素。這是因AO%會將 物體區域影像142之i行」列之像素與數位影像111之i行 j列之像素分別當作獨立之影像之像素處理。如果物體區域 影像142之i行j列之像素與數位影像111之i行」列之像 素從一開始就被分離輸入之話,就不必做任何處理。物體 區域影像142與數位影像111會被分別複製於更新物體區 域影像及更新數位影像。 步驟2706中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於更新物體區域影像之各帶域像素値會按照函數 RmOO計算移動量。將移動量影像化之帶域像素値會被當作 移動量影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟2707中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置100 通訊,對於更新物體區域影像之各帶域像素値可按照函數 95 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (fl) .142 or digital image 111. If there is no object area image 142 or digital image 111 (step 2703: YES), the algorithm ends. If there is an object area image 142 or a digital image 111 (step 2703: NO), the process proceeds to step 2704. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific number of bands and image size, it may be set to an infinite loop. In step 2704, one area is input into the object area | domain image 142 pixels in row i and column J, and the digital image 111 in row j column. This is because AO% processes the pixels in row i and column j of the object area image 142 and the pixels in row ^] of the digital image 111 in a batch. Therefore, at least 01 ^ needs to store at least a memory 102 of the total band of image data. In step 2705, pixels in the i-th column of the object area image 142 and pixels in the i-th and j-th column of the digital image 111 are separated. This is because AO% treats the pixels in the “i-row” column of the object area image 142 and the pixels in the “i-row j” column of the digital image 111 as separate pixels. If the pixels in row i and row j of the object area image 142 and pixels in row i and row i of the digital image 111 are separated and input from the beginning, no processing is necessary. The object area image 142 and the digital image 111 are copied to the updated object area image and the updated digital image, respectively. In step 2706, the AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and calculates the movement amount of each band pixel of the object area image according to the function RmOO. Band pixels that have been imaged with motion are treated as band pixels that are imaged with motion. In step 2707, the AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100. For each band pixel of the object area image update, the function can be applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) in accordance with the function 95 paper size. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _____ B7_____— 五、發明說明(?少 • Huk(2L、I)發現可移動之移動地帶域像素値。表示是否爲可 移動之移動地之値就當作可移動影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟2708中,AOUij透過與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於更新物體區域影像之各帶域像素値會按照函數 Uijk(2L、Ϊ)將之移動至可移動地。移動之帶域像素値會當作 新之更新物體區域影像之各帶域像素値處理。 步驟2709中,A0%透適與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於更新數位影像之各帶域像素値會按照函數Uljk(2L 、幻將之移動至可移動地。移動之帶域像素値會當作新之 數位影像之各帶域像素値處理。 步驟2710中,會判斷表示從步驟2706到步驟2709之 重複次數之移動次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果移動次數 未達指定次數(步驟2710 ·· NO),則會返回步驟2706。如果 移動次數有達到指定次數(步驟2710 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟2711。另外該指定次數係根據數位影像111之大小或數 位影像111之分離物體區域143之大小,還有附近之大小Q 決定。若配合使用目之設定適當之參數,即使指定次數決 定很多也沒問題,但是指定次數太多之話,正規化所需時 間就會變長。 步驟2711中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於完成移動之更新物體區域影像之各帶域像素値 會按照函數Vuk〇L、以附近之平均値補全。而且與^都 爲更新物體區域影像。用平均値放入之帶域像素値會當作 被正規化之更新物體區域影像之帶域像素値處理。 96 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _____ B7_____ — V. Description of the invention (? 少 • Huk (2L, I) finds a pixel in a moving zone that can be moved. It indicates whether a pixel in a moving zone is considered a zone pixel in a movable image. Processing. In step 2708, AOUij communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and will update each band pixel of the object area image according to the function Uijk (2L, Ϊ) to move it. The domain pixels will not be treated as new band pixels of the new object area image. In step 2709, A0% penetration will communicate with the nearby array computing device 100, and the band pixels of the digital image will not be updated. According to the function Uljk (2L, move it to a movable place. The moving band pixels will be treated as the band pixels of the new digital image. In step 2710, it will be judged that from step 2706 to step 2709. Has the number of repetitions reached the specified number of times. If the number of repetitions has not reached the specified number of times (step 2710 · · NO), it returns to step 2706. If the number of repetitions has reached the specified number of times (step 2710) : YES), it will move to step 2711. In addition, the specified number of times is determined based on the size of the digital image 111 or the size of the separated object area 143 of the digital image 111, and the nearby size Q. If the setting for the use purpose is appropriate As for the parameter, even if the number of designated times is determined, it is not a problem, but if too many designated times, the time required for normalization will become longer. In step 2711, AO% will use 100 to communicate with the nearby array computing device. Each band pixel of the updated object area image will be completed according to the function Vuk0L and the average value of the vicinity. And ^ is the updated object area image. The band pixels placed by the average value will be treated as The band pixels of normalized updated object area images are processed. 96 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _____ _B7_____ 五、發明說明 ----I------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 步驟2712中,AO%會利用與附近陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於完成移動之更新數位影像之各帶域像素値會按 照函數VUk〇L、以附近之平均値塡入。而且2L·爲更新數位 影像;爲更新物體區域影像。用平均値塡入之帶域像素 値會當作被正規化之更新數位影像之帶域像素値處理。 步驟2713中,會判斷表示從步驟2711.到步驟2712之 重複次數之塡補次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果塡補次數 未達指定次數(步驟2713 : NO),則會返回步驟2711。如果 塡補次數有達到指定次數(步驟2713 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟2714。一般之塡補次數有附近大小q之一半左右之次數 就夠了。 線· 步驟2714中,會判斷表示從步驟2706到步驟2713之 重複次數之繼續次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果繼續次數 未達指定次數(步驟2714 : NO),則會返回步驟2706。如果 繼續次數有達到指定次數(步驟2714 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟2715。另外該指定次數係根據數位影像111之大小或數 位影像111之分離物體區域143之大小,還有附近之大小Q 決定。若配合使用目之設定適當之參數,即使指定次數決 定很多也沒問題,但是指定次數太多之話,正規化所需時 間就會變長。 步驟1715中,會將更新數位影像之帶域像素値當作正 規化影像145之帶域像素値輸出。之後就回到步驟2703。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,區域正規化裝置27可從物體區域影像142及數位影 97 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _________B7_____ 五、發明說明(ft) 像111作成正規化影像145。 如第37圖所示,利用資料處理裝置11〇實現之遮罩裝 置40,爲了從數位影像111及物體區域影像142作成遮罩 影像148,格子狀上排列之陣列運算裝置1〇〇會同步平行動 作。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置1〇〇當作 AO%,貝[]AOIV演算法會如第38圖所示。/ 步驟4001中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定AO%之附近。 步驟4002中,會設定AO%之附近或變數之起始値。 步驟4003中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之數位影像111 或物體區域影像142。如果無數位影像111或物體區域影像 142其中之一(步驟4003 : YES),則會結束演算法。如果有 數位影像111或物體區域影像142其中之一(步驟4403: NO),則會轉移至步驟4004。只是當僅對特定之帶域數及 影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圈 〇 步驟4004中,會帶域數分輸入數位影像111及物體區 域影像142之i行j列之像素。這是因AO%會整批處理數 位影像111及物體區域影像142之i行j列之像素。因此 八〇%至少需要儲存帶域數分之影像資料之記億體102 ° 步驟4005中,對於數位影像111之各帶域像素値會按 照函數〇Uk〇L、進行遮罩處理。被遮罩之帶域像素値會當 作遮罩影像148之帶域像素値處理。 步驟4006中,會輸出遮罩影像148之帶域像素値。之 98 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 . -線- 498290 A7 _____B7 ___ 五、發明說明(%) •後就回到步驟4003。 ----1---— II------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,遮罩裝置40可遮罩數位影像111中之分離物體區域 143之外。 利用資料處理裝置110實現之影像保持裝置39爲了儲 存正規化影像145,格子狀上排列之陣列運算裝置100會同 步平行動作。若將配置於格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置 100當作AO%,則AOIV演算法會如第39圖所示。 步驟3801中,係將AO%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定AO%之附近。 步驟3802中,會設定AO%之附近或變數之起始値。 -線· 步驟3803中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之正規化影像 145。如果無正規化影像145(步驟3803 : YES),則會結束 演算法。如果有正規化影像145(步驟3803 : NO),則會轉 移至步驟3804。只是僅對特定之影像大小裝設陣列運算裝 置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圏。 步驟3804中,會帶域數分輸入正規化影像145之i行 j列之像素。因此AO%至少需要儲存帶域數分之影像資料 之記憶體102 〇 步驟3805中,若輸出地之裝置爲必須,就會轉換正規 化影像145之格式。尤其是正規化影像145之帶域數設爲1 :數位影像111之帶域數若爲4以上,則將正規化影像145 之帶域數設爲3,容易作成模擬訊號很權宜。否則什麼都 不做。 99 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498290 A7 五、發明說明(U) 步驟3806中,爲了將影像資料確實地傳送至處理速度 不同之輸出地之裝置,會儲存正規化影像145之i行j列之 像素。 步驟3807中,會輸出正規化影像145之帶域像素値。 之後就回到步驟3803。步 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構成之資料處理裝置 110 ’影像保持裝置39可輸出.正規化影像145。另外維持數 位影像111及遮罩影像148之影像保持裝置39也會同樣動 作。 到此係說明了資料處理裝置11〇輸入1個或2個影像 進行鄰域處理到影像處理之影像儲存裝置12、色彩資訊產 生裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、邊緣資訊形成裝置15、 位置/大小檢測裝置Π、位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44、區 域正規化裝置27、遮罩裝置40、及影像保持裝置39。不過 模式匹配裝置38必須用非常多之影像。因此下述係一邊表 示模式匹配裝置38用之鄰域處理;一邊說明有關運用資料 處理裝置110實現模式匹配裝置38之方法。 首先以正規化影像145當作2L;以η個樣板影像146當 作ff、、、/、、、y。若使用自然數g,匹配結果影 像147之i行j列之匹配結果σ⑴,會根據公式48比較正規 化影像145及樣板影像146之i行j列之像素’指示具有最 像正規化影像145之像素之像素之樣板影像146之號碼。 :另外因匹配結果影像147爲單帶域影像’故會虽作權且上 帶域數1之影像處理。因此匹配結果°·⑴之第3加字爲1。 100 _____一---- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) --------------------- 訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _____ _B7_____ 5. Description of the invention ---- I ------------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) In step 2712, AO% will be used to calculate with nearby arrays. The device 100 communicates, and for each band pixel of the updated digital image that has completed the movement, it will be entered according to the function VUkoL, with a nearby average. And 2L · is for updating the digital image; it is for updating the image of the object area. Band pixels 値 塡 that are averaged in are treated as band pixels 更新 that are normalized to update the digital image. In step 2713, it is judged whether or not the number of complements representing the number of repetitions from step 2711. to step 2712 has reached the specified number. If the number of replenishments has not reached the specified number (step 2713: NO), it returns to step 2711. If the number of corrections reaches the specified number (step 2713: YES), the process moves to step 2714. Generally, the number of replenishment is about one and a half times of the nearby size q. Line · In step 2714, it is judged whether or not the number of continuations indicating the number of repetitions from step 2706 to step 2713 has reached the specified number. If the number of continuations has not reached the specified number (step 2714: NO), it returns to step 2706. If the number of continuations reaches the specified number (step 2714: YES), the process moves to step 2715. In addition, the specified number of times is determined based on the size of the digital image 111 or the size of the separated object region 143 of the digital image 111 and the size Q of the vicinity. If appropriate parameters are used in conjunction with the purpose of the project, it is not a problem even if the number of specified times is determined, but if the number of specified times is too large, the time required for normalization will become longer. In step 1715, the band pixels 更新 of the updated digital image are output as band pixels 正 of the normalized image 145. After that, it returns to step 2703. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the area normalization device 27 can obtain the image 142 and the digital image 97 of the object area. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290. A7 _________B7_____ 5. Description of the Invention (ft) The image 111 is used to create a normalized image 145. As shown in FIG. 37, in order to create a mask image 148 from the digital image 111 and the object area image 142, the mask computing device 40 implemented by the data processing device 110 is synchronized in parallel with the array computing device 100 action. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the [] AOIV algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 38. / In step 4001, AO% is arranged on row i and column j of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around the AO%. In step 4002, the vicinity of AO% or the starting point of the variable is set. In step 4003, it is determined whether there is a digital image 111 or an object area image 142 input in order. If there is no digital image 111 or object area image 142 (step 4003: YES), the algorithm will end. If there is one of the digital image 111 or the object area image 142 (step 4403: NO), the process proceeds to step 4004. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific number of bands and image size, it can also be set to an infinite loop. In step 4004, the digital image 111 and the object region image 142 are entered in line i of the band. Column of pixels. This is because AO% processes the pixels in rows i and j of the digital image 111 and the object area image 142 in a batch. Therefore, 80% needs to store at least 100% of the image data of the band. 102 ° In step 4005, for each band pixel of the digital image 111, mask processing is performed according to the function 0Uk0L. Masked band pixels are treated as band pixels of the mask image 148. In step 4006, the band pixels 値 of the mask image 148 are output. 98 of this paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). -Line- 498290 A7 _____B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (% ) • Then go back to step 4003. ---- 1 ---- II ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the masking device 40 can cover It covers outside the separated object area 143 in the digital image 111. In order to store the normalized image 145, the image holding device 39 implemented by the data processing device 110, the array computing device 100 arranged in a grid shape moves in parallel and in parallel. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AO%, the AOIV algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 39. In step 3801, AO% is arranged on rows i and j of the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around the AO%. In step 3802, the vicinity of AO% or the starting point of the variable is set. -Line · In step 3803, it is judged whether or not the normalized image 145 is sequentially input. If there is no normalized image 145 (step 3803: YES), the algorithm ends. If there is a normalized image 145 (step 3803: NO), it proceeds to step 3804. When the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it can also be set to infinite loop. In step 3804, the pixels in the i-th row and the j-th column of the normalized image 145 are input with the number of domains. Therefore, at least AO% needs to store the image data with the number of domains of the memory 102. In step 3805, if the output device is necessary, the format of the normalized image 145 will be converted. In particular, the number of bands of the normalized image 145 is set to 1: If the number of bands of the digital image 111 is 4 or more, the number of bands of the normalized image 145 is set to 3, which is easy to create an analog signal. Otherwise, do nothing. 99 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 498290 A7 V. Description of the invention (U) In step 3806, in order to reliably transfer the image data to the device with different processing speed, Pixels in rows i and j of the normalized image 145 are stored. In step 3807, the band pixels 値 of the normalized image 145 are output. After that, it returns to step 3803. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 'composed of the array computing device 100, the image holding device 39 can output the normalized image 145. The image holding device 39 that maintains the digital image 111 and the mask image 148 also operates in the same manner. Here it is explained that the data processing device 11 inputs 1 or 2 images for neighborhood processing to image processing image storage device 12, color information generating device 41, edge information generating device 14, edge information forming device 15, The size detection device Π, the position / size / inclination detection device 44, the area normalization device 27, the mask device 40, and the image holding device 39. However, the pattern matching device 38 must use a very large number of images. Therefore, the following is a description of the neighborhood processing used by the pattern matching device 38, and a description of a method of implementing the pattern matching device 38 using the data processing device 110. First, the normalized image 145 is taken as 2L; the n template images 146 are taken as ff, ,, / ,, and y. If a natural number g is used, the matching result σ⑴ of the i row and j column of the matching result image 147 will be compared with the pixel of the i row and j column of the normalized image 145 and the template image 146 according to Formula 48. The number of pixels of the template image 146 of the pixel. : In addition, because the matching result image 147 is a single-band domain image, it will be processed with the right number of upper-band domains. Therefore, the third plus word of the matching result ° · ⑴ is 1. 100 _____ 一 ---- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) --------------------- Order- -------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 B7 五 (48) 、發明說明(Μ) 9 if Zhi^ijk - Vijk)2 = minx^^n Ek(xijk - y^jkY for 1 < ^ < n and only one of 0 otherwise. 在此根據公式48作成之匹配結果在匹配結果影像 147中不一定要被統一。當樣板影像I46很多時,匹配結果 影像147成爲馬賽克狀之可能性很高。因此資料處理裝置 110對於匹配結果aw與其q附近內之匹配結果計算矩形圖 ,並收斂匹配結果σ⑴之方法,如下所示。 任一單帶域影像^爲匹配結果影像147時,若使用自 然數g、實數u與V,匹配結果影像147會根據公式49及 50更新。另外因匹配結果影像147爲單帶域影像,會當作 權宜上帶域數1之影像處理。因此函數之第3下標 --------------裝—— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) r= < 9 if ^ijl) Σρ(ί,77ΐτ1)€Ρι;ι(^) ^Iml) ^ maxx</l<n{eq(/i, Xiji) + and 2[eq(g,Xiji) + Σρ^τη^βΡιΜς) e<l(9iximi)} > Niji fov 1 < g < n and only one of g1 0 otherwise. (49) -—線· eq(乜,i;) 1 if u = r, 0 otherwise. (50) 資料處理裝置lio等到匹配結果影像147不變化後就 反覆計算公式49及公式50,可收斂匹配結果影像147整體 之匹配結果。此時利用正規化影像145與樣板影像146之 101 L^g尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ____B7_____ 五、發明說明(θ) •組合,匹配結果會如下收斂。如果正規化影像145約一半 之像素最類似特定之樣板影像146之像素,則匹配結果影 像147幾乎之匹配結果會收斂爲此特定之樣板影像146號 碼。不過正規化影像145之幾個像素區塊若與幾個不同之 樣板影像146之像素區塊類似之話,在匹配結果影像147 中會產生被0包圍之幾個樣板影像146號碼區塊。再者正 規化影像145若與樣板影像.146之集合無相關,則匹配結 果影像147之匹配結果幾乎爲0。因此由資料處理裝置I10 實現之模式匹配很難特定最像正規化影像145之樣板影像 146,低是從樣板影像146中可選擇幾個相似之樣板影像 146。因此從模式匹配之結果作成辨識結果之過程中,利用 模式匹配作成之匹配結果影像147只要從樣板影像146之 類似候補中,選擇最有力之1個候補即可。 如第40圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110實現之模式匹 配,爲了作成由表示最像樣板影像146中之正規化影像145 之影像號碼之匹配結果構成之匹配結果影像147,格子狀 上排列之陣列運算裝置100會同步平行動作。若將配置於 格子上i行j列之陣列運算裝置100當作AOUij,貝丨J AOUu 演算法會如第41圖所示。 步驟2901中,係將A0%排列於格子上之i行j列上 。無論這是理論上或實際上,都必須決定A0%之附近。 步驟2902中,會設定A0%之附近或變數之起始値。 在附近之設定上,可個別決定前述各函數使用之附近大小 q,也可全部統一。爲了提高本發明之資料處理裝置110作 102 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂-· 線 498290 A7 ____B7______ 五、發明說明 成之匹配結果影像147之正確性,故將附近大小Q全部設 定爲大値較佳。但是因要更新匹配結果之計算時間之規定 、被輸入正規化影像145之大小等,模式匹配可配合需要 變更適當之附近大小來處理。 步驟2903中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之樣板影像146 。如果無樣板影像146(步驟2903 : YES),則會轉移至步驟 2905。如果有樣板影像146(步驟2903 ·· NO),則會轉移至 步驟2904。 步驟2904中,會帶域數分輸入樣板影像146之i行J 列之像素。因此AO%至少需要儲存具有帶域數與樣板影 像146數之像素資料之記憶體1〇2。之後則回到步驟2903 〇 步驟2905中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之正規化影像 145。如果無正規化影像145(步驟2905 ·· YES),則會結束 演算法。如果有正規化影像145(步驟2905 : NO),則會轉 移至步驟2906。只是僅對特定之影像大小裝設陣列運算裝 置100時,也可設定爲無限迴圏。 步驟2906中,會帶域數分輸入正規化影像145之i行 j列之像素。因此AO%至少需要儲存帶域數分之像素資料 之記憶體102。 步驟2907中,會從正規化影像H5與樣板影像146計 算匹配結果影像147之匹配結果σ⑴。匹配結果會成爲表示 最接近正規化影像145之樣板影像146號碼之帶域像素値 〇 103 I I n I n n I n ί ί ϋ i i I 0 emmmm I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·· --線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _____ B7 ____ ’ 五、發明說明(P /) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 步驟2908中,AO%透過與附近之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 通訊,對於匹配結果影像147之各帶域像素値會按照函數 更新匹配結果。被更新之帶域像素値會當作匹配結 -果影像147之帶域像素値處理。在此之函數會〜直 反覆直到原本之匹配結果影像147之帶域像素値不變化。 不過根據在計算時間之規定、被輸入之正辑化影像145之 品質、被更新之匹配結果影像147上所追求之品質等,更 新處理是以適當之反覆次數結束計算較佳。 步驟2909中,會輸出匹配結果影像147之帶域像素値 。之後就回到步驟2905。 因此,使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構成之資料處理裝置 110,影像辨識裝置29中之模式匹配可從正規化影像145 作成匹配結果影像147。 --線· 到目前爲止係說明了有關使用由陣列運算裝置1〇〇構 成之資料處理裝置110,來進行僅具備鄰域處理之影像處 理。以下,係說明有關使用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資 料處理裝置110,且僅用鄰域處理之物體/背景分離裝置16 〇 首先,非線性振動子一般將產生拉進現象。所謂拉 進現象,係在有限週期(limit-cycle)或吸子(attractor)等週期 性動作之情形下,具有不同週期之非線性振動子被約束成 有相互作用並以簡單常數比之週期振動之現象。這時若讓 1個非線性振動子之振動產生變化,因其他之非線性振動 子也跟著變化,故該等非線性振動子彼此同步。而且利用 104 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明(PI) 調整非線性振動子之相互作用,可盡量讓彼此之振動枏位 差變小或變大。因此若操作此相互作用,就可將一群非線 性振動子分割爲具有不同相位之複數個群組。物體/背景分 離裝置16利用這樣之非線性振動子之拉進現象,以使邊緣 資訊影像中之邊緣資訊變成界線之方式分離物體與背景, 而產生表示物體區域141之物體區域影像142。另外,在此 ,舉使用Van-der-Pole作爲非線性振動子尚情況爲例來說 明。 首先,在由排列成格子狀上之非線性振動子構成之非 線性振動子網路中,若將i行j列上之非線性振動子當作ω ,,則在非線性振動子之q附近之非線性振動子之集合 Ω办)會依公式51表示。不過q爲4、8、24、48、80、120 、(2r+l)2-l之連續數列,r爲自然數。另外超出網路大小 範圍之非線性振動子被包含於附近集合QJq)時,會用非線 性振動子6^來代替。因此邊緣處理會自動進行。因此附近 集合之元素數通常都爲q。由此判斷,非線性振動子 網路會成爲與單區域像素相同處理。爲了簡單地表現,在 非線性振動子網路中下標僅使用寬度方向與高度方向2種 if q {ωι^τη ^ < l < i + r, j - r <m < j + r, ωιιΤη φ uid} if g = (2r + l)2 — 1· 105 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (51) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 B7 Five (48), Invention Description (IF) 9 if Zhi ^ ijk-Vijk) 2 = minx ^^ n Ek (xijk-y ^ jkY for 1 < ^ < n and only one of 0 otherwise. In The matching result created according to formula 48 does not have to be unified in the matching result image 147. When there are many sample images I46, the possibility of the matching result image 147 becoming mosaic-like is very high. Therefore, the data processing device 110 has a high probability of The method of calculating a rectangular map of the matching results in the vicinity of q and converging the matching result σ⑴ is shown below. When any single-band image ^ is the matching result image 147, if the natural number g, real numbers u and V are used, the matching result image 147 will be updated according to formulas 49 and 50. In addition, because the matching result image 147 is a single-band domain image, it will be treated as an expedient upper-band domain number 1. Therefore, the third subscript of the function --------- ----- 装 —— (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) r = < 9 if ^ ijl) Σρ (ί, 77ΐτ1) € Pι; ι (^) ^ Iml) ^ maxx < / l < n {eq (/ i, Xiji) + and 2 [eq (g, Xiji) + Σρ ^ τη ^ βΡιΜς) e < l (9iximi)} > Niji fov 1 < g < n and o nly one of g1 0 otherwise. (49)-line · eq (乜, i;) 1 if u = r, 0 otherwise. (50) The data processing device lio repeatedly calculates the formula 49 after the matching result image 147 does not change. And formula 50, the matching result of the matching result image 147 as a whole can be converged. At this time, the 101 L ^ g scale of the normalized image 145 and the template image 146 is applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ____B7_____ V. Description of the invention (θ) • Combination, the matching result will be as follows convergence. If about half of the pixels of the normalized image 145 are most similar to the pixels of the specific template image 146, almost the matching result of the matching result image 147 will converge to this specific template image 146 number. However, if the pixel blocks of the normalized image 145 are similar to the pixel blocks of several different template images 146, the number of blocks of the template image 146 surrounded by 0 will be generated in the matching result image 147. Furthermore, if the normalized image 145 has no correlation with the set of template images .146, the matching result of the matching result image 147 is almost zero. Therefore, the pattern matching realized by the data processing device I10 is difficult to specify the template images 146 that are most like the normalized images 145. Low is to select several similar template images 146 from the template images 146. Therefore, in the process of preparing the recognition result from the result of pattern matching, the matching result image 147 created by using pattern matching only needs to select the most powerful candidate from the similar candidates of the template image 146. As shown in FIG. 40, the pattern matching realized by the data processing device 110 is used to create a matching result image 147 composed of a matching result representing the image number of the normalized image 145 in the template image 146, arranged in a grid pattern. The array computing device 100 operates synchronously and in parallel. If the array computing device 100 arranged in i rows and j columns on the grid is regarded as AOUij, the Bayou J AOUu algorithm will be as shown in FIG. 41. In step 2901, A0% is arranged on i rows and j columns on the grid. Whether this is theoretical or practical, it must be decided around A0%. In step 2902, the vicinity of A0% or the starting point of the variable is set. In the neighborhood setting, the neighborhood size q used by the aforementioned functions can be individually determined, or all of them can be unified. In order to improve the data processing device 110 to 102 of the present invention, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------------- (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page again.) Order-· Line 498290 A7 ____B7______ 5. The correctness of the matching result image 147 described in the invention, so it is better to set all nearby size Q to large. However, due to the update of the calculation time of the matching result, the size of the normalized image 145 that is input, etc., the pattern matching can be processed according to the need to change the appropriate nearby size. In step 2903, it is determined whether or not the template images 146 are sequentially input. If there is no template image 146 (step 2903: YES), the process proceeds to step 2905. If there is a template image 146 (step 2903 ··· NO), the process proceeds to step 2904. In step 2904, the pixels of the i-th row and the J-th column of the template image 146 are input with the number of domains. Therefore, at least AO% needs to store a memory 102 having pixel data of the number of bands and the number of template images 146. After that, it returns to step 2903. In step 2905, it is determined whether there is a normalized image 145 that has been sequentially input. If there is no normalized image 145 (step 2905 ··· YES), the algorithm ends. If there is a normalized image 145 (step 2905: NO), it proceeds to step 2906. When the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific image size, it can also be set to infinite loop. In step 2906, the pixels in the i-th row and the j-th column of the normalized image 145 are input with the number of domains. Therefore, the AO% needs to store at least the memory 102 with pixel data in the number of domains. In step 2907, the matching result σ⑴ of the matching result image 147 is calculated from the normalized image H5 and the template image 146. The matching result will be the band pixel 値 〇103 II n I nn I n ί ii ii I 0 emmmm I which is closest to the normalized image 145 of the template image 145 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ·· --- line · This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _____ B7 ____ 'V. Description of the invention (P /) ---------- ---- Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} In step 2908, AO% communicates with the nearby array computing device 100, and for each band pixel of the matching result image 147 値The matching result will be updated according to the function. The updated band pixel will be treated as the band pixel of the matching result-fruit image 147. The function here will be repeated until the band pixel of the original matching result image 147. No change. However, according to the calculation time requirements, the quality of the input edited image 145, the quality sought on the updated matching result image 147, etc., it is better to finish the calculation with an appropriate number of iterations. Steps In 2909, a matching result is output Band pixels 値 like 147. After that, it returns to step 2905. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100 and the pattern matching in the image recognition device 29, a matching result image can be made from the normalized image 145 147.-Line · So far, the use of the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100 has been described to perform image processing with only neighborhood processing. The following is the description of the use of the array computing device 100 The data processing device 110 is composed of an object / background separation device that uses only neighborhood processing. 16 First, a nonlinear vibrator will generally cause a pull-in phenomenon. The so-called pull-in phenomenon is a limit-cycle or suction In the case of periodic actions such as an attractor, non-linear vibrators with different periods are constrained to interact with each other and vibrate at a simple constant ratio. At this time, if the vibration of a non-linear vibrator is changed , Because other non-linear vibrators also change, these non-linear vibrators are synchronized with each other. And it is applicable to China with 104 paper scales Home Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (PI) Adjusting the interaction of the non-linear vibrator can make the vibration difference between each other as small or large as possible. Therefore, if By operating this interaction, a group of nonlinear oscillators can be divided into a plurality of groups with different phases. The object / background separation device 16 uses the pull-in phenomenon of such a nonlinear oscillator to make the edges in the edge information image The information becomes a boundary to separate the object from the background, and an object region image 142 representing the object region 141 is generated. In addition, here, the case where Van-der-Pole is used as a nonlinear oscillator is taken as an example. First, in a non-linear vibrator network composed of non-linear vibrators arranged in a grid, if the non-linear vibrators in the i-th row and j-columns are taken as ω, then they are near the q of the non-linear vibrator. The set of non-linear oscillators (Ω) will be expressed according to Formula 51. However, q is a continuous sequence of 4, 8, 24, 48, 80, 120, (2r + l) 2-l, and r is a natural number. In addition, when the nonlinear vibrator beyond the network size range is included in the nearby set QJq), the nonlinear vibrator 6 ^ will be used instead. Therefore, edge processing occurs automatically. Therefore, the number of elements in the nearby set is usually q. It is judged from this that the nonlinear oscillator network will be treated the same as a single area pixel. For simplicity, the subscripts in the nonlinear oscillator network only use two types of width and height: if q {ωι ^ τη ^ < l < i + r, j-r < m < j + r, ωιιΤη φ uid} if g = (2r + l) 2 — 1 · 105 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm) (51) (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again)

498290 B7 五、發明說明(f^) 接著,非線性振動子在與包含於Qa附近之附近集合Ω498290 B7 V. Description of the Invention (f ^) Next, the nonlinear vibrator gathers Ω near Qa

Jq)上非線性振動子之間會利用按照公式計算之結合値 結合之。另外不用對數表之狀況下利用公式53也可很接近 。而#、^爲適當之正常數。 r π (52) 1 — 2\x\2 + \x[c if 0 < |x| < 1, sinc(x) ^ 4 — 8|:r| + 5|工|2 — |z|3 if 1 < \x\ < 2, 〇 otherwise. (53) 非線性振動子網路之所有非線性振動子以完全同相位 進行同步時,只要以處理器101計算,非線性振動子當作 6^」就會永久持續同相位之動作。因此如果發生外亂广^·可 避免這樣之狀態。當作外亂也可使用疑似亂數,但是用公 式54那樣簡單之公式求出就可了。另外(ij表示有無邊緣 資訊影像之i行j列之邊緣資訊。如果有邊緣資訊就視爲1 ;沒有就視爲0。而/c爲適當之正常數。The non-linear oscillators on Jq) are combined using the combination 値 calculated according to the formula. In addition, without using a logarithmic table, it can be very close to using formula 53. And #, ^ are appropriate normal numbers. r π (52) 1 — 2 \ x \ 2 + \ x [c if 0 < | x | < 1, sinc (x) ^ 4 — 8 |: r | + 5 | 工 | 2 — | z | 3 if 1 < \ x \ < 2, 〇otherwise. (53) When all the non-linear oscillators of the non-linear oscillator network are synchronized in exactly the same phase, as long as the processor 101 is used to calculate, the non-linear oscillator is Doing 6 ^ "will continue the same phase action permanently. Therefore, in the event of external disturbances, such a situation can be avoided. Suspected random numbers can also be used as external disturbances, but they can be obtained using a simple formula such as Equation 54. In addition (ij indicates whether there is edge information in the i row and j columns of the edge information image. If there is edge information, it is regarded as 1; if it is not, it is regarded as 0. And / c is an appropriate normal number.

Pij = (54) 非線性振動子ω ij因與附近集合Ω yq)之非線性振動子 kl同步,故根據公式55計算附近輸入合計ση。 (55) 106 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Pij = (54) The non-linear oscillator ω ij is synchronized with the non-linear oscillator kl of the nearby set Ω yq), so the total nearby input ση is calculated according to Formula 55. (55) 106 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 五、發明說明(/〇V) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 構成Van-der-Pole非線性振動子…之2個參數〜與 Ψϋ會按照公式56及公式57計算之。而r、ε爲適當之正 常數。 = φ.. dt (56) ^^一 7知—— 4)知 + σ”. + 〜 (57) 雖然要將非線性振動子分離爲物體區域141與背景區 域必須要計算全部的非線性振動子之相位偏移,單是只是 單純地分離爲物體區域141與背景區域2個,故參數會 以是否爲界限値0以上或未滿來計算相位偏移。輸出分離 物體區域141與背景區域之結果之輸出又^可用公式58求 出。而Θ爲適當之正常數。 (1 if ipij > θ, λυ = S (卸 0 otherwise. ^ ; \ 邊緣資訊雖分離物體與背景卻不充分時,就必須補充 邊緣資訊。因此必須在非線性振動子ωϋ之qB附近上之非 線性振動子ω ^之集合Ω ij(qB)中找出有多少非線性振動子發 生相位偏移。因此用公式59計算輪廓參數7? ”。This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 V. Description of the invention (/ 〇V) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) constitutes Van-der-Pole non The two parameters of the linear vibrator ... and Ψϋ will be calculated according to Equation 56 and Equation 57. R and ε are appropriate positive constants. = φ .. dt (56) ^^ 一 7 知 —— 4) know + σ ”. + ~ (57) Although to separate the non-linear oscillator into the object region 141 and the background region, all the non-linear vibrations must be calculated The phase shift of the sub-element is simply separated into two areas: the object area 141 and the background area, so the parameter will calculate the phase offset based on whether the limit is 以上 0 or more or less. The output separates the object area 141 from the background area. The output of the result can be obtained by formula 58. Θ is an appropriate normal number. (1 if ipij > θ, λυ = S (remove 0 otherwise. ^; \ Although the edge information is not sufficient to separate the object from the background, The edge information must be supplemented. Therefore, the number of nonlinear oscillators ω ij (qB) must be found in the set of nonlinear oscillators ω ^ near qB of the nonlinear oscillator ωϋ. Therefore, Equation 59 is used. Calculate contour parameter 7? ”.

Vij = Σ λ^'λ^+ (χυ)2 (59) ^ki^ij(Qb) 表示以此結果爲基礎之邊緣資訊補充比例之限制參數 Γϋ會用公式60計算之。而α、沒、77_、77max爲適當之 107 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐) ^ij dt (60) 498290 A7 B7 五、發明說明 正的常數Vij = Σ λ ^ 'λ ^ + (χυ) 2 (59) ^ ki ^ ij (Qb) Represents the limiting parameter of the marginal information supplement ratio based on this result Γϋ will be calculated using Equation 60. Α, none, 77_, and 77max are appropriate. 107 The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 mm) ^ ij dt (60) 498290 A7 B7 V. Explanation of the invention Positive constant

Vmin ^ Vij ^ Ήτηαχι /3(1 — (fi;·) otherwise. 在此雖說明了當作非線性振動子之Van-der-Pole之狀 況,但其他用布魯塞爾機(Brusselator)及intQgrate-and-fire形 振動子那樣之有限週期安定之非線性振動子、以及產生勞 倫斯吸子(Lorentz-attractor)和Roessler’s方程式之吸子之渾 纯(chaos)振動子等,產生拉進現象之任一非線性振動子也 可能有動作。這時只要追加用個別之非線性振動子之參數 置換參數與Ψυ即可。這時候僅在適當之參數上加進附 近輸入合計σ υ與外亂ρ ^。但是,渾沌振動子之情況下特 別是不將外亂Ρυ當作必要。 利用公式51到公式60,可記述能裝設物體/背景分離 裝置16之資料處理裝置110之所有陣列運算裝置100之演 算法。以下,係使用資料處理裝置110中之任一陣列運算 裝置100之演算法,說明有關物體/背景分離裝置16。 如第42圖所示,利用資料處理裝置110實現之物體/ 背景分離裝置16,因要利用三角形之邊緣資訊151分離爲 三角形之內側區域152與三角形之外側區域153,格子狀上 排列之陣列運算裝置1〇〇會同步平行動作。若將配置於格 子上i行:i列之陣列運算裝置100當作AOUij,則AO%演 算法會如第43圖所示。 步驟1601中,係將A0UH排列於格子上之i行:i列上 108 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Vmin ^ Vij ^ Ήτηαχι / 3 (1 — (fi; ·) otherwise. Although the state of Van-der-Pole, which is a nonlinear oscillator, has been described here, other Brussels machines and intQgrate-and- A nonlinear vibrator with a finite period of stability such as a fire-shaped vibrator, and a chaos vibrator that generates Lorentz-attractor and Roessler's equations, etc., any of the nonlinearities of the pull-in phenomenon The vibrator may also operate. At this time, it is only necessary to replace the parameters and Ψυ with the parameters of individual non-linear vibrators. At this time, only the appropriate parameters are added to the nearby input total σ υ and the external disturbance ρ ^. But chaos In the case of a vibrator, in particular, the external disturbance Pυ is not necessary. Using the formulas 51 to 60, the algorithms of all the array computing devices 100 capable of installing the data processing device 110 of the object / background separation device 16 can be described. The following The algorithm using any array computing device 100 in the data processing device 110 is used to describe the related object / background separation device 16. As shown in FIG. 42, the data processing device 110 is used to implement The object / background separation device 16 needs to use the edge information 151 of the triangle to separate the inner area 152 and the outer area 153 of the triangle. The array computing device 100 arranged in a grid will move in parallel and synchronously. Row i on the grid: The array computing device 100 in column i is regarded as AOUij, and the AO% algorithm will be as shown in Figure 43. In step 1601, A0UH is arranged in row i on the grid: 108 papers on column i Dimensions are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 --------B7 五、發明說明(〖〇L) Ο 步驟1602中,係根據公式52及53以結合値τ Ukl連接 附近同伴與wkl。 步驟1603中,會在非線性振動子之參數Φυ·與^^上 設定適當之初始値。 步驟1604中,會判斷有無依序被輸入之形成邊緣資訊 影像115。如果無形成邊緣資訊影像115(步驟1604: YES) ,則會結束演算法。如果有形成邊緣資訊影像Π5(步驟 1604 : NO),則會轉移至步驟1605。只是僅對特定之帶域 數及影像大小裝設陣列運算裝置1〇〇時,也可設定爲無限 迴圏。 步驟1605中,會輸入形成邊緣資訊114之Γ ij。 步驟1606中,會從之前剛輸入之形成邊緣資訊114之 Γ u按照公式54計算外亂p ij。 步驟1607中,會從有附近集合Qij(Qa)中之非線性振動 子okl之陣列運算裝置1〇〇之A〇Ukl輸入, 再按照公式55計算合計値σ ij。 步驟1608中,會按照公式56及57計算非線性振動子 之參數Φ ^與Ψ ij。亦即,以魯根哥達法(Runge-Kutta method)求得這些公式上所表示之微分方程式的解。 步驟1609中,會根據公式58計算非線性振動子之輸 出久u。在此,若Ψϋ- 0則會當作λ 1,若爲其他就當 作;U=〇。 步驟1610中,會從有附近集合中之非線性振動 109 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------- - 訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ______B7____ 五、發明說明C]) 子0ki之陣列運算裝置1〇〇之A〇ukl輸入;lij,再按照公式 59計算輪廓參數^。 步驟1611中,會按照公式60計算界線參數。亦即 ,以差分法或魯根哥達法求這些公式上表示之微分方程式 的解。 步驟1612中,會判斷表示從步驟1606、到步驟1611之 重複次數之分離次數有沒有達到指定次數。如果分離次數 未達指定次數(步驟1612 : NO),則會返回步驟1606。如果 分離次數有達到指定次數(步驟1612 : YES),就會移轉到步 驟 1613。 步驟1613中,會輸出成爲物體區域影像142之帶域像 素値之非線性振動子之輸出λ ij。之後就回到步驟1604。 另外在求出步驟1612中之分離次數時,可用下述方法 。在物體/背景分離裝置16上,若影像大小爲一定,則不 管非線性振動子之初期狀態,幾乎在全部的形成邊緣資訊 114中均在既定時間結束分離,故事先計算好該時間,然 後再求出從步驟1606到步驟1611之反覆次數即可。這是 因若非線性振動子之初期狀態在一定之範圍內,因拉進現 象到非線性振動子進行同步之時間不會有很大之差異。 像這樣僅計算非線性振動子,就可用三角形之邊緣資 訊151分離三角形之內側區域152與三角形之外側區域153 ,係因利用非線性振動子之性質之拉進現象。即,,以正 之結合値結合2個非線性振動子時,會成爲同相位、或以 負之結合値結合時,相位差異會變得很大。利用這個性質 110 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 -------- B7 V. Description of the invention (〖〇L) 〇 In step 1602, it is connected with 公式 τ Ukl according to formulas 52 and 53 to connect nearby peers and wkl. In step 1603, an appropriate initial value 设定 is set on the parameters Φ ·· and ^^ of the nonlinear oscillator. In step 1604, it is determined whether or not the edge information image 115 is sequentially input. If no edge information image 115 is formed (step 1604: YES), the algorithm will end. If an edge information image Π5 is formed (step 1604: NO), the process proceeds to step 1605. However, when the array computing device 100 is installed only for a specific number of bands and image size, it can also be set to infinite loop. In step 1605, Γ ij forming the edge information 114 is input. In step 1606, the chaos p ij is calculated from the Γ u of the edge information 114 that was just input according to formula 54. In step 1607, AoUkl of the array computing device 100, which has the nonlinear vibrator okl in the nearby set Qij (Qa), is input, and the total 値 σ ij is calculated according to formula 55. In step 1608, the parameters Φ ^ and Ψ ij of the nonlinear oscillator are calculated according to Equations 56 and 57. That is, the solutions of the differential equations represented by these formulas are obtained by the Runge-Kutta method. In step 1609, the output time u of the nonlinear oscillator is calculated according to Formula 58. Here, if Ψϋ-0, it will be treated as λ 1, if it is other, it will be treated as U; In step 1610, there will be a non-linear vibration in the nearby set. 109 The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------------- -----Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 498290 A7 ______B7____ V. Description of the invention C]) A 0ki array computing device A〇〇 of A〇 ukl input; lij, then calculate the contour parameters ^ according to formula 59. In step 1611, the boundary parameters are calculated according to formula 60. That is, use the difference method or the Rugen Gotthard method to find the solutions of the differential equations represented in these formulas. In step 1612, it is judged whether the number of separations indicating the number of repetitions from step 1606 to step 1611 has reached the specified number. If the number of separations has not reached the specified number (step 1612: NO), the process returns to step 1606. If the number of separations reaches the specified number (step 1612: YES), the process moves to step 1613. In step 1613, the output λ ij of the non-linear vibrator of the band pixel 値 which becomes the object region image 142 is output. After that, it returns to step 1604. In addition, to obtain the number of separations in step 1612, the following method can be used. On the object / background separation device 16, if the image size is constant, regardless of the initial state of the non-linear vibrator, almost all of the formation edge information 114 will be separated at a predetermined time. The story first calculates the time, and then Calculate the number of iterations from step 1606 to step 1611. This is because if the initial state of the nonlinear oscillator is within a certain range, there will not be a great difference in time between the pull-in phenomenon and the synchronization of the nonlinear oscillator. In this way, only the nonlinear vibrator is calculated, the edge information 151 of the triangle can be used to separate the inner region 152 and the outer region 153 of the triangle due to the pull-in phenomenon that uses the properties of the nonlinear oscillator. That is, when two non-linear vibrators are combined with a positive combination 値, they are in the same phase, or when they are combined with a negative combination 値, the phase difference becomes large. Take advantage of this property 110 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ____B7 _498290 A7 ____B7 _

五、發明說明(/A ,將排列於格子狀上之非線性振動子以相近同伴正之結合 値結合之,未直接結合之非線性振動子同伴會成爲同相位 。再者若以負之結合値結合在夾帶形成邊緣資訊114之像 素場所上之非線性振動子同伴,則邊緣資訊之兩邊會彼此 極力互相偏移相位。如此一來,不用結合全部的非線性振 動子就可在三角形之邊緣資訊151之內側與外側集合各個 不同之相位。因此物體/背景分離裝置16會如第42圖那樣 分離爲三角形之內側區域152·與三角形之外側區域153。此 時三角形之內側區域152與三角形之外側區域153之相位 差盡可能超越90度接近180度,三角形與背景區域可分離 〇 在此重要之爲,本實施例中,會用每次去得形成邊緣 資訊114時所示之方法將結合値變更爲擬似形式。首先如 公式52及53所制定之,將把非線性振動子okl結合爲非線 性振動子6^之結合値當作r Ukl(參照步驟1602)。形成邊緣 資訊114中是一樣,有邊緣時爲1;沒有時爲 0。若輸入形成邊緣資訊114中之(參照步驟16〇5) ,則會從陣列運算裝置100之AOUij轉送形成邊緣資訊114 Γ k丨到AO%,在AO%計算結合値r _(1— Γ ki)後當作結 合値rUkl之代用(參照步驟1607)。對於此代用之結合値r _(ι一 rkl),界線參數會當作從〇到1之倍率作用(參照 步驟1607)。 如第44圖所示,形成邊緣資訊114爲虛線狀態之三角 形邊緣資訊154時,就有需要補全虛線。首先一開始使用 111 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)V. Explanation of the invention (/ A, the non-linear vibrators arranged on the grid are combined with the positive combination of similar companions, and the non-linearly coupled non-linear vibrator companions will become the same phase. If they are combined with negative, Combined with the non-linear vibrator companion on the pixel place enclosing the edge information 114, the two sides of the edge information will be offset from each other as much as possible. In this way, the triangle information can be used without combining all the non-linear oscillators. The inner and outer sides of 151 gather different phases. Therefore, the object / background separation device 16 is separated into the inner region 152 of the triangle and the outer region 153 of the triangle as shown in FIG. 42. At this time, the inner region 152 of the triangle and the outer side of the triangle are separated. The phase difference of the region 153 is as much as possible beyond 90 degrees and close to 180 degrees, and the triangle and the background region can be separated. In this embodiment, it is important that in this embodiment, the method shown each time the edge information 114 is formed will be combined. Change to a pseudo-like form. First, formulae 52 and 53 will combine the nonlinear oscillator okl into a nonlinear oscillator 6 ^ The combination is treated as r Ukl (refer to step 1602). It is the same in forming the edge information 114, it is 1 when there is an edge, and 0 if it is not. If you input one of the forming edge information 114 (see step 1605), The AOUij of the array computing device 100 forwards the edge information 114 Γ k 丨 to AO%, and calculates the combination 値 r _ (1— Γ ki) as an alternative to the combination 値 rUkl (refer to step 1607). In conjunction with 値 r _ (ι_rkl), the boundary parameter will be treated as a magnification from 0 to 1 (refer to step 1607). As shown in Figure 44, when the edge information 114 is formed as triangle edge information 154 with a dotted state, Need to complete the dashed line. First use 111 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 498290 A7 ______B7_ 五、發明說明(丨〇°|) .虛線狀態之三角形邊緣資訊154使系統運作(參照步驟 1605),則虛線狀態之三角形邊緣資訊154之內側與外側之 相位差大約超過90度,但是三角形之內側與外側之界線部 分不明確。因此各AO%會計算非線性振動子之輸出Ay(參 照步驟1609)。此輸出λ u爲1時,若將附近之非線性振動 子中之Akl爲1之非線性振動子當作0kl,則參數Ψ。與Wkl 都爲Θ以上。即’ λ ij與λ kl大致爲同相位,若Θ爲正値, 最差之狀況相位差也不會超過90度。此相位差之最大値依 0之値決定,在;I 〃與λ kl都爲1之範圍下若加大6>,此相 位差則會接近於0度。因此使用λ u與λ kl,表示附近非線 性振動子中大約同相位者數量之輪廓參數ij會依照公式 59計算之(參照步驟1610)。接著此輪廓參數7/^在附近全體 中,如果大約一半則會按照公式60減少爲結合値之倍率之 界線參數,若以外情況則會按照公式60增加之(參照步 驟1611)。例如,8附近182之情況下若在3到5之間,若 能按照公式60減少界線參數則很好。若重複繼續動作該過 程,當如第44圖所示虛線狀態之三角形邊緣資訊154被設 定,會分離爲虛線三角形之內側區域155與虛線三角形之 外側區域156。 如第45圖所示,2個三角形重疊時,可取得前方三角 形之邊緣資訊157與後方三角形之邊緣資訊158。此時因前 方三角形之內側區域159與後方三角形之內側區域160與 雙重三角形之背景區域161之3個區域之非線行振動子之 相位會相互偏移,故會分離爲3個區域。又如第46圖所示 112 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 ---------------------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ____________B7 __ 五、發明說明(|(0) • ,2個重疊之圓形邊緣資訊162即使爲虛線,也會分離爲 即方圓形之內側區域163與後方圓形之內側區域164與雙 重圓形之背景區域165之3個。 因此’利用由陣列運算裝置100構成之資料處理裝置 110,物體/背景分離裝置16可將形成邊緣資訊影像115之 形成邊緣資訊114當作界線,分離物體區域141與背景區 域。另外,被分離之複數個區域雖會利用輸出λ ^ 一起與時 間之經過被讀取,但是陣列運算裝置1()〇會計算非線性振 動子之相位’可將被分離之複數個區域當作相位群組輸出 於一覽表上。 到目前係說明了有關視覺裝置2。這些視覺裝置2可 利用一般用電腦安裝,但當所搜尋之對象是移動物體時, 必須按照移動物體之移動速度之不同高速執行每個前述裝 置。尤其是當提高畫面影像之影像大小或解析度之後,以 影像本身作爲處理對象之影像儲存裝置12、色彩資訊產生 裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置14、邊緣資訊形成裝置15、位 置/大小檢測裝置17、物體/背景分離裝置16、區域正規化 裝置27、遮罩裝置40、影像保持裝置39、及模式匹配裝置 38,係其計算量在寬度方向及高度方向上,將和影像大小 或解析度成比例地增大。因此視覺裝置2有可能因用途之 不同而無法達到期望之性能。 爲了使用數位技術安裝影像儲存裝置12、色彩資訊產 生裝置41、邊緣資訊產生裝置Μ、邊緣資訊形成裝置15、 位置/大小檢測裝置17、物體/背景分離裝置16、區域正規 113 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 -丨線_ 498290 A7 _____Β7___ 五、發明說明(/〖 /) .化裝置27、遮罩裝置40、影像保持裝置39、及模式匹配裝 置38,將陣列運算裝置100在資料處理裝置110中排列成 如第16圖所示之格子狀,且對陣列運算裝置100以僅可與 資料處理裝置110中之所鄰接之陣列運算裝置100相互通 訊方式配線。即,對4附近同類者直接配線。因此,與對 8附近182同類者配線之情形相比,用較少之電子零件與 配線量就可同樣地高速動作,而且在將來擴大附近大小時 也簡單地具有擴充性。 陣列運算裝置100,係如第47圖所示,由影像處理上 要計算公式之處理器(PROCESSOR)l(n、儲存公式中所使用 之所有參數、常數、函數及運算子之記憶體(MENORY)102 、及用於與附近陣列運算裝置100通訊之控制器 (CONTR〇LER)103所構成,處理器101可利用位址匯流排 51所指定之位址(ADDRESS)來選擇記憶體102及控制器 103任一記憶體元件及暫存器。另外,處理器101會透過資 料匯流排52而與記憶體102及控制器103連結爲可雙向通 訊,並可存取位址匯流排51所指定之任一記憶體元件及暫 存器之資料(DATA)。陣列運算裝置100若輸入由至少1個 輸入畫面所構成之前輸入資料群(FRONT INPUR DATA SET) ,控制器103就將前述輸入資料群儲存於記憶體102。控制 器103,除了將由函數作成之記憶體102中之計算資料傳送 至鄰接之陣列運算裝置100外,還將從鄰接之陣列運算裝 置100接收之計算資料儲存於記憶體102,如有需要,就轉 送至輸入後以外之陣列運算裝置100。最後,控制器103將 114 ---I---------- I I I 1 1 I I 訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ^_ B7____ 五、發明說明(//1) 輸出影像之影像資料當作結果資料(RESULT DATA)來輸出 〇 在這樣之各個陣列運算裝置100上裝設控制器103之 理由:係因陣列運算裝置100之間在通訊時處理器101可 動作,故處理器101,利用通訊也可在等待時間內計算後做 到高速處理;即使變化附近之陣列運算裝置100之數硬體 也不需要變更;因控制器103對於影像之邊緣處理,亦即 影像中之邊緣像素,會自動進行例外處理,故處理器101 之程式就不需要做邊緣處理而變得非常單純。 處理器101與記憶體102可使用一般用之數位電路。 控制器103之具體性之電路圖如第48圖所示。位址緩衝器 (ADDRESS BUFFER)53 會透過位址匯流排(ADDRESS BUS)51從處理器101接收位址(ADDRESS),並利用位址解 碼器(ADDRESS DEC〇DER)54選擇各個位址及其他功能區 塊。資料緩衝區(DATA BUFFER)55會透過資料匯流排 (DATA BUS)52從處理器101接收資料(DATA),並透過內部 資料匯流排56與位址解碼器54所選擇之電阻排他性地通 訊。通訊方向由讀取(READ)指定。電阻指定旗標暫存器 (FLAG REGISTER)57時,資料會儲存於旗標暫存器57,利 用旗標解碼器(FLAG DECODER)58編譯,當作複數個訊號 (SIGNALS)傳送至連接之陣列運算裝置1〇〇。複數個訊號會 利用旗標編碼器(FLAG ENCODER)59收訊,被解析後會儲 存於狀態暫存器(STATUS REGISTER)60,並視爲接收 (RECEIVE)被傳回傳送源之陣列運算裝置10()。接收係以複 115 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) t5J· -線- 498290 A7 ___B7_____ 五、發明說明(/^) •數個訊號之傳送源之旗標編碼器59收訊’並當作結果確認 複數個訊號之傳送完了。若利用位址選擇狀態暫存器60, 則狀態暫存器60之內容會當作資料透過資料匯流排52傳 送至處理器101。旗標編碼器59若接收對應至少1個輸入 影像(INPUT IM‘AGE)之至少1個前輸入送達(FRONT INPUT SEND),會讀入由至少1個輸入影像形成之前輸入資料群 (FRON丁 INPUT DATA SE丁)所需要之儲存容量部分被準備之 前輸入資料暫存器(FRONT INPUT DATA REGISTER)6卜若 利用位址選擇前輸入資料暫存器61,則前輸入電阻之內容 會當作資料傳送至處理器101。處理器101結束計算後,利 用位址選擇結果資料暫存器(RESULT DATA REGISTER)62, 結果資料暫存器62會將輸出影像之影像資料當作結果資料 (RESULT DATA)讀入。在同時,旗標編碼器59會傳送結果 送達(RESULT SEND)。 從附近之陣列運算裝置100求出計算時需要之資料, 當作位址選擇輸出資料暫存器(OUTPUT DATA REGISTER)63,並將應送至附近之陣列運算裝置100之資料 當作計算資料(CALCURATION DATA)讀入輸出資料位址63 。然後’在鄰接之所有陣列運算裝置100上當作計算資料 傳送。若從上方之陣列運算裝置100接收複數個訊號 (SIGNALS),則會將計算資料讀入上輸入資料暫存器 (UPPER INPUT DATA REGISTER)64。之後,若從位址選擇 上輸入資料位址64,則上輸入資料暫存器64之內容會當 作計算資料被傳送。從下方、左方、右方之陣列運算裝置 116 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·.This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ______B7_ V. Description of the invention (丨 〇 ° |). The triangle edge information 154 in the dotted state enables the system to operate (refer to step 1605), then The phase difference between the inside and outside of the triangle edge information 154 in the dashed state is about 90 degrees, but the boundary between the inside and outside of the triangle is not clear. Therefore, each AO% will calculate the output Ay of the non-linear vibrator (see step 1609). When this output λ u is 1, if the non-linear vibrator with Akl of 1 in the nearby non-linear vibrators is regarded as 0 kl, then the parameter Ψ. And Wkl are both above Θ. That is, 'λ ij and λ kl are approximately In the same phase, if Θ is positive, the worst case phase difference will not exceed 90 degrees. The maximum value of this phase difference depends on the value of 0, and will increase if the range of I and λ kl are 1. 6>, this phase difference will be close to 0 degrees. Therefore, using λ u and λ kl, the contour parameter ij representing the number of approximately the same phase in the nearby nonlinear oscillator will be calculated according to formula 59 (refer to step 1610). This contour parameter 7 / ^ is all around If it is about half, it will be reduced to the bounding parameter of the ratio of 値 according to formula 60. If it is not the case, it will be increased according to formula 60 (refer to step 1611). For example, if the number is around 8 and 182 is between 3 and 5 In the meantime, it is good to reduce the boundary parameter according to formula 60. If the process is repeated, when the triangle edge information 154 of the broken line state is set as shown in FIG. 44, it will be separated into the inner area 155 of the broken line triangle and the broken line triangle. Outside area 156. As shown in Figure 45, when two triangles overlap, edge information 157 of the front triangle and edge information 158 of the rear triangle can be obtained. At this time, the inside area 159 of the front triangle and the inside area 160 of the rear triangle can be obtained. The phase of the non-linear vibrator in the three areas of the background area 161 of the double triangle will be offset from each other, so they will be separated into three areas. As shown in Figure 46, 112 This paper scale applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) --------------------- ^ --------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page) 498290 A7 ____________B7 __ 、 Explanation of the invention (| (0) •, even if the two overlapping circular edge information 162 are dotted lines, they will be separated into a square-shaped inner area 163 and a rear-shaped inner area 164 and a double-circular background area 3 of 165. Therefore, using the data processing device 110 composed of the array computing device 100, the object / background separation device 16 can use the formation edge information 114 forming the edge information image 115 as a boundary line to separate the object area 141 and the background area. In addition, although the separated regions are read with the passage of time together with the output λ ^, the array computing device 1 () 0 will calculate the phase of the non-linear vibrator. The separated regions can be regarded as The phase group is output on the list. The visual device 2 has been described so far. These vision devices 2 can be installed using a general computer, but when the searched object is a moving object, each of the aforementioned devices must be executed at a high speed according to the moving speed of the moving object. Especially after increasing the image size or resolution of the screen image, the image storage device 12, the color information generating device 41, the edge information generating device 14, the edge information forming device 15, and the position / size detecting device 17 taking the image itself as a processing object The object / background separation device 16, the area normalization device 27, the mask device 40, the image holding device 39, and the pattern matching device 38 are calculated in the width direction and the height direction, and will be equal to the image size or resolution. Increase proportionally. Therefore, the vision device 2 may not achieve the desired performance depending on the application. In order to use digital technology to install image storage device 12, color information generation device 41, edge information generation device M, edge information generation device 15, position / size detection device 17, object / background separation device 16, area regular 113 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Installation-丨 _ 498290 A7 _____ Β7 ___ V. Description of the invention (/ 〖/). 化 装置 27 、 The cover device 40, the image holding device 39, and the pattern matching device 38 arrange the array computing device 100 in the data processing device 110 into a grid shape as shown in FIG. 16, and the array computing device 100 can only process data. The adjacent array computing devices 100 in the device 110 are wired in a communication manner with each other. That is, direct wiring is performed to similar persons in the vicinity of 4. Therefore, compared with the case of wiring 182 similar persons near 8, the same high-speed operation can be performed with fewer electronic parts and wiring amount, and it can be simply expanded when the size of the vicinity is increased in the future. The array computing device 100 is shown in FIG. 47. A processor (PROCESSOR) l (n, which stores all parameters, constants, functions, and operators used in the formula in image processing) (MENORY) ) 102 and a controller 103 (CONTROLLER) 103 for communication with the nearby array computing device 100. The processor 101 can use the address (ADDRESS) specified by the address bus 51 to select the memory 102 and control Any memory component and register of the memory 103. In addition, the processor 101 will be connected to the memory 102 and the controller 103 through the data bus 52 to enable bidirectional communication and access to the addresses specified by the address bus 51 Data (DATA) of any memory element and register. If the array computing device 100 inputs a previous input data group (FRONT INPUR DATA SET) composed of at least one input screen, the controller 103 stores the aforementioned input data group In the memory 102. The controller 103, in addition to transmitting the calculation data in the memory 102 created by the function to the adjacent array computing device 100, also stores the calculation data received from the adjacent array computing device 100 in The memory 102, if necessary, is transferred to the array computing device 100 other than the input. Finally, the controller 103 sets 114 --- I ---------- III 1 1 II order ---- ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ^ _ B7____ 5. Description of the invention (// 1 ) The image data of the output image is output as the result data (RESULT DATA). The reason for installing the controller 103 on each of the array computing devices 100 is that the processor 101 can operate during the communication between the array computing devices 100. Therefore, the processor 101 can use communication to perform high-speed processing after calculation in the waiting time; even if the number of hardware of the array computing device 100 in the vicinity changes, there is no need to change; because the controller 103 processes the edge of the image, that is, The edge pixels in the image will be automatically processed with exceptions, so the program of the processor 101 does not need to do edge processing and becomes very simple. The processor 101 and the memory 102 can use general digital circuits. The details of the controller 103 The circuit diagram of sex is shown in Figure 48 As shown, the address buffer (ADDRESS BUFFER) 53 will receive the address (ADDRESS) from the processor 101 through the address bus (ADDRESS BUS) 51, and use the address decoder (ADDRESS DECODE) 54 to select each bit Address and other functional blocks. The data buffer (DATA BUFFER) 55 will receive the data (DATA) from the processor 101 through the data bus (DATA BUS) 52, and the internal data bus 56 and the address decoder 54 choose The resistors communicate exclusively. The communication direction is specified by READ. When the FLAG REGISTER 57 is specified by the resistor, the data will be stored in the FLAG REGISTER 57 and compiled with the FLAG DECODER 58 and transmitted as a plurality of signals (SIGNALS) to the connected array. Computing device 100. The plurality of signals will be received using the flag encoder (FLAG ENCODER) 59. After being parsed, the signals will be stored in the STATUS REGISTER 60 and regarded as the receiving (RECEIVE) returned to the array computing device of the transmission source 10 (). Receiving is based on the 115 paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- install --- (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again) t5J · -line- 498290 A7 ___B7_____ V. Description of the Invention (/ ^) • The flag encoder 59 of the transmission source of several signals received the signal and confirmed as a result that the transmission of the plurality of signals was completed. If the status register 60 is selected using an address, the content of the status register 60 will be transmitted to the processor 101 as data through the data bus 52. If the flag encoder 59 receives at least one front input response (FRONT INPUT SEND) corresponding to at least one input image (INPUT IM'AGE), it will read in the input data group (FRONding INPUT) formed by at least one input image DATA SE) The required storage capacity is prepared before the input data register (FRONT INPUT DATA REGISTER). 6 If you use the address to select the input data register 61, the content of the input resistor will be transmitted as data. To the processor 101. After the processor 101 finishes the calculation, it uses the address to select the result data register (RESULT DATA REGISTER) 62. The result data register 62 reads the image data of the output image as the result data (RESULT DATA). At the same time, the flag encoder 59 will transmit the result and send (RESULT SEND). Obtain the data required for calculation from the nearby array computing device 100 as the address selection output data register (OUTPUT DATA REGISTER) 63, and use the data to be sent to the nearby array computing device 100 as the calculation data ( CALCURATION DATA) read the output data address 63. It is then transmitted as computational data on all adjacent array computing devices 100. If a plurality of signals (SIGNALS) are received from the array computing device 100 above, the calculation data will be read into the UPPER INPUT DATA REGISTER 64. After that, if the data address 64 is input from the address selection, the content of the data input register 64 will be transmitted as calculation data. Array computing device 116 from below, left and right This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- installed --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ____Β7_____ 五、發明說明(//^) 100接收複數個訊號時都是一樣,下輸入資料暫存器65、 左輸入資料暫存器66、右輸入資料暫存器67會做同樣動 作。 各種緩衝器、各種電阻、位址解碼器54之各個區塊爲 一般用之電子電路。旗標解碼器58與旗標編碼器59具體 來說有像第49圖與第50圖所示那樣之輸出入訊號。種類 (TYPE)係用6位元表示被讀入輸出資料暫存器(OUTPUT DATA REGISTER)63之內容種類。此位元數雖是區別陣列 運算裝置100應送收訊之所有計算資料,卻是很充分之値 。計數— X(COUNT-X)及計數一 Y(COUNT-Y)係分別表示無4 位元之符號之整數,並顯示陣列運算裝置100之間之轉送 次數。陣列運算裝置100傳送計算資料時各個計算爲〇, 再次從左右之陣列運算裝置100傳送已被傳送過之計算資 料時,旗標編碼器59之計數-X上爲足夠1之値,再次從 上下之陣列運算裝置100傳送已被傳送過之計算資料時, 旗標編碼器59之計數-Y上爲足夠1之値。處理器1〇1在 旗標暫存器57之送達旗標(SENT FLAG)上指定要將輸出資 料暫存器63之內容傳送到上下左右中之哪個方向後,旗標 編碼器58若接收指定輸出資料暫存器63之位址解碼器54 之中央解碼(CENTRAL DECODING),旗標編碼器58會配合 送達旗標之指定方向輸出送達(SEND)。送達旗標係以4位 元表示,且當將陣列運算裝置100之計算資料傳送至四周 之陣列運算裝置100時,處理器101會設定爲1111;若從 右方之陣列運算裝置100將被傳送之計算資料轉送至上下 117 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- - -- 訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ____B7_498290 A7 ____ Β7 _____ 5. Description of the invention (// ^) 100 is the same when receiving multiple signals, the lower input data register 65, the left input data register 66, and the right input data register 67 will do the same. Various buffers, various resistors, and each block of the address decoder 54 are general-purpose electronic circuits. Specifically, the flag decoder 58 and the flag encoder 59 have output and input signals as shown in Figs. 49 and 50. Type (TYPE) indicates the type of content read into the OUTPUT DATA REGISTER 63 with 6 bits. Although this number of bits is all the calculation data that the array computing device 100 should send and receive, it is sufficient. Count — X (COUNT-X) and Count One Y (COUNT-Y) represent integers without 4-bit symbols, respectively, and display the number of transfers between the array computing device 100. When the array computing device 100 transmits the calculation data, each calculation is 0. When the calculation data that has been transmitted is transmitted from the left and right array computing devices 100 again, the count -X of the flag encoder 59 is a sufficient number of 1, and again from the top to the bottom. When the array computing device 100 transmits the calculation data that has already been transmitted, the count -Y of the flag encoder 59 is a sufficient number of one. After the processor 101 specifies on the delivery flag (SENT FLAG) of the flag register 57 to transmit the content of the output data register 63 to one of the up, down, left, and right directions, the flag encoder 58 receives the designation. The central decoder (CENTRAL DECODING) of the address decoder 54 of the output data register 63, and the flag encoder 58 will cooperate with the specified direction of the sent flag to output the delivery (SEND). The delivery flag is represented by 4 bits, and when the calculation data of the array computing device 100 is transmitted to the surrounding array computing device 100, the processor 101 will be set to 1111; if the array computing device 100 from the right is transmitted, The calculation data is transferred to the upper and lower 117 paper sizes applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------Order- ------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 ____B7_

五、發明說明(/〖P 左方時,處理器101會設定爲1110;從左方轉送至上下右 方時則設定爲1101;從下方轉送至上方時則設定爲1000; 從上方轉送至下方時則設定爲0100。因此,不僅轉送時可 不必重複有效率地轉送,轉送方向之決定規則也很明確, 故利用組合種類、計數-X及計數-Y,旗標編碼器59可判 斷要從哪個陣列運算裝置100傳送哪個種類之計算資料。 在結果資料暫存器62上之計算資料當作結果資料被讀入之 同時,旗標解碼器58會接收結果解碼(RESULT DECODING),並傳送結果送達(RESULT SEND)。 旗標編碼器59若無論四個方向中之哪個方向都接收送 達,則會接收接收方向之種類與計數-X、計數-Y,並更新 該部分之狀態暫存器60之內容。與該更新之同時會在收訊 方向上設定接收爲1後傳送。傳送源之陣列運算裝置100 之旗標編碼器59上接收會再成爲1之瞬間收訊,並更新狀 態暫存器60之接收狀況(RECEIVE STATUS)。因此在各個 陣列運算裝置100中,處理器101只要檢測狀態暫存器60 之接收狀況,就可判斷在哪個輸入資料位址上會儲存有效 之計算資料。因此例如在上輸入資料暫存器64上讀入計算 資料,處理器101雖然可利用指定位址從上輸入資料暫存 器64讀入資料,但是同時會從位址解碼器54傳送上解碼 (UPPER DECODING)到旗標編碼器59,且接收狀況中之上 部分會回到0,朝上方之接收會當作0被傳送。下左右方 之情況也是相同之動作。旗標編碼器59如果1個也要接收 輸入影像用之前輸入送達,則對應狀態暫存器60中之以接 118 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------^--------t---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 B7_ .... I — *·_··| 丨_丨丨丨 | 1 丨__ ΙΙΙΜΜ卿 '" 五、發明說明(丨4) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 收之前輸入送達之輸入影像用之則輸入送得狀況(FRONT INPUT SEND STATUS)會設爲1 °另外當處理器ιοί從輸人 影像用之前輸入資料暫存器61讀入資料時,位址解碼器 54會傳送前解碼(FRONT DECODING)到旗檩編碼器59,對 應已接收之前輸入送達之前輸入狀況設爲0。處理器101 可利甩讀入狀態暫存器60之內容,判斷最新之輸入影像是 否被儲存於前輸入資料暫存器61。V. Description of the invention (/ 〖P When the left side, the processor 101 will be set to 1110; when transferring from the left to the top and bottom right, it will be set to 1101; when transferring from the bottom to the top, it will be set to 1000; from the top to the bottom The time is set to 0100. Therefore, it is not only unnecessary to repeat the efficient transfer when transferring, but also the rules for determining the transfer direction are clear. Therefore, using the combination type, count-X and count-Y, the flag encoder 59 can determine whether to start from Which array computing device 100 transmits which kind of calculation data. While the calculation data on the result data register 62 is read as the result data, the flag decoder 58 receives the result decoding (RESULT DECODING) and transmits the result Delivery (RESULT SEND) If the flag encoder 59 receives delivery in any of the four directions, it will receive the type and count -X, count -Y of the receiving direction, and update the status register 60 of that part. At the same time as the update, it will be set to 1 in the receiving direction and sent after receiving. The receiving from the flag encoder 59 of the array computing device 100 of the transmission source will become 1 again, and it will be updated. RECEIVE STATUS of the state register 60. Therefore, in each array computing device 100, as long as the processor 101 detects the reception state of the state register 60, it can determine which input data address will store valid data Calculation data. For example, the calculation data is read in the input data register 64. Although the processor 101 can read the data from the input data register 64 using the specified address, it will be transmitted from the address decoder 54 at the same time. UPPER DECODING to the flag encoder 59, and the upper part of the reception status will return to 0, and the upward reception will be transmitted as 0. The same is true for the lower left and right cases. The flag encoder 59 If one is also required to receive the input image, it will be delivered before the corresponding input, then the corresponding state register 60 will receive 118. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----- -------- ^ -------- t --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 B7_ .... I — * · _ ·· | 丨 _ 丨 丨 丨 | 1 丨 __ ΙΙΙΜΜ 卿 '" V. Invention Description (丨 4) ------------ --Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) If you input the input image before receiving it, the input status (FRONT INPUT SEND STATUS) will be set to 1 °. When the input image is read by the previous input data register 61, the address decoder 54 sends a FRONT DECODING to the flag encoder 59, and the input status is set to 0 corresponding to the input before the input is received. The processor 101 can judge the content of the read-in status register 60 to determine whether the latest input image is stored in the previous input data register 61 or not.

處理器101透過控制器103在四周之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 上傳送計算資料時之演算法如第51圖所示。第51圖,表 示利用處理器101與程式控制;利用旗標解碼器58及旗標 編碼器59與硬體邏輯之混合處理。針對第51圖,步驟71 中,處理器101會讀入狀態暫存器60之內容。步驟72中 ,判斷已讀入之內容中接收狀況是否全部爲〇。如果爲N〇 則結束處理。如果爲YES就進行步驟73。步驟73中,處 理器101會決定傳送至鄰接之陣列運算裝置100之資料之 種類與計算與傳送方向,並將該內容寫入旗標暫存器57。 步驟74中,處理器101會將傳送至鄰接之陣列運算裝置 100資料寫入輸出資料暫存器63。步驟75中,會將輸出資 料暫存器63之內容當作計算資料,傳送至鄰接之陣列運算 裝置100。步驟76中,將僅送達至旗標暫存器57之送達旗 標所指定之方向設爲1後傳送。因此處理器101之1次傳 送演算法就結束。處理器101,每次在應傳送之資料於記 憶體102內被更新時就開始此傳送演算法。 控制器103從上方之陣列運算裝置100接收計算資料 119 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' "' 498290 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(/^) 時之演算法表不於第52圖。第52圖,係利用旗標解碼器 58及旗標編碼器59與硬體邏輯表示處理。針對第52圖, 步驟81中,旗標編碼器59會輸入送達。步驟82中,由旗 標編碼器59判斷送達是否爲1。如果爲NO則結束處理。 如果爲YES就進行步驟83。步驟83中,上輸入資料暫存 器64會從上方讀入被傳送之計算資料。步、驟84中,旗標 編碼器59會在狀態暫存器60.中之上方用接收之狀況設爲丄 之同時,接收會設爲1後傳送至上方之陣列運算裝置1〇〇 。下左右方時也相同。因此控制器103之1次接收演算法 就結束。控制器103會監視平常從上下左右之陣列運算裝 置100之送達,每次在接收該送達時就開始此接收演算法 〇 處理器101從上輸入資料暫存器64接收資料時之演算 法如第53圖所示。第53圖,係表示利用處理器1〇1與程 式控制;利用旗標解碼器58及旗標編碼器59與硬體邏輯 之混合處理。針對第53圖,步驟91中,處理器101會讀 入狀態暫存器60之內容。步驟92中,判斷已讀入之內容 中上方用之接收狀況是否爲1。如果爲NO則結束處理。如 果爲YES就進行步驟93。步驟93中,處理器101會從上 輸入資料暫存器64讀入資料。步驟94中,旗標編碼器59 會在狀態暫存器60中之上方用之接收狀況設爲0之同時, 接收會設爲0後傳送至上方之陣列運算裝置100。下左右 方時也相同。因此處理器101之1次接收演算法就結束。 處理器101會以一定間隔監視狀態暫存器60之內容,每次 120 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The algorithm when the processor 101 transmits the calculation data on the surrounding array computing device 100 through the controller 103 is shown in FIG. 51. Fig. 51 shows the use of the processor 101 and program control; the mixed processing of the flag decoder 58 and the flag encoder 59 and hardware logic. For FIG. 51, in step 71, the processor 101 reads the contents of the state register 60. In step 72, it is determined whether the reception status in the read content is all 0. If it is No, the processing ends. If YES, go to step 73. In step 73, the processor 101 determines the type, calculation and transmission direction of the data transmitted to the adjacent array computing device 100, and writes the content into the flag register 57. In step 74, the processor 101 writes the data transmitted to the adjacent array computing device 100 into the output data register 63. In step 75, the content of the output data register 63 is regarded as calculation data and transmitted to the adjacent array computing device 100. In step 76, only the direction designated by the delivery flag delivered to the flag register 57 is set to 1 and then transmitted. Therefore, the one-time transmission algorithm of the processor 101 ends. The processor 101 starts the transmission algorithm each time the data to be transmitted is updated in the memory 102. The controller 103 receives the calculation data from the array computing device 100 above. 119 The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '"' 498290 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (/ ^) The algorithm is shown in Figure 52. Fig. 52 shows a flag decoder 58 and a flag encoder 59 and hardware logic representation processing. For FIG. 52, in step 81, the flag encoder 59 will input the delivery. In step 82, the flag encoder 59 determines whether the delivery is 1. If NO, the process ends. If YES, go to step 83. In step 83, the input data register 64 will read in the transmitted calculation data from above. In step 84, the flag encoder 59 sets the reception status at the top of the state register 60. At the same time, the reception will be set to 1 and then transmitted to the array computing device 100 above. The same applies to the left and right sides. Therefore, the controller 103 receives the algorithm once. The controller 103 monitors the usual delivery from the array computing device 100 on the top, bottom, left, and right, and starts the receiving algorithm each time the delivery is received. Figure 53 shows. Figure 53 shows the use of processor 101 and program control; the use of flag decoder 58 and flag encoder 59 and mixed processing of hardware logic. Referring to Fig. 53, in step 91, the processor 101 reads the contents of the state register 60. In step 92, it is determined whether the reception status used in the upper part of the read content is 1. If NO, the process ends. If YES, go to step 93. In step 93, the processor 101 reads data from the input data register 64. In step 94, the flag encoder 59 sets the reception status used in the upper part of the status register 60 to 0, and sends the reception to the array computing device 100 after receiving the set status. The same applies to the lower left and right. Therefore, the processor 101 receives the algorithm once. The processor 101 monitors the contents of the status register 60 at regular intervals. Each time the paper size is 120, the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page. )

498290 A7 ___E7____ 五、發明說明(/#) 再上下左右任一方之接收狀況爲1時,該接收演算法就會 開始。另外,即使處理器101不以一定間隔監視狀態暫存 器60之內容,也可利用插入處理裝設。 此陣列運算裝置100,主要雖以從至少1個輸入影像 作成1個輸出影像爲前提記述,但是配合用途有必要變更 電路使之可輸出計算途中之計算資料。此睁,只有應輸出 之計算資料數增加旗標解碼器58之結果送達,只要變更程 式讓僅對應被讀入結果資料暫存器62之計算資料之結果送 達設爲1即可。 到此係說明了有關陣列運算裝置100。不過像移動源 重複資訊影像184那樣要轉送帶域數很多之影像時,陣列 運算裝置100有可能會有只具備1個控制器103,與轉送效 率降低之情況。因此最後,係說明具備複數個控制器103 之陣列運算裝置100。 如第54圖所示,申請專利範圍第9項之陣列運算裝置 10〇可具備複數個控制器103。第54圖之情況,係陣列運 算裝置100具備配置於對角線上之5個控制器103,各個控 制器103連接於位址匯流排51及資料匯流排52。處理器 101爲了可辨識5個控制器1〇3,在各個控制器103之位址 解碼器54上分配不同之位址。各個控制器1〇3因具備前輸 入資料暫存器61及結果資料暫存器62,故全部之控制器 103可獨立輸入前輸入資料群,及輸出結果資料。還有各 個控制器103 ’因與鄰接之陣列運算裝置1〇〇之5個控制器 103中不同之1個連接,陣列運算裝置1〇〇可將通訊區域擴 121 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·- i線- 498290 A7 ________Β7__ 五、發明說明(/^) •大到最大5倍。因此,即使是像移動源重複資訊影像184 那樣要轉送區域輸很多之影像時,若增加控制器103之數 量就不會降低轉送效率。 另外陣列運算裝置100具備複數個控制器103時,處 理器101必須根據第51圖及第53圖中所示之演算法,監 視所有控制器103之狀態暫存器60中之狀況。監視調度主 要係用圓形巡邏方式。 圓形巡邏方式,控制器103理論上是環狀平行,處理 器101會沿著環狀依順序對控制器103做存取。處理器101 對於1個控制器103執行如第53圖表示之演算法。若有應 傳送之資料,處理器101會對控制器.103執行如第51圖表 示之演算法。之後處理器101會移動到下個順序之控制器 103。因此全部的控制器1〇3均被對等地處理。與陣列運算 裝置100短時間內轉送之資料量比起來,控制器1〇3之通 訊區域狹窄時,此方法是有效之。 除此之外,控制器103上會附上優先度之不同號碼, 也可用從處理器101每次最高之優先度依序存取控制器103 之優先度方式。與陣列運算裝置100在短時間內轉送之資 料量相比,當控制器103之通訊區域較廣時,此方法爲有 效。 一般來說因陣列運算裝置100僅備有少數之控制器 103,故當視覺裝置2執行局部平行影像處理時,以優先度 方式比較係圓形巡邏方式較爲有利。不過視覺裝置2爲了 高速執行包含必須轉送大量資料之函數之局部平行影像處 122 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___E7____ 5. Description of the Invention (/ #) When the receiving status of one of the up, down, left, and right sides is 1, the receiving algorithm will start. In addition, even if the processor 101 does not monitor the contents of the state register 60 at regular intervals, it may be installed by an insert processing. This array computing device 100 is mainly described on the premise that one output image is created from at least one input image, but it is necessary to change the circuit to output the calculation data during the calculation according to the application. In this case, only the result of the flag decoder 58 that has the number of calculated data to be output is delivered, as long as the procedure is changed so that the result delivery of only the calculated data corresponding to the read result data register 62 is set to 1. The array computing device 100 has been described so far. However, when the image with a large number of bands is to be transferred like the moving source repeat information image 184, the array computing device 100 may have only one controller 103, and the transfer efficiency may decrease. Therefore, finally, the array computing device 100 having a plurality of controllers 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, the array computing device 100 in the ninth scope of the patent application may be provided with a plurality of controllers 103. In the case of FIG. 54, the array computing device 100 includes five controllers 103 arranged on a diagonal line, and each controller 103 is connected to an address bus 51 and a data bus 52. In order to identify the five controllers 103, the processor 101 assigns different addresses to the address decoder 54 of each controller 103. Each controller 103 is provided with a front input data register 61 and a result data register 62, so all the controllers 103 can independently input the front input data group and output the result data. In addition, each controller 103 ′ is connected to one of the five controllers 103 of the adjacent array computing device 100, and the array computing device 100 can expand the communication area 121. The paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ·-i-line-498290 A7 ________ Β7__ 5. Description of the invention (/ ^) • It is 5 times as large. Therefore, even when a large number of images are to be transferred in the transfer area like the moving source repeat information image 184, increasing the number of controllers 103 will not reduce the transfer efficiency. In addition, when the array computing device 100 includes a plurality of controllers 103, the processor 101 must monitor the conditions in the state registers 60 of all the controllers 103 according to the algorithms shown in Figs. 51 and 53. Monitoring and dispatching are mainly carried out in circular patrols. In the circular patrol mode, the controller 103 is theoretically ring-shaped and parallel, and the processor 101 will access the controller 103 in order along the ring. The processor 101 executes an algorithm shown in FIG. 53 for one controller 103. If there is any data to be transmitted, the processor 101 executes the algorithm shown in Fig. 51 on the controller .103. The processor 101 then moves to the controller 103 in the next sequence. Therefore all controllers 103 are processed peer-to-peer. Compared with the amount of data transferred by the array computing device 100 in a short time, this method is effective when the communication area of the controller 103 is narrow. In addition, different numbers of priorities are attached to the controller 103, and the priority of the controller 103 can be sequentially accessed from the highest priority of the processor 101 each time. Compared with the amount of data transferred by the array computing device 100 in a short time, this method is effective when the communication area of the controller 103 is wide. Generally, since the array computing device 100 has only a few controllers 103, when the visual device 2 performs local parallel image processing, it is more advantageous to use a circular patrol method in a priority manner. However, for high-speed execution of Vision Device 2 for locally parallel images containing functions that must transfer a large amount of data, 122 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

498290 A7 _____B7_ 五、發明說明 •理,當陣列運算裝置1〇〇具備充分數量之控制器103時, 剩下之函數若只參照4附近或8附近182之帶域像素値, 圓形巡邏方式之通訊效率就會下降。此時則優先度方式較 爲有利。當然全部的控制器103及處理器101若都裝設插 入功能”處理器101則不需要定期地監視每個控制器103 之狀態暫存器60中之狀況。 . 另外,在申請專利範圍第9項中,將控制器1〇3排列 於LSI之安裝平面時,主要問題係LSI之安裝面積會變大 、控制器103之間之配線會變複雜且長,還有不容易增加 控制器103之數量等3個問題。不過若使用三維LSI技術 ,LSI設計者可很容易地解決這些問題。以下係說明有關 使用三維LSI技術之陣列運算裝置100。 如第55圖所示,申請專利範圍第10項之控制器1〇3 係使用三維LSI技術堆積於陣列運算裝置100內。第55圖 之情況,係有5個控制器103堆積於處理器101及記憶體 102上,各個控制器103會利用被垂直配線之位址匯流排 51及資料匯流排52,與處理器101及記億體102連接。從 第55圖可確定之係,即使增加控制器1〇3之數量,各層之 安裝面積不必擴大,而控制器103只要與位於同一層之鄰 接控制器103連接即可。再者,LSI設計者,若增加控制器 103只要增加安裝控制器1〇3層之需要數即可,而且只要適 當地設計位址匯流排51,LSI設計者對下位層完全不必加 工。各層之控制器103因全部以位址解碼器54以外之電路 所構成,故新堆積層之控制器103之設計變得非常簡單。 123 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: -線· 498290 A7 _____B7______ 五、發明說明《4) 還有,如第54圖及第55圖所示,陣列運算裝置ι〇〇 因具有複數個控制器103,故陣列運算裝置100,不僅可擴 大與陣列運算裝置100之間之通訊區域,還可辨識要從哪 個控制器103接收哪個計算資料。因此以下’係說明有關 使用複數個控制器103,將連續之複數個陣列運算裝置1〇〇 歸納爲1個群組’而且該群組中之陣列運算裝置100共用 處理器101及記憶體102之資料處理裝置110。 首先,如第56圖所示,排列於二維格子狀上之陣列運 算裝置100會被整理爲適當大小之矩形群組。該群組稱爲 虛擬陣列運算裝置105。第56圖之情況,虛擬陣列運算裝 置105係將3x3之陣列運算裝置100整理爲1個群組者。 接著如第47圖、第54圖及第55圖所示,虛擬陣列運算裝 置105具備處理器101、記億體102、及陣列運算裝置1〇〇 之縱與橫之個數最大値以上之控制器103。第56圖之情況 ,虛擬陣列運算裝置105需要3個以上之控制器103。還有 這些控制器103會被編上權宜性之不同號碼。而如第57圖 所示,在陣列運算裝置100之通訊途徑上也有與控制器103 同樣相異之號碼。不過,相對號碼要設爲一樣。最後,讓 處理器101可執行9個陣列運算裝置100之程式會被儲存 於記憶體102上。不過,陣列運算裝置100若與鄰接之虛 擬陣列運算裝置105之陣列運算裝置100通訊,一定要透 過與通訊途徑上所編之號碼一致之控制器103安裝程式。 因此,虛擬陣列運算裝置105,可辨識計算資料是從哪個 陣列運算裝置100被傳送往哪個陣列運算裝置100。 124 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 _______B7___ 五、發明說明(1让) I I------I----. — I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 而虛擬陣列運算裝置105只增加控制器103數量是不 能完全裝設複數個陣列運算裝置100之。這是因,虛擬陣 列運算裝置105,必須從其他虛擬陣列運算裝置105輸入前 輸入資料群、或必須將結果資料輸出至其他虛擬陣列運算 裝置105。如第54圖所示控制器103被安裝於二維平面上 時,如果控制器103數很充分,則與計算資料一樣在控制 器103上編號,利用程式解決這個問題。不過第57圖之情 況也是,控制器103需要9個。因此當包含於虛擬陣列運 算裝置105之陣列運算裝置100之數量增加時,這個方法 就會非常沒有效率。何況如第55圖那樣控制器103被累積 時,就非常難確保前輸入資料群及結果資料用之通訊途徑 。因此以下,係說明有關利用僅變更控制器103之前輸入 資料暫存器61,以解決此問題之方法。 —線· 首先,考慮控制器103從別之控制器103當作前輸入 資料群之1個前輸入資料,再將結果資料當作前輸入送達 輸入結果送達之情形。此時如第58圖所示,前輸入資料暫 存器61,具備由與虛擬陣列運算裝置105中之陣列運算裝 置100數相等之數量電阻所構成之前輸入移位暫存器68、 與前輸入計數器69。前輸入計數器69,係爲將電阻之數量 當作起始値之下降計算,前輸入計數器69之計數値爲〇時 ,前輸入計數器69會輸出前輸入送達。然後若輸入結果資 料,前輸入計數器69會被起始化爲起始値。第58圖中’ 前輸入移位暫存器68係由9個電阻構成,若在前輸入移位 暫存器68輸入9個結果資料,則前輸入送達會被輸出。接 125 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 498290 A7 . ..B7______—- _ 五、發明說明(/&gt;1) .著,前輸入移位暫存器68之各個電阻與前輸入計數器69 會當作觸發器訊號輸入結果送達。再者,位址解碼器54, 會解碼位址,選擇前輸入移位暫存器68之電阻中之1個。 因此,處理器101若指定前輸入移位暫存器68中適當之電 阻位址,則每個電阻可在資料匯流排52上輸出結果資料。 另外第58圖中,位址解碼器54之其他訊號線會被省略。 而虛擬陣列運算裝置105若依一定之順序輸出9個陣列運 算裝置100之結果資料,則這些結果資料會依輸出順序儲 存前輸入移位暫存器68之暫存器。因此前輸入計數器69 輸出之前輸入送達被儲存於資料電阻60之時點’右處理器 101對各電阻做存取,則處理器101可取得特定陣列運算裝 置100之結果資料。 到目前爲止係說明了視覺裝置2。雖然限制數位影像 111之影像大小、忍受某程度之計算時間,即使是市面上 販賣之單芯片電腦也可實現視覺裝置2,不過要加大影像 大小或達成實際時間性就必須安裝專用之大型積體電路。 特別是將視覺裝置2中之幾個裝置安裝於大型積體電路上 ,視覺裝置2可做到省空間、低消耗電力及實際時間性° 以下係說明使用視覺裝置2之處理器。 申請專利範圍第7項之發明中所使用之處理器,係將 如第59圖所示之功能柱201如第60圖所示排列於二維格 子狀後配線。另外在第59圖中,係將陣列運算裝置100略 記爲AOU;第60圖中,係將功能柱201略記爲FC。而爲 了從處理器容易輸出重複資訊131及匹配結果,對第14圖 126 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _____B7_ V. Description of the invention • When the array computing device 100 has a sufficient number of controllers 103, the remaining functions refer only to 182 band pixels near 4 or 8 near the circle patrol mode. Communication efficiency will decrease. In this case, the priority method is more advantageous. Of course, if all the controllers 103 and processors 101 are equipped with a plug-in function, the processor 101 does not need to regularly monitor the status of the state register 60 of each controller 103. In addition, in the 9th In the item, when the controller 103 is arranged on the mounting plane of the LSI, the main problems are that the mounting area of the LSI will become larger, the wiring between the controllers 103 will become complicated and long, and it is not easy to increase the controller 103. There are three problems such as the number. However, if three-dimensional LSI technology is used, LSI designers can easily solve these problems. The following is an explanation of the array computing device 100 using three-dimensional LSI technology. As shown in FIG. 55, the scope of patent application is tenth. The controller 103 of the item is stacked in the array computing device 100 using three-dimensional LSI technology. In the case of FIG. 55, five controllers 103 are stacked on the processor 101 and the memory 102, and each controller 103 uses The address bus 51 and the data bus 52 that are vertically wired are connected to the processor 101 and the memory module 102. As can be determined from Figure 55, even if the number of controllers 103 is increased, the installation area of each layer does not have to be Expand Large, and the controller 103 only needs to be connected to the adjacent controller 103 on the same layer. Furthermore, LSI designers, if the controller 103 is added, it only needs to increase the number of controllers to install the 103 layer, and as long as it is appropriate Designing the address bus 51 on the ground, the LSI designer does not need to process the lower layers at all. The controller 103 of each layer is composed of circuits other than the address decoder 54, so the design of the controller 103 of the newly stacked layer becomes very Simple. 123 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order:-line · 498290 A7 _____B7______ 5. Description of the invention << 4) As shown in Figs. 54 and 55, since the array computing device ιOO has a plurality of controllers 103, the array computing device 100 can not only expand the communication area with the array computing device 100. It is also possible to identify which controller 103 receives which calculation data. Therefore, the following description is about the use of a plurality of controllers 103 to group a plurality of consecutive array computing devices 100 into one group. And the array computing device 100 in the group shares the processor 101 and the data processing device 110 of the memory 102. First, as shown in FIG. 56, the array computing device 100 arranged on a two-dimensional grid will be organized as appropriate The size of the rectangular group. This group is called the virtual array computing device 105. In the case of Figure 56, the virtual array computing device 105 is a 3x3 array computing device 100 organized into a group. Then as shown in Figure 47, As shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the virtual array computing device 105 includes a processor 101, a memory module 102, and a controller 103 having the largest number of vertical and horizontal array processing devices 100 or more. In the case of FIG. 56, the virtual array computing device 105 requires more than three controllers 103. Also, these controllers 103 are assigned different numbers for expediency. As shown in FIG. 57, the communication path of the array computing device 100 also has a number different from that of the controller 103. However, the relative numbers must be the same. Finally, a program that allows the processor 101 to execute the nine array computing devices 100 is stored in the memory 102. However, if the array computing device 100 communicates with the array computing device 100 of the adjacent virtual array computing device 105, it is necessary to install the program through the controller 103 which is consistent with the number programmed on the communication channel. Therefore, the virtual array computing device 105 can identify from which array computing device 100 the computing data is transferred to which array computing device 100. 124 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) 498290 A7 _______B7___ 5. Description of the invention (1) I I ------ I ----. — I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) and 105 virtual array computing devices Increasing the number of controllers 103 cannot completely install a plurality of array computing devices 100. This is because the virtual array computing device 105 must input data groups before inputting from other virtual array computing devices 105, or must output the result data to other virtual array computing devices 105. When the controller 103 is installed on a two-dimensional plane as shown in FIG. 54, if the number of the controllers 103 is sufficient, the controller 103 is numbered in the same manner as the calculation data, and the problem is solved by a program. However, in the case of FIG. 57, the controller 103 needs nine. Therefore, when the number of array computing devices 100 included in the virtual array computing device 105 increases, this method becomes very inefficient. Moreover, when the controller 103 is accumulated as shown in FIG. 55, it is very difficult to ensure the communication channel for the previously input data group and the result data. Therefore, the following is a description of a method for solving this problem by using only the input data register 61 before changing the controller 103. —Line · First, consider the case where the controller 103 treats one previous input data group as the previous input data group from another controller 103, and then sends the result data as the previous input. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58, the front input data register 61 includes a front input shift register 68 composed of a number of resistors equal to the number of the array computing device 100 in the virtual array computing device 105, and a front input shift register 68. Counter 69. The front input counter 69 is calculated by taking the number of resistors as the drop of the initial value. When the count of the front input counter 69 is 0, the front input counter 69 will output the front input. Then, if the result data is input, the front input counter 69 is initialized to the initial value. In Fig. 58 ', the front input shift register 68 is composed of 9 resistors. If 9 result data is input in the front input shift register 68, the front input delivery will be output. 125 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 498290 A7... B7 ______ —- _ 5. Description of the invention (/ &gt; 1). Each resistor of 68 and the front input counter 69 will be sent as the trigger signal input result. In addition, the address decoder 54 decodes the address, and selects one of the resistors of the input shift register 68 before the selection. Therefore, if the processor 101 specifies an appropriate resistor address in the front input shift register 68, each resistor can output the result data on the data bus 52. In addition, other signal lines of the address decoder 54 are omitted in FIG. 58. And if the virtual array computing device 105 outputs the result data of the nine array computing devices 100 in a certain order, these result data will be stored in the register of the input shift register 68 before the output order. Therefore, when the front input counter 69 outputs the previous input and reaches the point stored in the data resistor 60, the right processor 101 accesses each resistor, and the processor 101 can obtain the result data of the specific array operation device 100. The vision device 2 has been described so far. Although the image size of digital image 111 is limited, and a certain degree of calculation time is tolerated, even a single-chip computer on the market can implement visual devices2, but to increase the image size or achieve actual timeliness, a dedicated large-scale product must be installed. Body circuit. In particular, several devices of the visual device 2 are installed on a large integrated circuit. The visual device 2 can achieve space saving, low power consumption, and practical timelines. The following describes the processor using the visual device 2. The processor used in the invention claimed in item 7 of the scope of the patent application is to arrange the functional pillars 201 as shown in FIG. 59 and arrange them in a two-dimensional grid as shown in FIG. 60. In addition, in Fig. 59, the array computing device 100 is abbreviated as AOU; in Fig. 60, the functional column 201 is abbreviated as FC. In order to easily output the repeated information 131 and the matching result from the processor, the paper size of Figure 14 is the same as the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page. )

498290 A7 五、發明說明(/&gt;f) 追加3個影像保持裝置39。第59圖中複數個陣列運算裝置 100雖達到各個裝置,但如第61圖所示即使是1個陣列運 算裝置100也可利用程式實現複數個裝置。當然如第62圖 所示即使是1個虛擬陣列運算裝置也可利用程式實現 複數個陣列運算裝置1〇〇。 在第59圖、第61圖及第62圖中,功能柱201上除了 陣列運算裝置100及虛擬陣列運算裝置1〇5之外、還放入 光電二極體及CCD那樣之攝影元件207、及A/D轉換電路 204。不過在功能柱201,也可用個別之振盪電路,取代從 功能柱201外部之時鐘訊號之輸入。還有因光電二極體與 CMOS相同可安裝在LSI上,故處理器之設計及安裝非常 單純。 如第60圖所示,第59圖之各個陣列運算裝置100, 會位於4附近,並透過訊號線與執行相同裝置之陣列運算 裝置100通訊。因此,每個陣列運算裝置100可配合處理 構成資料處理裝置110。處理器利用三維大型積體電路(三 維VLSI)技術安裝時,如第63圖所示之功能柱201中之所 有陣列運算裝置100若利用三維VLSI像垂直排列那樣安裝 ,則功能柱201間之訊號線連在陣列運算裝置1〇〇間都不 會交叉。因此處理器之設計及安裝會變得非常容易。 到目前爲止係說明了處理器。不過,若想利用LSI製 造實用性之規模及處理速度之處理器,就不能避開時鐘訊 號及恢復訊號等之同步問題。因此下述,就舉本發明之互 鎖裝置之實施形態,參照畫面說明之。 127 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 V. Description of the invention (/ &f; f) Added three image holding devices 39. Although the plurality of array computing devices 100 in Fig. 59 reach each device, as shown in Fig. 61, even one array computing device 100 can realize a plurality of devices using a program. Of course, as shown in Fig. 62, even a single virtual array computing device can use a program to realize a plurality of array computing devices 100. In FIGS. 59, 61, and 62, in addition to the array computing device 100 and the virtual array computing device 105, a photographic element 207 such as a photodiode and a CCD is placed on the functional pillar 201, and A / D conversion circuit 204. However, in the function column 201, an individual oscillation circuit can also be used instead of the clock signal input from the outside of the function column 201. In addition, since the photodiode can be mounted on an LSI in the same way as CMOS, the design and installation of the processor is very simple. As shown in FIG. 60, each array computing device 100 in FIG. 59 is located near 4 and communicates with the array computing device 100 executing the same device through a signal line. Therefore, each array computing device 100 can cooperate to form a data processing device 110. When the processor is installed using a three-dimensional large-scale integrated circuit (three-dimensional VLSI) technology, as shown in FIG. 63, all the array computing devices 100 in the function column 201 are installed in a vertical arrangement using the three-dimensional VLSI, and the signals between the function columns 201 The wires will not cross between the array computing device 100. Therefore, the design and installation of the processor will become very easy. The processor has been described so far. However, if you want to use a LSI to make a practical scale and processing speed of the processor, you cannot avoid synchronization issues such as clock signals and recovery signals. Therefore, the embodiment of the interlocking device of the present invention will be described below with reference to the screen. 127 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

I - — — III — — — — — — — —— - - - H II-— — III — — — — — — — — ——---H I

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —J 498290 A7 ____ B7__ 五、發明說明 首先,如第64圖所示,互鎖式計數器416係由計數器 部分及連動部分構成。而第64圖中,互鎖式計數器416係 由4個互鎖式計數器416輸入互鎖訊號BLK1’ 、:BLK2’ 、BLK3,、BLK4,。 計數器部分中,同步式計數器411、結束値判別用 NOT閘412及計算用NOT閘415爲環狀連接。而第64圖 雖表示由與時鐘訊號(CLK)同步之3個正反器電路所構成之 2進位且3位數之同步式計數器411,但因使用N個正反器 電路,故要變更爲2進位N位數之同步式計數器411就很 容易。而在同步式計數器411上因將NOR閘之輸入從正反 器電路之Q’端子變更爲Q端子,故也可把同步式計數器 411變更爲向下計數器。 同步式計數器411邊和時鐘訊號同步邊輸出計數値。 計數値若到達結束値,即,同步式計數器411若輸出脈動 進位訊號(RCO),則結束値判斷用NOT閘412就輸出互鎖 訊號BLK0’ 。計算用NOR閘415在互鎖訊號BLK0’被 輸入之前將輸出有效(enable)訊號(G’)。因此,同步式計 數器411,係在計數値到達結束値之前將一直計數,並當 計數値一到達結束値就會停止計數。 連動部分,會根據從外部被輸入之互鎖訊號BLK1’ 、 BLK2’ 、BLK3’及BLK4’ ,連動用NOR閘414及互鎖用 鎖定電路413會控制計算用NOR閘415。因此連動部分, 可將互鎖訊號BLK0’之相位與週期配合互鎖訊號BLK1’ 、BLK2’ 、BLK3’及BLK4’之相位及週期。互鎖式計數 128 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) —J 498290 A7 ____ B7__ 5. Description of the invention First, as shown in Figure 64, the interlocking counter 416 is composed of a counter part and a linkage part. Make up. In Fig. 64, the interlocking counters 416 are inputted with the interlocking signals BLK1 ', BLK2', BLK3, and BLK4 by the four interlocking counters 416. In the counter section, the synchronous counter 411, the NOT gate 412 for determining the end and the NOT gate 415 for calculation are connected in a loop. Figure 64 shows a binary and three-digit synchronous counter 411 composed of three flip-flop circuits synchronized with the clock signal (CLK). However, since N flip-flop circuits are used, it must be changed to A binary N-bit synchronous counter 411 is easy. In the synchronous counter 411, since the input of the NOR gate is changed from the Q 'terminal of the flip-flop circuit to the Q terminal, the synchronous counter 411 can also be changed to a down counter. The synchronous counter 411 outputs counts while synchronizing with the clock signal. If the count reaches the end, that is, if the synchronous counter 411 outputs a pulsating carry signal (RCO), it will end. The judgment NOT gate 412 outputs an interlock signal BLK0 '. The calculation NOR gate 415 outputs an enable signal (G ') before the interlock signal BLK0' is input. Therefore, the synchronous counter 411 counts until the count reaches the end, and stops counting when the count reaches the end. According to the interlocking signals BLK1 ', BLK2', BLK3 ', and BLK4' which are input from the outside, the interlocking NOR gate 414 and the interlocking lock circuit 413 control the calculation NOR gate 415. Therefore, the interlocking part can match the phase and period of the interlock signal BLK0 'with the phase and period of the interlock signals BLK1', BLK2 ', BLK3', and BLK4 '. Interlocking counting 128 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(/4) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 器416會與時鐘訊號同步後動作,但是時鐘訊號本身不一 定會同時提供全部的互鎖式計數器416。因此互鎖式計數 器416在接收時鐘訊號前,互鎖訊號BLK1’ 、BLK2’ 、 BLK3’及BLK4’之任何一個會成爲High位準(H位準), 結果有效訊號有可能會變成Η位準。故利用互鎖用鎖定電 路413,連動部分可在計算部份開始計算之前使有效訊號 保持爲Low位準(L位準)。而在第64圖雖表示互鎖式計數 器416係從4個互鎖式計數器416輸入互鎖訊號之狀況, 但是只要配合被連接之互鎖式計數器416數變更連動用 NOR閘414之輸入數、或拉下(pull-down)在輸入連動用 NOR閘414時所不需要之輸入即可。 在第64圖中表示之同步式計數器411,計數値之起始 値固定爲0、結束値固定爲7。不過也有會依LSI之規格變 更計數値之起始値及結束値之情況。因此互鎖式計數器 416,使用像市面上販賣之同步式計算411那樣之同步式淸 除裝置及具有问步式載入裝置之同步式計數器411,可設 定任一起始値及結束値。此時,結束値之判斷會利用在結 束値判斷用NOT閘412前加上NOT閘實現之。當然,結 束値判斷用NOT閘412與NOT閘之組合會根據NAND閘 被置換。 到目前爲止係說明了互鎖式計數器416單體之電路機 構。以下用時序圖(timing chart)說明複數個互鎖式計數器 416被連接時,互鎖式計數器416會如何彼此連動。 首先如第65圖所示,考慮3個互鎖式計數器416被連 129 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 ----------B7___ 五、發明說明(/&gt;7) ’接之情況。而在第65圖中,將互鎖式計數器416略記爲 ICU。每個互鎖式計數器416之互鎖訊號BLK0,會被輸入 至剩餘之互鎖式計數器416之連動用NOR閘414。因此連 動用NOR閘414若爲2輸入n〇r閘即可。當這些3個互 鎖式計數器416穩定後動作時,任何1個互鎖式計數器416 之時序圖會表示於第66圖。而因全部的互鎖式計數器416 均爲對稱式’故剩餘之互鎖式計數器416之時序圖也相同 〇 從第66圖可明確地係,當全部的互鎖式計數器416之 計數値均爲一致時,計算用之NOR閘415之輸出會瞬間成 爲Η位準,但是因馬上就會回到L位準,因此計算用之 NOR閘415可連續計算。因此全部的互鎖式計數器416可 連續輸出相同之計數値。 如第67圖所示,互鎖訊號BLK1’之波形因某種理由 變短時,互鎖式計數器416會無關互鎖訊號BLK1’而動作 。因此互鎖訊號BLK1’對於計數値沒有影響。另外作成互 鎖訊號BLK1’之互鎖式計數器416會配合互鎖訊號BLK0 ’及BLK2’之相位,運作互鎖訊號BLK1’ 。 如第68圖所示,,互鎖訊號BLK2’之波形因某種理 由變長時,互鎖式計數器416會配合互鎖訊號BLK2’之相 位動作互鎖訊號BLK0’之相位。因此在互鎖訊號BLK2’ 成爲L位準之前,互鎖式計數器416會當作計數値持續輸 出結束値。 如第69圖所示,互鎖訊號BLK1’之波形因某種理由 130 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (/ 4) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) The device 416 will synchronize with the clock signal, but the clock signal itself may not provide all the interlocking counters at the same time. 416. Therefore, before the interlocking counter 416 receives the clock signal, any of the interlocking signals BLK1 ', BLK2', BLK3 ', and BLK4' will become the High level (H level). As a result, the valid signal may become the Η level . Therefore, using the interlock circuit 413, the interlocking part can keep the effective signal at the Low level (L level) before the calculation part starts the calculation. In FIG. 64, although the state of the interlocking counter 416 is that the interlocking signals are input from the four interlocking counters 416, as long as the number of the interlocking counters 416 to be connected changes the number of inputs of the interlocking NOR gate 414, Or pull-down the input which is not needed when inputting the NOR gate 414 for linkage. In the synchronous counter 411 shown in Fig. 64, the start 値 of the count 値 is fixed at 0 and the end 値 is fixed at 7. However, there are cases where the count (starting and ending) may be changed according to the specifications of the LSI. Therefore, the interlocking counter 416 can use a synchronous erasing device such as a commercially available synchronous calculating device 411 and a synchronous counter 411 having a step loading device, and can set any starting and ending points. At this time, the judgment of the end point is implemented by adding the NOT gate before the end of the judgment gate 412. Of course, the combination of the NOT gate 412 and the NOT gate for judgment is replaced according to the NAND gate. The circuit structure of the interlocking counter 416 alone has been described so far. In the following, a timing chart is used to explain how the interlocked counters 416 are linked to each other when a plurality of interlocked counters 416 are connected. First, as shown in Figure 65, consider that three interlocking counters 416 are connected to 129. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 ---------- B7___ V. Description of Invention (/ &gt; 7) In Fig. 65, the interlocked counter 416 is abbreviated as ICU. The interlocking signal BLK0 of each interlocking counter 416 is input to the NOR gate 414 for interlocking of the remaining interlocking counters 416. Therefore, the NOR gate 414 for interlocking can be a 2-input gate gate. When these three interlocked counters 416 operate after stabilization, the timing diagram of any one of the interlocked counters 416 will be shown in FIG. 66. And because all the interlocked counters 416 are symmetrical, the timing diagrams of the remaining interlocked counters 416 are also the same. From Figure 66, it is clear that when the counts of all the interlocked counters 416 are When they are consistent, the output of the NOR gate 415 for calculation will instantly become the high level, but since it will return to the L level immediately, the NOR gate 415 for calculation can be continuously calculated. Therefore, all the interlocked counters 416 can continuously output the same count. As shown in Fig. 67, when the waveform of the interlock signal BLK1 'becomes shorter for some reason, the interlock counter 416 operates regardless of the interlock signal BLK1'. Therefore, the interlocking signal BLK1 'has no effect on the counting chirp. In addition, an interlocking counter 416 that creates an interlocking signal BLK1 'will operate the interlocking signal BLK1' in accordance with the phases of the interlocking signals BLK0 'and BLK2'. As shown in Figure 68, when the waveform of the interlock signal BLK2 'becomes longer for some reason, the interlock counter 416 will cooperate with the phase of the interlock signal BLK2' to act on the phase of the interlock signal BLK0 '. Therefore, until the interlock signal BLK2 'becomes the L level, the interlock counter 416 will count as "continuous output end". As shown in Figure 69, the waveform of the interlocking signal BLK1 'is for some reason 130 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page )

498290 κι __Β7_ 五、發明說明(/1) 變短;互鎖訊號BLK2’之波形因某種理由變長時,互鎖式 計數器416會配合互鎖訊號BLK2’之相位勲作互鎖訊號 BLK0’之相位。因此在互鎖訊號BLK2’成爲L位準之前 ,互鎖式計數器416會當作計數値持續輸出結束値。 利用上述之時序圖,3個互鎖式計數器416會對計算 最慢之判斷配合計數値。此對結束値不同之互鎖式計數器 416被連接之情況也成立。因此投入電源時,即使3個互 鎖式計數器416之計數値不同,在時鐘訊號之週期乘上結 束値之最大數後之時間以內全部的互鎖式計數器416之計 數値均會一致。 互鎖式計數器416,並不一定要如第65圖那樣與其他 之所有互鎖式計數器416連接。因此以下,係說明有關互 鎖式計數器416被規則性陣列時之情況。 如第70圖所示,由互鎖式計數器416構成之互鎖裝置 ,係鄰接同類連接排列於正方格子狀上之互鎖式計數器 416之網路。此狀況下,連動用NOR閘414之輸入數爲4 。另外,在邊緣之互鎖式計數器416上,沒有連接地之連 動用NOR閘414之輸入會被左區降下。取代將互鎖式計數 器416排列於正方格子狀,也可如第71圖所示排列於六角 格子狀之鄰接同類。像這樣配置互鎖式計數器416,因全 部的互鎖訊號用訊號線之長度都幾乎一樣,故互鎖式計數 器416很容易相互連動。因此,對於有如管線(pipeline)處 理裝置、DSP(Digital Signal Processor)、脈動陣列(systolic array)、資料流機器(data flow machine)、及平行影像處理裝 131 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ___ B7_ 五、發明說明(/^) 置一樣之大規模又有規則之數位電路,這些二維計數器網 路,可很容易提供互鎖式計數器416之計數値,亦即時鐘 訊號之分周訊號。 再者三維計數器網路,係利用三維LSI技術將前述排 列於正方格子狀及六角格子狀之互鎖式計數器416多數疊 合之網路。因此排列於正方格子狀時,連數用NOR閘414 之輸入數爲6;排列於六角格子狀時,連動用NOR閘414 之輸入數爲8。而利用調整各層互鎖式計數器416之位置 ,可將訊號線之長度設爲最短,故每個互鎖式計數器416 之互鎖訊號之傳送延遲時間幾乎相等,互鎖式計數器416 彼此就很容易連動。這些三維計數器網路,會排列於正方 格子狀及六角格子狀之處理器101所一起處理之資料朝垂 直方向,對於想做管線處理之脈動陣列及平行影像處理裝 置可很有效率地提供互鎖式計數器416之計數値,亦即時 鐘訊號之分周訊號。 再者,分配互鎖式計數器416之計數値時,也可將排 列於正方格子狀及六角格子狀之互鎖式計數器416之網路 與處理器101及運算電路等之數位電路安裝在三維LSI之 不同層上。因此爲了數位電路之配置,互鎖式計數器416 之配置不會偏移,而且互鎖訊號BLK0’之訊號線也不會迂 迴。因互鎖式計數器416不會受數位電路之雜訊影像,故 互鎖式計數器416會穩定動作。另外因數位電路可從互鎖 式計數器416之網路之任一互鎖式計數器416輸入計數値 ,故很容易設計數位電路。 132 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 灯· -丨線- 498290 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明(/&gt;) 不過,若使用二維計數器網路及三維計數器網路,則 全部的互鎖式計數器416均可交給LSI全體並提供計數値 。亦即使用此計數値,設計互鎖式訊號分配電路以便將適 當之訊號同時分配給LSI全體。 如第72圖所示,在時鐘訊號之週期正數倍形成輸入訊 號之互鎖裝置,會利用訊號分配用解碼器421將互鎖式計 數器416之計數値符號化,作成與時鐘訊喊(CLK)同步之時 序訊號(timing signal)。因此表示計時開始時間與計時結束 時間,利用不同之2個時序訊號,訊號分配用解碼器421 可計算時鐘訊號之週期正數倍之時間。另外第72圖中,爲 表示計時開始時間與計時結束時間而分別使用時序訊號3 號及5號,但是當然也可使用其他之時序訊號。若從外部 輸入適當之訊號(SIGIN),訊號分配用鎖定電路422 —旦儲 存了此訊號後,會利用訊號分配用NOR閘423輸入到計時 開始時間上之訊號分配用正反器電路424。訊號分配用正 反器電路424會同步爲時鐘訊號,並儲存輸入訊號,重設 爲計時結束時間。因此不管輸入訊號之傳送延遲時間,互 鎖式訊號分配電路可將到達計時開始時間前之輸入訊號從 計時開始時間輸出到計時結束時間。另外在輸入訊號之理 論反轉時,藉由在訊號分配用鎖定電路422前加入NOT閘 ,互鎖式訊號分配電路可正常動作。 將第72圖所示之互鎖式訊號分配電路之時序圖表示於 第73圖。如第73圖所示,一將輸入訊號(SIGIN)輸入,則 從輸出時序訊號3號時之時鐘訊號(CLK)下降後之時刻到輸 133 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 κι __Β7_ V. Description of the invention (/ 1) becomes shorter; when the waveform of the interlock signal BLK2 'becomes longer for some reason, the interlock counter 416 will cooperate with the phase of the interlock signal BLK2' to interlock the signal BLK0 ' Of phase. Therefore, before the interlock signal BLK2 'becomes the L level, the interlock counter 416 will count as "continuous output ends". Using the above-mentioned timing diagram, the three interlocked counters 416 count the slowest judgment cooperation. This also holds true for the case where different interlocked counters 416 are connected. Therefore, even when the counts of the three interlocked counters 416 are different when the power is turned on, the counts of all the interlocked counters 416 will be consistent within the time after the period of the clock signal is multiplied by the maximum number of end clocks. The interlocked counter 416 does not have to be connected to all other interlocked counters 416 as shown in FIG. 65. Therefore, the following description deals with the case where the interlocked counter 416 is regularly arrayed. As shown in FIG. 70, the interlocking device composed of the interlocking counter 416 is a network of interlocking counters 416 adjacent to the same type and arranged in a square grid. In this case, the number of inputs of the NOR gate 414 for interlocking is four. In addition, on the edge interlock counter 416, the input of the interlocking NOR gate 414 without a ground is lowered by the left area. Instead of arranging the interlocking counters 416 in a square grid shape, they can also be arranged in a hexagonal grid like adjacent ones as shown in FIG. 71. If the interlocked counter 416 is configured in this way, all the interlocked signal lines have almost the same length, so the interlocked counter 416 can be easily interconnected. Therefore, for paper processing equipment, such as pipeline processing equipment, DSP (Digital Signal Processor), systolic array, data flow machine, and parallel image processing equipment, this paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page) 498290 A7 ___ B7_ V. Description of the invention (/ ^) The same large-scale and regular digital circuits are set up. These two-dimensional counter networks can easily provide the interlocking counter 416 count. Clock signal is divided into week signal. Furthermore, the three-dimensional counter network is a network in which most of the aforementioned interlocking counters 416 arranged in a square grid shape and a hexagonal grid shape are stacked using three-dimensional LSI technology. Therefore, when arranged in a square grid, the number of inputs of the NOR gate 414 for continuous number is 6; when arranged in a hexagonal grid, the number of inputs of the NOR gate 414 for linkage is 8. And by adjusting the positions of the interlocking counters 416 of each layer, the length of the signal line can be set to the shortest, so the transmission delay time of the interlocking signals of each interlocking counter 416 is almost equal, and the interlocking counters 416 are easy to each other. Gearing. These three-dimensional counter networks are arranged in a square grid and a hexagonal grid, and the data processed by the processor 101 is oriented vertically. It can provide interlocking efficiently for pulsating arrays and parallel image processing devices that want to do pipeline processing. The counting counter of the digital counter 416 is the weekly signal of the clock signal. In addition, when the count of the interlocking counter 416 is distributed, the digital circuits such as the network of the interlocking counter 416 arranged in the square grid and the hexagonal grid, and the processor 101 and the arithmetic circuit can be installed in a three-dimensional LSI. On different layers. Therefore, for the configuration of the digital circuit, the configuration of the interlocking counter 416 will not shift, and the signal line of the interlocking signal BLK0 'will not be detoured. Since the interlocked counter 416 is not subject to the noise image of the digital circuit, the interlocked counter 416 operates stably. In addition, since the digital circuit can input the count 値 from any interlocked counter 416 of the network of the interlocked counter 416, it is easy to design the digital circuit. 132 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- Loading --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Lamp ·-丨 Wire- 498290 A7 ____B7__ 5. Explanation of the invention (/ &gt;) However, if a two-dimensional counter network and a three-dimensional counter network are used, all interlocking counters 416 can be given to the entire LSI and provided Counting puppet. That is, using this counter, an interlocking signal distribution circuit is designed so that appropriate signals are distributed to the entire LSI at the same time. As shown in Figure 72, an interlock device that forms an input signal at a positive multiple of the clock signal period will use the signal distribution decoder 421 to symbolize the count 値 of the interlock counter 416 to create a clock signal (CLK ) Timing signal for synchronization. Therefore, it indicates the timing start time and the timing end time. Using two different timing signals, the signal distribution decoder 421 can calculate the time of the clock signal being a multiple of a positive period. In addition, in Figure 72, the timing signals 3 and 5 are used to indicate the timing start time and the timing end time, but of course other timing signals can also be used. If an appropriate signal (SIGIN) is input from the outside, the signal distribution lock circuit 422-once this signal is stored, it will be input to the signal distribution flip-flop circuit 424 at the timing start time using the signal distribution NOR gate 423. The signal distribution flip-flop circuit 424 synchronizes to a clock signal, stores the input signal, and resets it to the timing end time. Therefore, regardless of the transmission delay time of the input signal, the interlocking signal distribution circuit can output the input signal before the timing start time from the timing start time to the timing end time. In addition, when the theory of the input signal is reversed, by adding a NOT gate before the signal distribution lock circuit 422, the interlocking signal distribution circuit can operate normally. The timing diagram of the interlocking signal distribution circuit shown in Fig. 72 is shown in Fig. 73. As shown in Figure 73, once the input signal (SIGIN) is input, the time from the time when the clock signal (CLK) at the output timing signal 3 falls to 133 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 ___ B7____ 五、發明說明(ρι) •出時序訊號5號時之時鐘訊號(CLK)下降後之時刻之期間, 就將輸出訊號(SIGOUT)輸出。因此數位電路無論要配置在 LSI之何處,都可在時序訊號5號開始時確實地輸入輸出 訊號(SIGOUT)。將重設訊號、岔斷訊號及輸出入訊號等所 完成設計之數位電路以不變更之方式裝入1個系統LSI時 ,這樣之功能有必要且不可或缺。 、 截至目則說明了互鎖式計數器416、計數器網路及互 鎖式訊號分配電路。以下係說明有關,時鐘訊號變爲高頻 率時,在LSI全體讓互鎖式計數器416同步所需要之同步 式振盪電路410。 首先,如第74圖所示,同步式振盪電路410,係由振 盪部分、同步部分及起始化用NOR閘402所構成,振盪部 分與同步部分個別分類爲A側與B側2邊。而且第74圖 中,同步式振盪電路410係視爲從4個同步式振盪電路410 輸入同步訊號 SyncAl’ 、SyncA2’ 、SyncA3’ 、SyncA4’ 、SyncBl’ 、SyncB2’ 、SyncB3,及 SyncB4’ 。 在振盪部分,A側振盪用NOR閘401a、A側振盪用電 容404a、B側振盪用NOR閘401B及B側振盪用電容404B 會被連接爲環狀,再者A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振 盪用NOR閘401B之輸出與輸入,分別用A側振盪用電阻 403a及B側振盪用電阻403B被連接。在此A側振盪用電 阻403a及B側振盪用電阻403B之電阻値一起視爲R歐姆 ,A側振盪用電容404a及B側振盪用電容404B之電容値 一起視爲C法拉,振盪部分會配合時常數RC利用自激振 134 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 ___ B7____ V. Description of the invention (ρι) • The time after the clock signal (CLK) drops when the timing signal 5 is output, The output signal (SIGOUT) is output. Therefore, no matter where the digital circuit is arranged in the LSI, the SIGOUT signal can be reliably input and output at the beginning of the timing signal No. 5. This function is necessary and indispensable when a digital circuit with a completed design such as a reset signal, a trip signal, and an input / output signal is installed in a system LSI without change. So far, the interlocked counter 416, counter network and interlocked signal distribution circuit have been described. The following description is related to the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 required for synchronizing the interlocked counter 416 with the entire LSI when the clock signal becomes a high frequency. First, as shown in Fig. 74, the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 is composed of an oscillating part, a synchronizing part, and a NOR gate 402 for initialization. The oscillating part and the synchronizing part are respectively classified into A side and B side. In Fig. 74, the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 is regarded as inputting synchronous signals SyncAl ', SyncA2', SyncA3 ', SyncA4', SyncBl ', SyncB2', SyncB3, and SyncB4 'from the four synchronous oscillating circuits 410. In the oscillating part, the A-side oscillation NOR gate 401a, the A-side oscillation capacitor 404a, the B-side oscillation NOR gate 401B, and the B-side oscillation capacitor 404B are connected in a ring shape, and the A-side oscillation NOR gate 401a and The output and input of the B-side oscillation NOR gate 401B are connected with the A-side oscillation resistor 403a and the B-side oscillation resistor 403B, respectively. Here, the resistance 値 of the A-side oscillating resistor 403a and the B-side oscillating resistor 403B are regarded as R ohms, and the 値 of the A-side oscillating capacitor 404a and the B-side oscillating capacitor 404B are regarded as C Farads. The oscillating part will cooperate Time constant RC uses self-excited vibration 134 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 -— _B7__ 五、發明說明(〇Χ) 盪’可產生2個時鐘訊號_ciockA及ClockB、與2個同步訊 號SyncAO’及SyncBO,。在同步部分,會根據同步訊號 SyncAl SyncA2, 、SyncA3’ 、SyncA4’ 、SyncBl’ 、 SyncB2’ 、SyncB3’及SyncB4’ ,A側同步用鎖定電路 405a與A側同步用n〇R閘406a、及B側同步用鎖定電路 405B與B側同步用n〇R閘406B會分別控制A側振盪用 NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘401B。因此同步部分可 將同步訊號SyncAO’及SyncBO’之相位和週期,配合同步 訊號 SyncAl’ 、SyncA2,、SyncA3,、SyncA4,、SyncBl ’ 、SyncB2’ 、SyncB3’及SyncB4’之相位和週期。起始 化用NOR閘402在電源投入時等會利用控制A側振盪用 NOR閘401a,決定同步訊號SyncBO’之相位。另外在第 74圖雖表示同步式振盪電路410從4個同步式振盪電路 410輸入同步訊號之情況,但是只要配合被連接之同步式 振盪電路410數變更A側同步用NOR閘406a及B側同步 用NOR閘406B之輸入數,或拉下A側同步用NOR閘406a 及B側同步用NOR閘406B輸入中不必要之輸入即可。498290 A7 --- _B7__ V. Description of the Invention (〇Χ) Swing ′ can generate 2 clock signals _ciockA and ClockB, and 2 synchronization signals SyncAO ’and SyncBO. In the synchronization part, according to the synchronization signals SyncAl SyncA2, SyncA3 ', SyncA4', SyncBl ', SyncB2', SyncB3 ', and SyncB4', the A-side synchronization lock circuit 405a and the A-side synchronization gate 406A, and B The side synchronization lock circuit 405B and the B side synchronization NOR gate 406B control the A-side oscillation NOR gate 401a and the B-side oscillation NOR gate 401B, respectively. Therefore, the phase and period of the synchronization signals SyncAO 'and SyncBO' can be matched with the phase and period of the synchronization signals SyncAl ', SyncA2 ,, SyncA3, SyncA4, SyncBl', SyncB2 ', SyncB3', and SyncB4 '. The initialization NOR gate 402 determines the phase of the synchronization signal SyncBO 'by using the NOR gate 401a for controlling A-side oscillation when the power is turned on. In addition, FIG. 74 shows the case where the synchronous oscillator circuit 410 receives synchronization signals from four synchronous oscillator circuits 410, but as long as the number of connected synchronous oscillator circuits 410 is changed, the A-side synchronization NOR gate 406a and the B-side synchronization are changed. Use the input number of the NOR gate 406B, or pull down the unnecessary input of the NOR gate 406a for the A-side synchronization and the NOR gate 406B for the B-side synchronization.

第74圖之同步式振盪電路410,可使用 TTL(Transistor-Transistor Logic)及 ECL(發射極耦合邏輯電路 )等許多半導體技術來安裝。不過使用像CMOS那樣之 FET(場效電晶體)時,若被儲存於A側振盪用電容404a及 B側振盪用電容404B之電荷一起在NOR閘之輸入時流出 ,恐怕NOR閘會被破壞。如第75圖所示,同步式振盪電 路410,爲了避免這個問題而使用A側輸入電阻407a及B 135 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The synchronous oscillating circuit 410 in FIG. 74 can be installed using many semiconductor technologies such as TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) and ECL (Emitter-Coupled Logic Circuit). However, when using a FET (field-effect transistor) such as CMOS, if the charges stored in the A-side oscillation capacitor 404a and the B-side oscillation capacitor 404B flow out at the input of the NOR gate, the NOR gate may be damaged. As shown in Figure 75, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 uses A-side input resistors 407a and B 135 in order to avoid this problem. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read first (Notes on the back then fill out this page)

498290 A7 ___ B7_ —_-_ 五、發明說明(fj\) 側輸入電阻407B。因此被儲存於A側振盪用電容404a及 B側振盪用電容404B之電荷不會在所有NOR閘之輸入時 一起流出。而利用A側輸入電阻407a及B側輸入電阻 407B,因會減少A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振盪用 NOR閘401B之輸入時流出之電流,故會提高從A側輸入 電阻407a與A側振盪用電容404a、及B側輸入電阻407B 與B側振盪用電容404B求出之時常數之_確度。另外A 側輸入電阻407a及B側輸入電阻407B之電阻値一起當作 R0歐姆。電阻値R0會參考電源電壓、NOR閘之輸入特性 及電容値C等之後才決定。 即使使用LSI技術來實現了 NOR閘、電阻及電容’但 在第74圖及第75圖之每個零件性能上也會有差異產生。 更何況要產生如同步式振盪電路410所期望之時鐘頻率是 很困難的。因此如第76圖所示,同步式振盪電路41〇 ’係 藉利用晶體振盪器408來代替A側振盪用電容4〇4a ’而能 配合晶體振盪器408之振動數自激振盪。不過B側振盪用 電容404B之電容値C要設定成同步式振盪電路41〇大致以 晶體振盪器408之振動數來自激振盪之値。 在這之前說明了同步式振盪電路410單體之電路構成 。以下,係說明有複數個同步式振盪電路410被連接時’ 同步式振盪電路410彼此要如何取得同步、及使用時序圖 。另外,在CMOS的情形,因其輸入阻抗高’而且可將輸 入電壓之界限値設定在電源電壓與接地電壓之中央’故以 下之時序圖都以CMOS爲中心寫成。不過即使在TTL及 136 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---I------------I---1 訂------I--線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 __B7____ 五、發明說明(|^f) ECL等情形,其時序圖也是呈相同之波形。 首先如第77圖所示,考慮3個同步式振盪電路410被 連接之情況。而在第77圖中,將同步式振盪電路410略記 爲SOU。每個同步式振盪電路410之同步訊號SyncAO’及 SyncBO’會被輸入至剩餘之同步式振盪電路410之A側同 步用NOR閘406a及B側同步用NOR閘4p6B。因此A側 同步用NOR聞406a及B側同步用NOR閘406B若爲2輸 入NOR閘即可。當這些3個同步式振盪電路410穩定後自 激振盪時,任何1個同步式振盪電路410之時序圖會表示 於第78圖。而因全部的同步式振盪電路410均爲對稱式, 故剩餘之同步式振盪電路410之時序圖也相同。 如第78圖所示,同步式振盪電路410自激振盪時,時 鐘訊號ClockA及ClockB不會同時成爲High位準(H位準) 。因此起始化用NOR閘402之輸出通常爲低位準(L位準) 。而根據A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘 401B之真値表之非對稱性,A側振盪用電容404a及B側 振盪用電容404B之電壓會利用放電,將到達A側振盪用 NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘401B之輸入電壓界限値 之時點當作起點,同步式振盪電路410會自激振盪。 如第79圖所示,同步訊號SyncAl’及SyncBl’之波 形因某種理由變短時,同步式振盪電路410會無關同步訊 號SyncAl’及SyncBl’而動作。因此對於時鐘訊號 ClockA及ClockB沒有影響。另外作成同步訊號SyncAl’ 及SyncBl’之同步式振盪電路410會將同步訊號SyncAl’ 137 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^--------^----------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明(|七5) .及 SyncBl’ 配合同步訊號 SyncAO’ 、SyncA2’ 、SyncBO’ 及SyncB2’之相位動作。 如第80圖所示,同步訊號SyncAl’及SyncB2’之波 形因某種理由變長時.,同步式振盪電路410會讓同步訊號 SyncBO’(或SyncAO’)之相位配合同步訊號SyncB2’(或 SyncA2’)之相位動作。因此時鐘訊號Clock,及ClockB之 週期會配合同步訊號SyncB2’ .(或SyncA2’)之週期變長。 如第81圖所示,同步訊號SyncAl’及SyncBl’之波 形因某種理由變短;同步訊號SyncA2’及SyncB2’之波形 因某種理由變長時,同步式振盪電路410會讓同步訊號 SyncBO’(或SyncAO’)之相位配合同步訊號SyncB2’(或 SyncA2’)之相位動作。因此時鐘訊號ClockA及ClockB之 週期會配合同步訊號SyncB2’(或SyncA2’)之週期變長。 利用上述之時序圖,3個同步式振盪電路410會判斷 對週期最長之做同步。此在時常數有微妙不同之同步式振 盪電路410被連接之情況也成立。 如第82圖所示,投入電源時,因全部的訊號爲0伏特 ,故A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘401B 之輸出被視爲L位準。因此起始化用NOR閘402之輸出, 亦即訊號Osc’會馬上變爲Η層次。同時A側振盪用NOR 閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘401B之輸出也會馬上變爲Η 層次。不過訊號Osc’若成爲Η層次,Α側振盪用NOR閘 401a之輸出因會強制性地使其變更爲L位準,結果就只有 B側振盪用NOR閘401B之輸出呈Η層次。此時訊號〇sc 138 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------I I ^----------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 __B7___ 五、發明說明(Mt) •’會成爲L位準,之後就維持L位準。因此電源投入後, 同步訊號SyncAO’及SyncBO’之相位被決定爲一致。 到此雖說明了連接3個同步式振盪電路410之時序圖 ,但是使用在3個同步式振盪電路410中至少1個包含晶 體振盪器408之同步式振盪電路410時也會做相同之動作 。不過因晶體振盪器408之週期被視爲一定,故不含晶體 振盪器408之同步式振盪電路410之相位,爲了要符合包 含晶體振盪器408之同步式振盪電路410之相位,不含晶 體振盪器408之同步式振盪電路410之波形長度會優先地 變化。因此,在同步式振盪電路410之網路上,若有1個 包含晶體振盪器408之同步式振盪電路410,就可將網路整 體之時鐘頻率保持一定。 再者,同步式振盪電路410,並不一定要如第77圖那 樣與其他全部的同步式振盪電路410連接。因此下述,係 說明同步式振盪電路410被有規則性之排列情況。 如第83圖所示,二維振盪電路網路,係鄰接同類連接 排列於正方格子狀上之同步式振盪電路410之網路。此狀 況下,A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR閘401B 之輸入數爲4。另外,在邊緣之同步式振盪電路410上, 沒有連接地之A側振盪用NOR閘401a及B側振盪用NOR 閘401B之輸入會被左區降下。取代將同步式振盪電路410 排列於正方格子狀,也可如第84圖所示排列於六角格子狀 之鄰接同類。像這樣配置同步式振盪電路410,因全部的 同步訊號用訊號線之長度都幾乎一樣,故同步式振盪電路 139 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · ·498290 A7 ___ B7_ —_-_ 5. Description of the invention (fj \) side input resistance 407B. Therefore, the charges stored in the A-side oscillating capacitor 404a and the B-side oscillating capacitor 404B do not flow together at the input of all NOR gates. By using the A-side input resistor 407a and the B-side input resistor 407B, the current flowing out of the A-side oscillation NOR gate 401a and the B-side oscillation NOR gate 401B is reduced, so the A-side input resistors 407a and A are increased. The accuracy of the time constants obtained by the side-oscillation capacitor 404a, the B-side input resistor 407B, and the B-side oscillation capacitor 404B. In addition, the resistance of the A-side input resistor 407a and the B-side input resistor 407B are regarded as R0 ohms. The resistance 値 R0 is determined after referring to the power supply voltage, the input characteristics of the NOR gate, and the capacitance 値 C. Even if NOR gates, resistors, and capacitors are implemented using LSI technology, differences in performance of each part in Figs. 74 and 75 may occur. Moreover, it is difficult to generate a clock frequency as expected by the synchronous oscillation circuit 410. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76, the synchronous oscillation circuit 41o 'can use the crystal oscillator 408 instead of the A-side oscillation capacitor 404a' to cooperate with the self-excited oscillation of the crystal oscillator 408. However, the capacitance 値 C of the capacitor 404B for the B-side oscillation needs to be set to the synchronous oscillation circuit 41. The oscillation frequency of the crystal oscillator 408 is roughly derived from the oscillation. The circuit configuration of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 alone has been described before. In the following, when a plurality of synchronous oscillation circuits 410 are connected, it is explained how the synchronous oscillation circuits 410 are synchronized with each other and the timing diagram is used. In addition, in the case of CMOS, because the input impedance is high 'and the limit 値 of the input voltage can be set at the center of the power supply voltage and the ground voltage', the following timing charts are written with CMOS as the center. However, even at TTL and 136 paper sizes, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applicable --- I ------------ I --- 1 Order --- --- I-- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 __B7____ V. Description of the invention (| ^ f) ECL, etc., the timing diagram also shows the same waveform. First, as shown in FIG. 77, a case where three synchronous oscillation circuits 410 are connected is considered. In Fig. 77, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 is abbreviated as SOU. The synchronization signals SyncAO 'and SyncBO' of each synchronous oscillation circuit 410 are input to the remaining side synchronous oscillating circuit 410 for the A side synchronous NOR gate 406a and the B side synchronous NOR gate 4p6B. Therefore, if the A-side synchronization NOR 406a and the B-side synchronization NOR gate 406B are two-input NOR gates. When these three synchronous oscillation circuits 410 stabilize and self-oscillate, the timing diagram of any one synchronous oscillation circuit 410 is shown in FIG. 78. Since all the synchronous oscillating circuits 410 are symmetrical, the timing diagrams of the remaining synchronous oscillating circuits 410 are also the same. As shown in Fig. 78, when the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 oscillates independently, the clock signals ClockA and ClockB do not become the High level (H level) at the same time. Therefore, the output of the NOR gate 402 for initialization is usually a low level (L level). According to the asymmetry of the true value of the NOR gate 401a for the A-side oscillation and the 401B for the B-side oscillation, the voltages of the A-side oscillation capacitor 404a and the B-side oscillation capacitor 404B will be discharged and will reach the A-side oscillation. Using the time point of the input voltage limit 値 of the NOR gate 401a and the NOR gate 401B as the starting point, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 oscillates by itself. As shown in Fig. 79, when the waveforms of the synchronization signals SyncAl 'and SyncBl' become shorter for some reason, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 operates independently of the synchronization signals SyncAl 'and SyncBl'. Therefore, it has no effect on the clock signals ClockA and ClockB. In addition, the synchronous signal SyncAl 'and SyncBl' are used to create the synchronous oscillation circuit 410. The synchronous signal SyncAl '137 is compatible with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) paper size. ^ -------- ^ ---------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 498290 A7 ____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (| Seven 5). And SyncBl 'with the synchronization signals SyncAO', SyncA2 ', Phase action of SyncBO 'and SyncB2'. As shown in Figure 80, when the waveforms of the synchronization signals SyncAl 'and SyncB2' become longer for some reason, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 will match the phase of the synchronization signal SyncBO '(or SyncAO') with the synchronization signal SyncB2 '(or SyncA2 ') phase action. Therefore, the period of the clock signal Clock and ClockB will be longer than the period of the synchronization signal SyncB2 '. (Or SyncA2'). As shown in Fig. 81, the waveforms of the synchronization signals SyncAl 'and SyncBl' become shorter for some reason; when the waveforms of the synchronization signals SyncA2 'and SyncB2' become longer for some reason, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 causes the synchronous signal SyncBO The phase of '(or SyncAO') matches the phase of the synchronization signal SyncB2 '(or SyncA2'). Therefore, the period of the clock signals ClockA and ClockB will be longer in accordance with the period of the synchronization signal SyncB2 '(or SyncA2'). Using the above timing diagram, the three synchronous oscillation circuits 410 will determine to synchronize the longest period. This also holds true when the synchronous oscillator circuit 410 having a slightly different time constant is connected. As shown in Figure 82, when the power is turned on, all the signals are 0 volts, so the outputs of the NOR gate 401a for oscillating A side and the 401B for oscillating B side are regarded as L level. Therefore, the output of the initialization NOR gate 402, that is, the signal Osc 'will immediately change to a Η level. At the same time, the outputs of the NOR gate 401a for oscillating on the A side and the NOR gate 401B for oscillating on the B side will also immediately change to the Η level. However, if the signal Osc 'is at a high level, the output of the A-side oscillating NOR gate 401a will be forced to be changed to the L level. As a result, only the output of the B-side oscillating NOR gate 401B will be a high-level. At this time, the signal 〇sc 138 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- II ^ ---- ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 498290 A7 __B7___ V. Description of Invention (Mt) • 'L will become the L level, and then maintain the L level. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the phases of the sync signals SyncAO 'and SyncBO' are determined to be the same. Although the timing chart of connecting three synchronous oscillation circuits 410 has been described so far, the same operation will be performed when the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 including the crystal oscillator 408 is used in at least one of the three synchronous oscillation circuits 410. However, since the period of the crystal oscillator 408 is considered constant, the phase of the synchronous oscillator circuit 410 without the crystal oscillator 408 is included. In order to comply with the phase of the synchronous oscillator circuit 410 including the crystal oscillator 408, the crystal oscillator is not included. The waveform length of the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 of the amplifier 408 will change preferentially. Therefore, on the network of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410, if there is a synchronous oscillation circuit 410 including a crystal oscillator 408, the clock frequency of the entire network can be kept constant. The synchronous oscillation circuit 410 does not have to be connected to all other synchronous oscillation circuits 410 as shown in FIG. 77. Therefore, the following description explains the regular arrangement of the synchronous oscillation circuits 410. As shown in Fig. 83, the two-dimensional oscillating circuit network is a network of adjacent synchronous oscillating circuits 410 connected in a square grid pattern. In this case, the number of inputs of the A-side oscillating NOR gate 401a and the B-side oscillating NOR gate 401B is four. In addition, on the edge synchronous oscillation circuit 410, the inputs of the NOR gate 401a for oscillating on the A side and the NOR gate 401B for oscillating on the B side without being connected to the ground are lowered in the left region. Instead of arranging the synchronous oscillating circuits 410 in a square grid, they may be arranged in a hexagonal grid adjacent to the same type as shown in FIG. 84. If the synchronous oscillator circuit 410 is configured like this, the length of all the signal lines for the synchronous signal is almost the same, so the synchronous oscillator circuit 139 This paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)- --------------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 ___Β7_____ 五、發明說明(Β]) • 410很容易相互同步。因此,對於管線處理裝置、 DSP(Digital Signal Processor)、脈動陣列、資料流機器、及 平行影像處理裝置那樣大規模又有規則之數位電路,這些 二維網路,與分配從外部輸入之時鐘訊號之情況比起來, 可很容易提供柑位齊全之時鐘訊號。 三維振盪電路網路,係如上述那樣利用三維LSI技術 將排列於正方格子狀及六角格子狀之同步式振盪電路410 多數疊合之網路。因此排列於正方格子狀時,A側同步用 NOR閘406a及B側同步用NOR閘406B之輸入數爲6;排 列於/、角格子狀時’ A側冋步用NOR闊406a及B側同步 用NOR閘406B之輸入數爲8。而利用調整各層同步式振 盪電路410之位置,可將訊號線之長度設爲最短,故每個 同步式振盪電路410之同步訊號之傳送延遲時間幾乎相等 ,同步式振盪電路410彼此就很容易同步。這些三維振盪 電路網路,會排列於正方格子狀及六角格子狀之處理器 101所一起處理之資料朝垂直方向,對於想做管線處理之 脈動陣列及平行影像處理裝置可很有效率地提供相位齊全 之時鐘訊號。 再者,分配時鐘訊號時,若將將排列於正方格子狀及 六角格子狀之同步式振盪電路410之網路與處理器1〇1及 運算電路等之數位電路,安裝在三維LSI之不同層上,則 爲了數位電路之配置,同步式振盪電路410之配置不會偏 移,而且同步訊號SyncAO’及SyncBO’之訊號線也不會迂 迴。因同步式振盪電路410不會受數位電路之雜訊影像, 140 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------I--------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 ^______B7_ 五、發明說明 •故同步式振盪電路410會穩定動作。另外因數位電路可從 同步式振盪電路410之網路之任一同步式振盪電路410輸 入時鐘訊號ClockA及ClockB,故很容易設計數位電路。 在此之前係說明了有關人工眼球1、視覺裝置2、通訊 裝置7及影像探測器。因此在最後說明有關中央控制裝置 22卜 · 首先,將第85圖所示之中央控制裝置221分爲3個群 組說明之:亦即將視覺裝置2輸出之環境地圖及任一物體 數轉換爲聲音合成裝置226可輸入之地圖本文及物體數本 文之群組;與將聲音辨識裝置227輸出之指令本文轉換爲 視覺裝置2可輸入之控制指令之群組;與在視覺裝置2輸 出之數位影像111上插入地圖本文、物體數本文及指令本 文之群組。 第1個群組中包括環境地圖輸入裝置301、地圖/本文 轉換裝置302、物體數輸入裝置303、物體數/本文轉換裝 置304及地圖/物體數本文保持裝置305。 首先由表示物體區域141之種類及位置之環境資料構 成之環境地圖每次從視覺裝置2被輸出時,環境地圖輸入 裝置301會輸入此環境地圖,並依次儲存於緩衝區。地圖/ 本文轉換裝置302若可輸入,環境地圖輸入裝置301會依 照輸入順序按每個環境資料輸入。地圖/本文轉換裝置302 若輸入環境資料,則會將物體區域141之種類及位置轉換 爲文字列(地圖本文)。此時地圖/本文轉換裝置302 ’以使 用者之位置當作零點,將物體之位置及位置之變化轉換爲 141 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4^格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 入 16· _線- 498290 A7 ____B7___——— 五、發明說明 .使用者常看之方向,亦即以正面爲基準之座標,並變更爲 使用者容易瞭解之用語:如前、後、右、左、上、下、近 、遠、接近、遠去、橫過、交錯、越過等。使用跳離順序 (escape-sequence)及特殊記號等,地圖/本文轉換裝置302會 將以環境地圖上包含之移動式攝影機10之方向及倍率爲基 準之位置轉換爲當作零點之座標,變更爲前述用語後會追 加至地圖本文。因此,地圖本文可用不同座標表示相同物 體區域141之位置。地圖/物體數本文保持裝置305會根據 地圖/本文轉換裝置302將被轉換之地圖本文依序儲存於緩 衝區,且輸出至聲音合成裝置226。 同樣地,環境地圖上表示一定期間被記錄之物體個數 之任一物體數,每次從視覺裝置2被輸出時,物體數輸入 裝置303會輸入該任一物體數,並依序儲存至緩衝區。物 體數/本文轉換裝置304若爲可輸入,物體數輸入裝置303 會根據輸入順序輸出任一物體數。物體數/本文轉換裝置 304若輸入任一物體數,便會將物體區域141之個數轉換爲 文字列(物體數本文)。地圖/物體數本文保持裝置305會根 據物體數/本文轉換裝置304將被轉換之物體數本文依序儲 存於緩衝區,並輸出至聲音合成裝置226。 第2個群組係包括指令本文輸入裝置306、本文/指令 轉換裝置307及控制指令保持裝置308。首先是使用者指示 之指令之辨識結果,前、後、右、左、上、下、近、遠、 更、再一點、等之文字列(指令本文)每次從聲音辨識裝置 被輸出時,指令本文輸入裝置306會輸入該指令本文,並 142 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---I------------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - ί線- 498290 A7 ____B7______ 五、發明說明 •依序儲存於緩衝區。本文/指令轉換裝置307若爲可輸入, 則指令本文輸入裝置306會根據輸入順序輸出每個指令本 文。另外指令本文輸入裝置306也會將分配於控制按鈕223 上之控制碼依序儲存至緩衝區。本文/指令轉換裝置307若 輸入指令本文,·則會將指令本文轉換爲對視覺裝置2而言 可輸入之控制指令。此時本文/指令轉換裝置307,會將指 令本文轉換爲移動式攝影機10之方向,亦即將以顯示器 222之中心、及移動式攝影機10之倍率爲基準之位置轉換 爲當作零點之座標,算出從移動式攝影機10之現在位置之 相對性之移動量。藉此使用者可邊看顯示器222,邊簡單 地控制移動式攝影機10。控制指令保持裝置308會利用本 文/指令轉換裝置307將被轉換之控制指令依序儲存於緩衝 區,並輸出至視覺裝置2。 第三個群組包括數位影像接收裝置309、本文插入裝 置310及影像訊號輸出裝置311。首先數位影像接收裝置 309會輸入通訊裝置7傳送之數位影像111,並輸出至本文 插入裝置310。本文插入裝置310是從地圖/本文轉換裝置 302輸入地圖本文、或是從物體數/本文轉換裝置304輸入 物體數本文、或是從指令本文輸入裝置306輸入指令本文 ,無論是何者,都會用實現覆蓋《(superimpose)功能之軟體 將地圖本文、物體數本文及指令本文插入數位影像111。 本文插入裝置310不管有無地圖本文、物體數本文及指令 本文,都會將數位影像111輸出至影像訊號輸出裝置311。 影像訊號輸出裝置311若從本文插入裝置310輸入數位影 143 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___ Β7 _____ 5. Description of the Invention (Β)) • 410 is easy to synchronize with each other. Therefore, for large-scale and regular digital circuits such as pipeline processing devices, DSPs (Digital Signal Processors), pulsating arrays, data flow machines, and parallel image processing devices, these two-dimensional networks are used to distribute clock signals from external sources. Compared with the situation, it is easy to provide a clock signal with a complete set of oranges. The three-dimensional oscillating circuit network is a network in which most of the synchronous oscillating circuits 410 arranged in a square grid and a hexagonal grid are stacked using three-dimensional LSI technology as described above. Therefore, when it is arranged in a square grid, the number of inputs of the NOR gate 406a for A side synchronization and the NOR gate 406B for B side synchronization is 6. When it is arranged in an angular grid, the NOR side 406a and B side synchronization are used for A side stepping. The number of inputs with NOR gate 406B is eight. By adjusting the position of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 of each layer, the length of the signal line can be set to the shortest. Therefore, the transmission delay time of the synchronous signal of each synchronous oscillation circuit 410 is almost equal, and the synchronous oscillation circuits 410 are easy to synchronize with each other. . These three-dimensional oscillating circuit networks are arranged in a square grid and a hexagonal grid. The data processed by the processor 101 is oriented vertically, and it can provide a phase efficiently for pulsating arrays and parallel image processing devices that want to do pipeline processing. Complete clock signal. Furthermore, when the clock signal is distributed, if the network of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 arranged in a square grid shape and a hexagonal grid shape and digital circuits such as the processor 101 and the arithmetic circuit are installed on different layers of the three-dimensional LSI, Above, for the configuration of the digital circuit, the configuration of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 will not shift, and the signal lines of the sync signals SyncAO 'and SyncBO' will not be detoured. Because the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 is not affected by the noise image of the digital circuit, 140 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- I -------- ^ --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 498290 A7 ^ ______ B7_ V. Description of the invention • Therefore, the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 will be stable action. In addition, since the digital circuit can input clock signals ClockA and ClockB from any of the synchronous oscillation circuits 410 of the network of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410, it is easy to design the digital circuit. The artificial eyeball 1, visual device 2, communication device 7 and image detector have been described before. Therefore, the central control device 22 will be explained at the end. First, the central control device 221 shown in FIG. 85 is divided into three groups. The environment map and any number of objects output by the visual device 2 are also converted into sound. Groups of map text and number of objects that can be input by the synthesis device 226; groups that convert the text output of the voice recognition device 227 into control instructions that can be input by the visual device 2; and digital images 111 output by the visual device 2 Insert map text, object count text, and instruction text groups on the text. The first group includes an environment map input device 301, a map / text conversion device 302, an object number input device 303, an object number / text conversion device 304, and a map / object number text holding device 305. First, an environmental map composed of environmental data indicating the type and location of the object area 141 is output from the visual device 2 each time, and the environmental map input device 301 inputs the environmental map and stores them in the buffer in turn. If the map / text conversion device 302 can be input, the environment map input device 301 will input each environmental data according to the input order. The map / text conversion device 302 converts the type and position of the object area 141 into a character string (map text) when inputting environmental data. At this time, the map / text conversion device 302 'regards the position of the user as the zero point, and converts the position and change of the object to 141. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ grid (210 X 297 mm) ( Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Load 16 · _line-498290 A7 ____ B7 ___———— V. Description of the invention. The direction that users often look at, that is, the coordinates based on the front, and change to use Easy-to-understand words: such as front, back, right, left, up, down, near, far, close, away, crossing, staggering, crossing, etc. Using escape-sequence and special symbols, the map / text conversion device 302 converts the position based on the orientation and magnification of the mobile camera 10 included in the environment map into a coordinate that is used as the zero point, and changes it to The aforementioned terms will be added to the map text. Therefore, the map may use different coordinates to indicate the position of the same object area 141. The map / object number text holding device 305 sequentially stores the converted map texts in the buffer area according to the map / text conversion device 302, and outputs them to the sound synthesis device 226. Similarly, on the environment map, any number of objects indicating the number of objects recorded in a certain period of time. Each time it is output from the visual device 2, the object number input device 303 will input the number of any one of the objects and sequentially store them in the buffer. Area. If the number of objects / text conversion device 304 can be input, the number of objects input device 303 will output any number of objects according to the input order. Number of objects / text conversion device 304 If any number of objects is input, the number of object regions 141 is converted into a character string (number of objects). The map / object number text holding device 305 sequentially stores the converted object numbers in the buffer according to the object number / text conversion device 304, and outputs them to the sound synthesis device 226. The second group includes a command text input device 306, a text / command conversion device 307, and a control command holding device 308. The first is the recognition result of the instructions instructed by the user. Each time the front, back, right, left, up, down, near, far, more, a little more, etc. (command text) is output from the voice recognition device, The instruction text input device 306 will input the instruction text, and 142 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --- I ------------ (Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)-ί 线-498290 A7 ____B7______ 5. Description of the invention • Stored in the buffer in order. If the text / instruction conversion device 307 is inputtable, the instruction text input device 306 outputs each instruction text according to the input order. In addition, the text input device 306 is instructed to sequentially store the control codes assigned to the control buttons 223 to the buffer. If the text / instruction conversion device 307 enters the instruction text, the instruction text is converted into a control instruction that can be input to the visual device 2. At this time, the text / instruction conversion device 307 will convert the text of the instruction to the direction of the mobile camera 10, that is, the position based on the center of the display 222 and the magnification of the mobile camera 10 will be converted to the coordinates used as the zero point and calculated. The relative amount of movement from the current position of the mobile camera 10. This allows the user to easily control the mobile camera 10 while looking at the display 222. The control instruction holding device 308 will use the text / instruction conversion device 307 to sequentially store the converted control instructions in the buffer area and output them to the vision device 2. The third group includes a digital image receiving device 309, a text insertion device 310, and an image signal output device 311. First, the digital image receiving device 309 inputs the digital image 111 transmitted by the communication device 7 and outputs the digital image 111 to the text insertion device 310. The text insertion device 310 is to input a map text from the map / text conversion device 302, or to input the text number of objects from the number of objects / text conversion device 304, or to input the instruction text from the instruction text input device 306. Regardless, it will be implemented using The software covering the (superimpose) function inserts the map text, the object count text, and the command text into the digital image 111. The text insertion device 310 outputs the digital image 111 to the image signal output device 311 regardless of whether there is a map text, an object number text, or an instruction text. If the image signal output device 311 is to input digital images from the insertion device 310 of this article, 143 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(/&gt;() 像 111,貝!]會轉換爲 NTSC、PAL、HDTV、VGA、MPEG 規 格等影像訊號,並輸出至顯示器222。 以上,雖說明了本實施形態,但本發明並非被限定於 上述之實施形態,只要是熟悉該技術的人都可實施各種形 態,在不脫離本發明之技術思想之範圍內,當然可適當地 變更本發明之構成,像這樣之變更也屬於本發明之技術範 圍。 【產業上之利用可能性】 根據申請專利範圍第1項及申請專利範圍第3項之發 明,因人工眼球1可將移動式攝影機10所拍攝之物體種類 傳送至使用者終端機4,故使用者可透過使用者終端機4 知道人工眼球1之周圍有特定之種類物體存在。因此可將 複數個人工眼球1配置在車輛、船隻、住家、建築物及太 空站等之周圍及內部,並將1個或複數個使用者終端機4 設置在特定之房子、或藉由穿戴在使用者身上,使用者可 發現接近人工眼球1之物體、或監視徘徊在人工眼球1周 圍之人。尤其是藉利用行動電話211及行動資訊終端機作 爲使用者終端機4,而使使用者即使在外出地及臥室,也 可掌握車輛、船隻、房屋、建築物及太空站等狀況。例如 ,藉在車輛周圍裝設人工眼球1,駕駿人可知道死角上有 物體存在,同時還可掌握複數個物體之位置。又,藉由爲 了拍攝車輛內部而裝設之人工眼球1,使用者可防止因將 嬰兒放在車上而致死之事故發生。另外,即使有可疑人接 近停在夜間停車場之車輛,,因人工眼球1也可將可疑人 144 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _B7_ V. Explanation of the invention (/ &gt; (Image like 111, shell!) Will be converted to NTSC, PAL, HDTV, VGA, MPEG specifications and other video signals and output to the display 222. Although the above describes the embodiment However, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. Anyone who is familiar with the technology can implement various forms. Of course, without departing from the technical idea of the present invention, the structure of the present invention can be changed as appropriate. The change also belongs to the technical scope of the present invention. [Industrial Applicability] According to the inventions in the scope of patent application No. 1 and the scope of patent application No. 3, the artificial eyeball 1 can change the type of objects captured by the mobile camera 10. It is transmitted to the user terminal 4 so that the user can know through the user terminal 4 that there are certain types of objects around the artificial eyeball 1. Therefore, a plurality of artificial eyeballs 1 can be arranged in vehicles, boats, homes, buildings and Around or inside the space station, etc., one or more user terminals 4 are installed in a specific house, or by wearing on the user, the user Find objects that are close to artificial eyeball 1, or monitor people hovering around artificial eyeball 1. Especially by using mobile phone 211 and mobile information terminal as user terminal 4, users can use it even when they are out and in the bedroom. Can grasp the status of vehicles, ships, houses, buildings, space stations, etc. For example, by installing artificial eyeballs 1 around the vehicle, the driver can know that there are objects in the dead corner, and can also grasp the positions of multiple objects. With the artificial eyeball 1 installed to photograph the interior of the vehicle, the user can prevent accidents caused by putting the baby on the car. In addition, even if a suspicious person approaches a vehicle parked in a night parking lot, the artificial eyeball 1 You can also use the 144 paper size of the suspicious person for the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 __B7 _______ 五、發明說明 •之影像傳送至使用者終端機4,故使用者無論身處何處都 可很快地予以因應,並藉由所記錄之影像,而能當做日後 車輛受害之證據。另外,若將使用者終端機4之一部分當 作監視終端機5來使用,則藉操作監視終端機5之監視人 員不斷地監視人工眼球1之周圍,而使使用者終端機4之 使用者可免去監視人工眼球1周圍之麻煩、。另一方面,因 人工眼球1會通知監視終端機5有物體接近周圍,故1個 監視人員可管理多個人工眼球1。因此保全公司及企業之 保全工作部署上就可用很少之監視人員來監視多個場所。 根據申請專利範圍第2項及申請專利範圍第3項之發 明,因人工眼球1可將移動式攝影機10所拍下之物體種類 傳送至資料庫6,使用者可透過使用者終端機4知道特定 種類之物體會存在於何時何地。因此,藉將複數個人工眼 球1配置在道路、商店街、店舖及車站等之周圍及內部, 使用者可調查人及車輛之通行量,還可從統計資料預測人 及車輛之通行量。即,說,店舖之經營者,藉由從資料庫 6所調查之店舖前之通行量及顧客之來店者數,可調整商 品之生產及庫存。尤其是藉將統計資料與天氣預報結合, 此效果會很顯著。另外,汽車駕駛者,藉從資料庫6調查 道路之塞車狀況,而訂定避開塞車路段之行駛計劃。另外 ,若把使用者終端機4之一部份當作監視終端機5使用, 則藉操作監視終端機5之監視人員不斷地監視人工眼球1 之周圍,而使使用者終端機4之使用者免於監視人工眼球 1周圍之麻煩。監視員因累積用於分析資料庫6之統計資 145 ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 幻: -1線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _B7_____ 五、發明說明 .料之專門知識’故對使用者而言並不需要用於分析,統計資 料之特別知識。因此’特約連鎖店等之組織’可迅速且有 效率地推出店舖。 根據申請專利範圍第4項之發明’藉視覺裝置2控制 移動式攝影機ίο ’而使移動式攝影機以局解析度拍攝 物體,而且使視覺裝置2辨識物體之種類·,並詳記物體之 位置。因此,藉裝上本發明’寵物型機器人可朝所搜尋之 人移動。另外,該寵物型機器人若裝上判斷人長相之裝置 及程式,則該寵物型機器人就可很容易地判斷該人是否爲 主人。 根據申請專利範圍第5項之發明’因視覺裝置2會藉 由控制移動式攝影機10’而使移動式攝影機10自動追蹤 物體,故在遠處之使用者及計算機不需要不斷地控制移動 式攝影機10。而且若物體爲人’則該人也不需一直檢查自 己是否在鏡頭上。因此’在遠處之使用者及計算機可空出 時間去做別的工作’故使用者及計算機可很有效率地工作 ,並且通訊裝置7也不需不斷地傳送控制指令。例如’電 視記者藉在事件、事故現場架設本發明’而使單獨一人拍 攝報導及採訪,然後能直接傳送至無線電台。即,個人在 網際網路上傳送動態影像時,本發明就成爲有用之攝影器 材。又,視覺裝置2藉判斷在移動式攝影機10所拍攝之動 態影像中是否有物體映出,而使通訊裝置7僅會傳送映出 有物體之數位影像111及遮罩影像148,故即使是通訊速度 慢之通訊裝置7也可有效率地傳送映有物體之動態影像。 146 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) ----I----1------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) » ·498290 A7 __B7 _______ 5. The description of the invention • The image is transmitted to the user terminal 4, so the user can respond quickly no matter where they are, and the recorded image can be used as a vehicle damage in the future. evidence. In addition, if a part of the user terminal 4 is used as the monitoring terminal 5, the monitoring personnel operating the monitoring terminal 5 constantly monitors the surroundings of the artificial eyeball 1, so that the user of the user terminal 4 can Eliminate the trouble of monitoring around the artificial eyeball 1. On the other hand, since the artificial eyeball 1 notifies the monitoring terminal 5 that an object is approaching the surroundings, one monitor can manage multiple artificial eyeballs 1. Therefore, the security company and enterprise security deployment can use a small number of monitors to monitor multiple sites. According to the inventions in the scope of patent application No. 2 and the scope of patent application No. 3, because the artificial eyeball 1 can transmit the types of objects captured by the mobile camera 10 to the database 6, the user can know the specific through the user terminal 4 When and where kinds of objects exist. Therefore, by arranging a plurality of personal eyeballs 1 around and inside roads, shopping streets, shops, and stations, the user can investigate the traffic of people and vehicles, and can also predict the traffic of people and vehicles from statistical data. In other words, the store operator can adjust the production and inventory of the product by the traffic volume in front of the store and the number of customers who visit the store from the database 6. This effect can be significant especially by combining statistics with weather forecasts. In addition, the car driver investigates the traffic jam situation on the road from the database 6 and formulates a driving plan to avoid the traffic jam. In addition, if a part of the user terminal 4 is used as the monitoring terminal 5, the monitoring personnel who operate the monitoring terminal 5 constantly monitors the surroundings of the artificial eyeball 1 to make the user of the user terminal 4 Avoid the trouble of monitoring around the artificial eyeball 1. The monitor has accumulated statistics for analysis database 145 ----------------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Magic: -1 line · This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _B7_____ V. Description of the invention. The expertise of the material 'so it is not necessary for users to use it for analysis, special knowledge of statistical data . Therefore, 'specialized chain stores and other organizations' can quickly and efficiently launch stores. According to invention No. 4 of the scope of the patent application, the mobile camera ο is controlled by the visual device 2 so that the mobile camera captures an object at a local resolution, and the visual device 2 recognizes the type of the object and records the position of the object in detail. Therefore, the pet-type robot according to the present invention can be moved toward the person being searched. In addition, if the pet-type robot is equipped with a device and a program for judging the appearance of a person, the pet-type robot can easily determine whether the person is the owner. According to invention No. 5 of the scope of the patent application, 'Because the visual device 2 will control the mobile camera 10 by automatically controlling the mobile camera 10', users and computers at a distance do not need to constantly control the mobile camera. 10. And if the object is a person, that person does n’t need to check whether he is on the lens all the time. Therefore, 'the user and the computer in the distance can free up time to do other work', so the user and the computer can work very efficiently, and the communication device 7 does not need to continuously transmit control instructions. For example, a 'television reporter sets up the invention at the scene of an incident or accident' so that a single person can take a report and interview, and then can directly transmit it to a radio station. That is, the present invention becomes a useful photographic device when individuals transmit moving images on the Internet. In addition, the visual device 2 determines whether an object is reflected in the moving image captured by the mobile camera 10, and the communication device 7 transmits only the digital image 111 and the mask image 148 showing the object, so even the communication The slow communication device 7 can also efficiently transmit a moving image reflecting an object. 146 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) ---- I ---- 1 ------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) »·

498290 A7 ___B7__ 五、發明說明(/(^p 因此,本發明可有效地利用行動電話211等通訊電路容量 有限之媒體。特別是因視覺裝置2容易抽出臉當作物體區 域141,故藉將行動電話211連接上遠處之電腦系統,而使 使用者可把本發明當作個人認證機器來使用。當然本發明 藉背景上設定適當之影像’而保護使用者之隱私,並且使 用者也可愉快地將本發明用於大頭貼之攝影。再者,因只 在視覺裝置2辨識物體時’通訊裝置7才會傳送數位影像 111及遮罩影像H8,故藉在辦公室、住屋、工廠、道路、 車輛等裝置本發明,而使使用者及保全公司也可利用本發 明當作便宜之監視裝置。 根據申請專利範圍第6項之發明,相較於使用固定於 眼鏡上之CCD攝影機之情況,移動式攝影機10做搖攝、 俯仰、翻滾及變焦,人工眼球1即使使用相同之集積度之 CCD也可實現寬廣視野及高度視力。而且因視覺裝置2會 自動地搜尋物體,故可事先發現行人324、腳踏車及汽車 321等,接近使用者之物體,使用者就可安全地行走。雖 然使用者會辨識物體,但是因有用之資訊係由視覺裝置2 提供給使用者,故本發明與單純使用CCD攝影機之情況比 較起來,可減輕使用者之負擔,本發明還可提供使用者舒 適之生活。另外使用電極陣列端子214,若可從使用者之 腦中取出控制直接讓眼球轉動之神經之電氣刺激,視覺裝 置2可使用該電氣刺激控制移動式攝影機10。再者移動式 攝影機10在控制搖攝、俯仰、翻滾及變焦之機構上使用多 自由度馬達時,因多自由度馬達是很接近實際眼球形狀之 147 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___B7__ 5. Description of the invention (/ (^ p Therefore, the present invention can effectively use media with limited communication circuit capacity, such as the mobile phone 211. Especially since the visual device 2 easily extracts the face as the object area 141, the action is taken by The telephone 211 is connected to a remote computer system, so that the user can use the present invention as a personal authentication device. Of course, the present invention protects the privacy of the user by setting appropriate images in the background, and the user can also be happy The present invention is applied to the photographing of posters. Furthermore, since the communication device 7 transmits the digital image 111 and the mask image H8 only when the visual device 2 recognizes the object, it is borrowed in the office, house, factory, road The invention of a device such as a vehicle or a vehicle enables users and security companies to use the invention as a cheap surveillance device. According to the invention in the scope of patent application No. 6, compared to the case of using a CCD camera fixed on the glasses, The mobile camera 10 performs panning, tilting, rolling and zooming, and the artificial eyeball 1 can achieve a wide field of view and a high degree of vision even if the CCD with the same integration degree is used. And because the visual device 2 automatically searches for objects, pedestrians 324, bicycles, cars 321, etc. can be found in advance, and objects that are close to the user can walk safely. Although the user recognizes the object, it is useful information The visual device 2 is provided to the user, so the present invention can reduce the burden on the user compared with the case of simply using a CCD camera, and the present invention can also provide a comfortable life for the user. In addition, if the electrode array terminal 214 is used, The electrical stimulation of the nerve that controls the direct movement of the eyeball is taken out of the user's brain, and the visual device 2 can use the electrical stimulation to control the mobile camera 10. Furthermore, the mobile camera 10 is a mechanism for controlling panning, tilting, rolling and zooming. When using a multi-degree-of-freedom motor, the multi-degree-of-freedom motor is very close to the actual eyeball shape of 147. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page)

498290 A7 _ B7__ 五、發明說明(/(^Γ) •球形,故很容易將人工眼球1埋進眼窩。特別是多自由度 馬達係使用壓電晶片之超音波馬達及壓電暫存器時’多自 由度馬達可做到省空間、低重量及低消耗電力’使用者可 減輕來自混亂、不小心之事故或重量之不安感。使用者將 人工眼球1埋入眼窩時,使用者可戴上太陽眼鏡讓人工眼 球1所面對之人不容易看到,對雙方而言都會減輕心理上 之負擔。再者透過眼窩將電極陣列端子214埋進視神經、 外側漆狀體、後頭葉、側頭葉及頭頂葉中’醫生也不需要 在使用者之頭蓋骨上開洞,使用者也不需要擔心在頭蓋骨 外有管線跑出。因此本發明可減輕使用者之負擔。 根據申請專利範圍第7項之發明,以視覺裝置2進行 之影像處理幾乎之部分係被裝設在移動式攝影機1〇之拍攝 部分。亦即本發明雖然是省空間及低消耗電力’還是可高 速做到影像處理。本發明可減輕使用者之負擔’並容易做 到人工眼球1之維護。 根據申請專利範圍第8項之發明,位置/大小/傾斜度 檢測裝置44以像素單位平行地進行處理,可從形成邊緣資 訊影像115、物體區域影像142及色彩資訊影像172檢測物 體之位置、大小及傾斜度。而且物體之形狀即使事前不知 道,位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44也可求出物體之傾斜度 。位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44從用錄影機拍攝之動態影 像之畫面影像、或用數相位機拍攝,用掃描器讀取之靜止 影像,也利用於辨識複數個物體之前處理,可高速有便宜 地達到動態影像及靜止影像之模式辨識演算法等。位置/大 148 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 _ B7__ 5. Description of the invention (/ (^ Γ) • Spherical, so it is easy to bury artificial eyeball 1 into the eye socket. Especially when the multi-degree-of-freedom motor is an ultrasonic motor using a piezoelectric chip and a piezoelectric register 'Multi-degree-of-freedom motor can save space, low weight and low power consumption' The user can reduce the anxiety from chaos, accidents or weight. When the user implants the artificial eyeball 1 into the eye socket, the user can wear it Wearing sunglasses makes it difficult for the person facing artificial eyeball 1 to see, and it will reduce the psychological burden on both sides. Furthermore, the electrode array terminal 214 is buried into the optic nerve, lateral lacquer body, posterior lobes, and sides through the eye sockets. In the scalp and parietal lobes, the doctor does not need to make holes in the cranium of the user, and the user does not need to worry about a pipeline running out of the cranium. Therefore, the present invention can reduce the burden on the user. According to the invention of the present invention, almost part of the image processing performed by the visual device 2 is installed in the shooting portion of the mobile camera 10. That is, although the present invention is space saving and low power consumption, it is also The image processing can be performed at high speed. The present invention can reduce the burden on the user 'and facilitate the maintenance of the artificial eyeball 1. According to the invention of the eighth aspect of the patent application, the position / size / tilt detection device 44 is parallel in pixel units. After processing, the position, size, and inclination of the object can be detected from the formation of the edge information image 115, the object area image 142, and the color information image 172. Moreover, even if the shape of the object is unknown, the position / size / inclination detection device 44 can Obtain the inclination of the object. The position / size / inclination detection device 44 is also used to identify multiple images from a still image of a moving image captured by a video camera or a digital phase machine and read by a scanner. Objects can be processed beforehand, and can achieve the pattern recognition algorithms of moving images and still images at high speed and cheaply. Position / Large 148 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the back first (Notes for filling in this page)

498290 A7 ____B7_ __ 五、發明說明(你έ) •小/傾斜度檢測裝置44也可當作辨識構造之前處理使用。 陣列運算裝置100因不輸出8個移動源重複資訊183 ’故從 位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44輸入重複資訊影像132及傾 斜角度之系統,可讓通訊機構單純。 根據申請專利範圍第9項之發明,陣列運算裝置100 可在短時間內將大量之資料轉送至附近之陣列運算裝置 100。因此像移動源重複資訊影像184那樣必須將多數之資 料轉送至附近時,本發明不會因通訊之瓶頸就降低性能’ 可做到申請專利範圍第8項之發明。另外要一起執行幾個 局部平行影像處理時,本發明也可有效率地執行這些局部 平行影像處理。再者各個控制器103因具備前輸入資料暫 存器61及結果資料暫存器62,故陣列運算裝置1〇〇可一起 輸出入複數個廣料。特別是本發明,使用複數個影像,對 執行局部平行影像處理那樣之邊緣資訊形成裝置及區域正 規化裝置很有效。而在跨層之陣列運算裝置100之間之通 訊,會利用幾個控制器之前輸入資料暫存器61及結果 資料暫存器62,LSI設計者可有效地活用三維LSI之衝撞 〇 根據申請專利範圍第10項之發明,陣列運算裝置100 可在短時間內將大量之資料轉送至附近之陣列運算裝置 100。因此像移動源重複資訊影像184那樣必須轉送多數之 資料到附近時’本發明不會因通訊之瓶頸就降低性能,可 做到申請專利範圍第8項之發明。另外要一起執行幾個局 部平行影像處理時,本發明也可有效率地執行這些局部平 149 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) ---------------------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498290 A7 _- — B7498290 A7 ____B7_ __ V. Description of the Invention (Your Hand) • The small / inclination detection device 44 can also be used as a pre-recognition structure. Since the array computing device 100 does not output repeating information 183 of eight moving sources, a system for inputting a repeating information image 132 and an inclination angle from the position / size / tilt detection device 44 can make the communication mechanism simple. According to the invention in the ninth scope of the patent application, the array computing device 100 can transfer a large amount of data to the nearby array computing device 100 in a short time. Therefore, when it is necessary to transfer most of the data to the vicinity like the moving source repetitive information image 184, the present invention does not reduce performance due to the bottleneck of communication. The invention of the eighth aspect of the patent application can be achieved. In addition, when several local parallel image processes are to be performed together, the present invention can also efficiently perform these local parallel image processes. Furthermore, since each controller 103 includes a front input data register 61 and a result data register 62, the array computing device 100 can output and input a plurality of wide materials together. In particular, the present invention is effective for an edge information forming device and an area normalization device such as a local parallel image process using a plurality of images. For the communication between the cross-layer array computing devices 100, the data register 61 and the result data register 62 are input before several controllers. LSI designers can effectively utilize the impact of three-dimensional LSIs. With the invention of the tenth item, the array computing device 100 can transfer a large amount of data to the nearby array computing device 100 in a short time. Therefore, when it is necessary to transfer a large amount of data to a nearby place like a moving source repeat information image 184, the present invention does not reduce performance due to the bottleneck of communication, and can achieve the eighth invention of the patent application scope. In addition, when several local parallel image processing is to be performed together, the present invention can also efficiently perform these local flat 149 paper sizes to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) ------- -------------- ^ --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498290 A7 _- — B7

--------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 行影像處理。本發明將控制器103安裝在獨立之層,而且 控制器103因會透過位址匯流排51及資料匯流排52,與處 理器及記憶體102通訊,故LSI設計者只要配合需要 增加安裝控制器103之層數,就可提高陣列運算裝置1〇〇 之間之通訊性能。另外組合申請專利範圍第8項及第9項 之發明,LSI可高密度地集積控制器103。. 線· 根據申請專利範圍第11項之發明,視覺裝置2在處理 一定之像素數之動態影像時,視覺裝置2,與使用陣列運 算裝置100時比較起來,只需要少數之虛擬陣列運算裝置 105。亦即以過去之LSI技術可安裝之陣列運算裝置100之 數未滿動態影像之像素數時,LSI之設計者利用虛擬陣列 運算裝置105,可將視覺裝置2安裝於LSI上。還有像位置 /大小/傾斜度檢測裝置44那樣之陣列運算裝置100必須與 鄰接之陣列運算裝置100通訊多數之計算資料時,虛擬陣 列運算裝置105因只要在記億體102內參照這些計算資料 即可,故LSI之設計者,會適當地決定分配於虛擬陣列運 算裝置105上之陣列運算裝置100數,也可高速地讓視覺 裝置2動作。而且陣列運算裝置100因在虛擬陣列運算裝 置105內可共有程式及查用表(look-up table),故資料處理 裝置110可減少整體之記憶體102之消耗量。 根據申請專利範圍第12、13及14項之發明,CCD及 CMOS處理器之製造廠商,該製造廠商可直接使用保有之 LSI、CCD及CMOS製造技術,以製造出高功能之處理器。 因此製造廠商因可在短時間且用便宜價錢製造高功能之處 150 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 Γ----— _Β7__ 五、發明說明(/¾^) •理器’故本發明之使用者,可在住屋、便利商店、超級市 場、辦公室、工廠、一般道路、停車場、車站、公益機關 、汽車、船隻、及太空站上,利用監視裝置、保安裝置、 搜尋裝置、警戒裝置、跟縱裝置、計算裝置、寵物型機器 人 '櫃檯機器人、作業機器人、及福祉機器人等各種用途 中之高功能處理器。而本發明中,CCD及CMOS處理器之 設計者,只將1個功能柱201排列於二維格子狀上,可拍 攝適當之大小影像,並容易設計高功能處理器。因此這些 設計者,可在短期間內,且以便宜價格設計高功能處理器 〇 根據申請專利範圍第15及16項之發明,即使時鐘訊 號之頻率變高,藉著以傳送延遲時間在時鐘訊號之週期內 的方式將互鎖式計數器416分散配置在LSI整體上,可讓 全部的互鎖式計數器416之計數値均一致。特別是使用要 作成時鐘訊號之同步式振盪電路410,因即使時鐘訊號之 頻率變高,時鐘訊號會LSI整體同步,故可讓全部之互鎖 式計數器416同步。因此互鎖式計數器416及同步式振盪 電路410很容易從其他之數位電路被分離,故LSI設計者 ,可將互鎖式計數器416及同步式振盪電路410、與除了互 鎖式計數器416及同步式振盪電路410以外之數位電路’ 獨立並局速化。因此LSI設計者’很谷易設δ十對應局頻率 之時鐘訊號之LSI。本發明,對管線處理裝置、DSP(Digital Signal Processor)、脈動陣列、資料流機器、及平行影像處 理裝置等越大規模性能就越提昇之平行系統整體上,因可 151 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) I-----II----- i I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: --線· 498290 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(/q) 提供與時鐘訊號同步之分周訊號及定時器岔斷訊號(timer interrupt signal),古夂LSI設計者可避免傳送延遲時間之問題 ,也可設計大規模平行系統。 根據申請專利範圍第17項之發明,配置於LSI整體上 之數位電路可從LSI之任一場所同時接收被發送之訊號。 尤其是像系統LSI那樣1個LSI上裝設有複數個功能區塊 之情況,時鐘訊號之頻率越高,就越難以符合回復訊號、 岔斷訊號及輸出入訊號之時間點之方式變更每個功能區塊 之設計。不過使用本發明,可不管每各功能區塊之配置而 只要考慮最大傳送延遲時間就可控制回復訊號、岔斷訊號 及輸出入訊號之時間點,故LSI設計者幾乎不用變更這些 功能區塊之設計,就可將這些功能區塊裝設於1個LSI中 。再者像 SIMD(Single Instruction Stream Multi Data Stream) 型多重處理器那樣之多數之處理器101輸入相同之指令時 ,不論從記憶指令之記憶體102到各處理器101之訊號之 傳送延遲時間是否不同,全部的處理器101都必須在同一 時間點動作。不過,因爲藉使用本發明,可與時鐘頻率無 關地將指令同時提供到所有處理器101上,故LSI設計者 可很谷易地設計處理器101。 根據申請專利範圍第18及19項之發明,與像TTL及 ECL —樣之雙極半導體、及CMOS等之半導體製造技術無 關’而只要追加簡單之電路就可讓LSI整體之數位電路同 步。尤其是近年來藉由數位電路之高速化而使時鐘頻率變 高’維持LSI整體之同步性越來越困難。因此,藉使用本 152 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- -線· 498290 __B7 _____ 五、發明說明(/^1) 發明,而使半導體廠商可很容易地設計高速動作所需要之 處理器101及測量機。再者,互鎖裝置中一部分之同步式 振盪電路410會從像晶體振盪器408那樣安定之振盪電路 輸入同步訊號,也可將互鎖裝置整體之時鐘頻率去配合晶 體振盪器408之振動數。本發明’在管線處理裝置、 DSP(Digital Signal Processor)、脈動陣列、資料流機器、及 平行影像處理裝置等越大規模功能就越提昇之平行系統整 體上,因可提供時鐘訊號同步之分周訊號及定時器岔斷訊 號,故LSI設計者可避免傳送延遲時間之問題,也可設計 大規模平行系統。 【圖式之簡單說明】 第1圖,係將人工眼球所產生之資訊傳送至使用者終 端機之資訊收集系統之說明圖。第2圖,係裝設人工眼球 之行動電話之說明圖。第3圖,係在汽車之後方裝設移動 式攝影機及視覺裝置時之說明圖。第4圖,係在輪椅後方 裝設移動式攝影機及視覺裝置時之說明圖。第5圖,係由 監視終端機不斷地監視人工眼球所產生之資訊,配合需要 傳送至使用者終端機之資訊收集系統之說明圖。第6圖, 係將人工眼球所產生之資訊儲存於資料庫中,並由使用者 終端機適當地檢索資料庫之資訊收集系統之說明圖。第7 圖,係記錄從控制移動式攝影機之視覺裝置收集之物體種 類及位置形成之環境資料、物體數及數位影像之資料庫記 錄之說明圖。第8圖,係將人工眼球產生之資訊儲存於資 料庫中,並由監視終端機檢索適當之資料庫,再配合需要 153 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----II---· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ιδ. 線- 498290 A7 ____B7___— ____ 五、發明說明(丨义|) 傳送至使用者終端機之資訊收集系統之說明圖。第9圖’ 係由1個人工眼球與1個使用者終端機所構成之資訊收集 系統之方塊圖。第10圖,係具備移動式攝影機、視覺裝置 及通訊功能之人工眼球之說明圖。第11圖,係裝設在人工 眼球上之通訊裝置之方塊圖。第12圖,係表示本實施例之 影像壓縮裝置之演算法之流程圖。第13圖.,係具有移動式 攝影機、視覺裝置、刺激產生器 '電極陣列端子、連接器 及電池之人工眼球之說明圖。第14圖,係控制移動式攝影 機尋找物體,並計算物體數之視覺裝置之方塊圖。第15圖 ,係以鏡片光軸爲中心運轉移動式攝影機時之影像座標之 說明圖。第16圖,係排列成格子狀之陣列運算裝置之方塊 圖。第17圖,係順序附於逆時鐘方向轉動之8附近號碼之 說明圖。第18:圖,係表示本實施例影像記憶裝置之演算法 之流程圖。第19圖,係針對數位影像中特定色彩產生色彩 資訊時之說明圖。第20圖,係表示本實施例色彩資訊產生 裝置之演算法之流程圖。第21圖,係使用數位影像產生粗 邊緣資訊時之說明圖。第22圖,係表示本實施例邊緣資訊 產生裝置之演算法之流程圖。第23圖,係使用數位影像將 粗邊緣資訊形成爲形成邊緣資訊時之說明圖。第24圖,係 表示本實施例邊緣資訊形成裝置之演算法之流程圖。第25 圖,係將從低解析度數位影像所產生之低解析度粗邊緣資 訊形成爲形成邊緣資訊時之說明圖。第26圖,係由切出從 低解析度數位影像產生之低解析度粗邊緣資訊區域形成爲 形成邊緣資訊時之說明圖。第27圖’係檢測出邊緣資訊影 154 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) • I II —--— — — — — --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) =0 · 參 498290 A7 ___B7_ 五、發明說明(/^丄) •像中之物體位置及大小時之說明圖。第28圖,係表示本實 施例之位置/大小檢測裝置之演算法之流程圖。第29圖, 係檢測出物體區域像素中之物體位置及大小時之說明圖。 第30圖,係檢測出邊緣資訊影像中之物體位置、大小及傾 斜度時之說明圖。第31圖,係表示本實施例之位置/大小/ 傾斜度檢測裝置之演算法之流程圖。第32圖,係檢測物體 區域影像中之物體位置、大小及傾斜度時之說明圖。第33 圖,係移動源重複資訊舉例之說明圖。第34圖,係檢測色 彩資訊影像中紋理之位置、大小及傾斜度時之說明圖。第 35圖,係將數位影像之分離物體區域正規化時之說明圖。 第36圖,係表示本實施例之區域正規化裝置之演算法之流 程圖。第37圖,係使用分離物體區域影像從數位影像產生 虛擬影像時之說明圖。第38圖,係表示本實施例之虛擬裝 置之演算法之流程圖。第39圖,係表示本實施例之影像保 持裝置之演算法之流程圖。第40圖,係對於正規化影像從 樣板影像中做模式匹配時之說明圖。第41圖,係表示本實 施例之模式匹配裝置之演算法之流程圖。第42圖,係表示 三角形之邊緣資訊分離爲三角形之內側區域與外側區域之 狀態之說明圖。第43圖,係表示本實施例之物體/背景分 離裝置之演算法之流程圖。第44圖,係表示虛線狀態之三 角形之邊緣資訊分離爲虛線三角形之內側區域與外側區域 之狀態之說明圖。第45圖,係表示2個重疊三角形之邊緣 資訊分離爲2個三角形區域與背景區域之狀態之說明圖。 第46圖,係表示重疊2個圓形物體區域時之虛線狀態之邊 155 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)-------------- Install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Image processing. In the present invention, the controller 103 is installed on an independent layer, and because the controller 103 communicates with the processor and the memory 102 through the address bus 51 and the data bus 52, the LSI designer needs to add a controller to the installation as needed. The number of layers of 103 can improve the communication performance between the array computing devices 100. In addition, the inventions of the eighth and ninth patent applications are combined, and the LSI can integrate the controller 103 at a high density. Line · According to the 11th invention of the scope of patent application, when the visual device 2 processes a fixed number of pixels of dynamic images, the visual device 2 requires only a few virtual array computing devices 105 compared with the array computing device 100. . That is, when the number of array computing devices 100 that can be installed with the conventional LSI technology is less than the number of pixels of a moving image, the LSI designer can use the virtual array computing device 105 to mount the visual device 2 on the LSI. In addition, when the array computing device 100 such as the position / size / tilt detection device 44 must communicate with most of the computing data of the adjacent array computing device 100, the virtual array computing device 105 only needs to refer to these computing data in the recorder 102. That is, the designer of the LSI can appropriately determine the number of 100 array computing devices allocated to the virtual array computing device 105, and can also operate the visual device 2 at high speed. Furthermore, since the array computing device 100 can share programs and look-up tables in the virtual array computing device 105, the data processing device 110 can reduce the consumption of the entire memory 102. According to the inventions in the scope of patent applications Nos. 12, 13, and 14, manufacturers of CCD and CMOS processors can directly use their own LSI, CCD, and CMOS manufacturing technologies to manufacture high-performance processors. Therefore, the manufacturer can manufacture high-function parts in a short time and at a low price. 150 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 Γ ----— _Β7__ V. Description of the invention (/ ¾ ^) • Controller 'So users of the present invention can use it in housing, convenience stores, supermarkets, offices, factories, general roads, parking lots, stations, public welfare agencies, cars, ships, and space stations. High-performance processors for various applications such as surveillance devices, security devices, search devices, alert devices, tracking devices, computing devices, pet-type robots' counter robots, work robots, and welfare robots. In the present invention, the designer of the CCD and CMOS processors arranges only one functional column 201 on a two-dimensional grid, which can capture an image of an appropriate size, and it is easy to design a high-function processor. Therefore, these designers can design high-performance processors in a short period of time and at a low price. According to the inventions in the 15th and 16th of the patent application scope, even if the frequency of the clock signal becomes high, the clock signal is transmitted by the delay time. The interlocking counters 416 are dispersedly arranged on the LSI as a whole within the period, so that the counts of all the interlocking counters 416 are consistent. In particular, a synchronous oscillation circuit 410 to be used as a clock signal is used. Since the clock signal is synchronized with the entire LSI even if the frequency of the clock signal becomes high, all the interlocked counters 416 can be synchronized. Therefore, the interlocked counter 416 and the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 can be easily separated from other digital circuits. Therefore, LSI designers can synchronize the interlocked counter 416 and the synchronous oscillating circuit 410 with other than the interlocked counter 416 and synchronous Digital circuits other than the oscillation circuit 410 are independent and localized. Therefore, the LSI designer 'can easily set the LSI with a clock signal of δ ten corresponding to the office frequency. According to the present invention, a parallel system having a large-scale performance, such as a pipeline processing device, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), a pulsating array, a data stream machine, and a parallel image processing device, as a whole, has an improved performance. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) I ----- II ----- i I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order:-line · 498290 A7 _B7_ 5 Explanation of the invention (/ q) Provides a weekly signal and a timer interrupt signal that are synchronized with the clock signal. Guru LSI designers can avoid the problem of transmission delay time and can also design large-scale parallel systems. According to the invention of claim 17 in the scope of patent application, a digital circuit arranged on the entire LSI can simultaneously receive transmitted signals from any place of the LSI. Especially in the case of multiple function blocks on one LSI like a system LSI, the higher the frequency of the clock signal, the more difficult it is to change each of the methods of responding to the signal, the interrupt signal and the time point of the input and output Design of functional blocks. However, using the present invention, regardless of the configuration of each functional block, as long as the maximum transmission delay time is considered, the time point of the reply signal, the break signal and the input / output signal can be controlled, so the LSI designer hardly needs to change the functional blocks. Design, these functional blocks can be installed in one LSI. Furthermore, when multiple processors 101, such as a SIMD (Single Instruction Stream Multi Data Stream) type multiprocessor, input the same command, whether the transmission delay time of the signal from the memory 102 storing the instruction to each processor 101 is different All processors 101 must operate at the same time. However, since the present invention can provide instructions to all processors 101 at the same time regardless of the clock frequency, the LSI designer can easily design the processors 101. According to the inventions in claims 18 and 19 of the scope of patent application, it has nothing to do with semiconductor manufacturing technologies such as TTL and ECL, such as bipolar semiconductors, and CMOS, etc. As long as simple circuits are added, the digital circuits of the entire LSI can be synchronized. In particular, in recent years, by increasing the speed of digital circuits, the clock frequency has been increased ', and it has become increasingly difficult to maintain the synchronization of the entire LSI. Therefore, the use of this 152 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -------------- install --- (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page for more details) Order--line · 498290 __B7 _____ V. Description of Invention (/ ^ 1) Inventions allow semiconductor manufacturers to easily design processors 101 and measuring machines required for high-speed operation. In addition, a part of the synchronous oscillation circuit 410 in the interlock device may input a synchronization signal from a stable oscillation circuit like the crystal oscillator 408, and the entire clock frequency of the interlock device may be matched with the vibration number of the crystal oscillator 408. According to the present invention, in the parallel system as a whole, which has a larger scale function, such as a pipeline processing device, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), a pulsating array, a data stream machine, and a parallel image processing device, the clock signal synchronization can be provided for each cycle. The signal and the timer interrupt the signal, so the LSI designer can avoid the problem of transmission delay time, and can also design a large-scale parallel system. [Brief description of the diagram] Figure 1 is an illustration of an information collection system that transmits information generated by an artificial eyeball to a user terminal. Figure 2 is an explanatory diagram of a mobile phone equipped with an artificial eyeball. Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram when a mobile camera and a vision device are installed behind a car. Fig. 4 is an explanatory diagram when a mobile camera and a vision device are installed behind the wheelchair. Fig. 5 is an explanatory diagram of an information collection system that is continuously monitored by the monitoring terminal to generate information from the artificial eyeball and cooperates with the information that needs to be transmitted to the user terminal. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of an information collection system in which information generated by an artificial eyeball is stored in a database and a user terminal appropriately retrieves the database. Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram of a database record that records environmental data, number of objects, and digital images formed by the types and locations of objects collected from the vision device controlling the mobile camera. Figure 8 is the information generated by the artificial eyeballs is stored in the database, and the appropriate database is retrieved by the monitoring terminal, and 153 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ) ----- II --- · II (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ιδ. Line-498290 A7 ____ B7 ___— ____ V. Description of the invention (丨 义 |) Transmitted to the user terminal An illustration of an information collection system. Fig. 9 'is a block diagram of an information collection system composed of a manual eyeball and a user terminal. Fig. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an artificial eyeball having a mobile camera, a vision device, and a communication function. Fig. 11 is a block diagram of a communication device installed on an artificial eyeball. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the image compression device of this embodiment. Fig. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an artificial eyeball having a mobile camera, a vision device, a stimulus generator's electrode array terminals, a connector, and a battery. Fig. 14 is a block diagram of a visual device that controls a mobile camera to find an object and counts the number of objects. Fig. 15 is an explanatory diagram of image coordinates when the mobile camera is operated with the optical axis of the lens as a center. Fig. 16 is a block diagram of an array computing device arranged in a grid pattern. Fig. 17 is an explanatory diagram sequentially attached to numbers around 8 which are turned counterclockwise. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the image memory device of this embodiment. Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram when color information is generated for a specific color in a digital image. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the color information generating device of this embodiment. Fig. 21 is an explanatory diagram when rough edge information is generated using a digital image. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the edge information generating device in this embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram when rough edge information is formed into edge information using a digital image. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the edge information forming apparatus of this embodiment. Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram when forming low-resolution coarse-edge information generated from low-resolution digital images into edge information. Fig. 26 is an explanatory diagram when cutting out a low-resolution coarse edge information region generated from a low-resolution digital image to form edge information. Figure 27 'Detection of edge information shadow 154 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) • I II —-— — — — —--(Please read the Please fill in this page again for the matters needing attention) = 0 · Refer to 498290 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (/ ^ 丄) • An illustration of the position and size of the objects in the image. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing the algorithm of the position / size detection device of this embodiment. Fig. 29 is an explanatory diagram when the position and size of an object in pixels in the object area are detected. Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram when the position, size, and inclination of an object in the edge information image are detected. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the position / size / tilt detection device of this embodiment. Fig. 32 is an explanatory diagram when detecting the position, size and inclination of an object in the image of the object area. Figure 33 is an explanatory diagram of an example of duplicate information of a mobile source. Figure 34 is an explanatory diagram when detecting the position, size, and inclination of the texture in the color information image. Fig. 35 is an explanatory diagram when the separated object area of a digital image is normalized. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the area normalization device of this embodiment. Fig. 37 is an explanatory diagram when a virtual image is generated from a digital image using an image of a separated object area. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the virtual device of this embodiment. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the image holding device of this embodiment. Fig. 40 is an explanatory diagram when pattern matching is performed on the normalized image from the template image. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of a pattern matching device in this embodiment. Fig. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which edge information of a triangle is separated into an inner region and an outer region of the triangle. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing an algorithm of the object / background separation device of this embodiment. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which edge information of a triangle in a broken state is separated into an inner region and an outer region of the dotted triangle. Fig. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which edge information of two overlapping triangles is separated into two triangle regions and a background region. Figure 46 shows the edge of the dotted line when two circular object areas are overlapped. 155 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

498290 A7 ___B7 —_ 五、發明說明(tfi) .緣資訊分離爲2個圓形區域與背景區域之狀態之說明圖。 第47圖,係陣列運算裝置之內部結構之方塊圖。第48圖 ,係控制器之方塊圖。第49圖,係表示旗標編碼器之輸出 入訊號之說明圖。第50圖,係表示旗標編碼器之輸出入訊 號之說明圖。第51圖,係表示處理器透過控制器將資料傳 送至鄰接之陣列運算裝置之演算法之流程圖。第52圖’係 表示控制器從鄰接之陣列運算裝置接收資料之演算法之流 程圖。第53圖,係表示處理器從上輸入電阻接收資料之演 算法之流程圖。第54圖,係將5個控制器配置在平面上時 之陣列運算裝置之說明圖。第55圖,係5堆積個控制器時 之陣列運算裝置之說明圖。第56圖,係將9個陣列運算裝 置當作1個假設陣列運算裝置時之說明圖。第57圖’係當 ' 包含於1個假設陣列運算裝置之9個陣列運算裝置上附有 控制器用之分配號碼時之說明圖。第58圖,係依次儲存9 個陣列運算裝置輸出之9個結果資料之移位暫存器之說明 圖。第59圖,係用個別陣列運算裝置執行每個處理之人工 眼球用處理器之功能柱(functional column)方塊圖。第60圖 ,係排列二維格子狀上之功能柱時之處理器之方塊圖。第 61圖,係用1個陣列運算裝置執行所有處理之人工眼球用 處理器之功能柱方塊圖。第62圖’係用1個假設陣列運算 裝置執行所有處理之人工眼球用處理器之功能柱方塊圖。 第63圖,係對大型積體電路之封裝面垂直地封裝功能柱時 之處理器之方塊圖。第64圖’係基本之互鎖式計數器之電 路圖。第65圖,係由3個互鎖式計數器所構成之網路方塊 156 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 ___B7 —_ 5. Description of the invention (tfi). An illustration of the separation of edge information into two circular areas and a background area. Figure 47 is a block diagram of the internal structure of an array computing device. Figure 48 is a block diagram of the controller. Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the input and output signals of a flag encoder. Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the input and output signals of a flag encoder. Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the algorithm of the processor transmitting data to the adjacent array computing device through the controller. Fig. 52 'is a flowchart showing an algorithm in which a controller receives data from an adjacent array computing device. Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing an algorithm for the processor to receive data from the input resistor. Fig. 54 is an explanatory diagram of an array computing device when five controllers are arranged on a plane. Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram of an array computing device when five controllers are stacked. Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram when nine array operation devices are regarded as one hypothetical array operation device. Fig. 57 'is an explanatory diagram when the assigned number for the controller is attached to 9 array computing devices included in one hypothetical array computing device. Fig. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a shift register which sequentially stores 9 result data output from 9 array computing devices. Fig. 59 is a functional column block diagram of an artificial eyeball processor that executes each process using an individual array computing device. Figure 60 is a block diagram of the processor when the functional columns are arranged on a two-dimensional grid. Fig. 61 is a functional block diagram of an artificial eyeball processor that performs all processing using one array computing device. Fig. 62 'is a functional block diagram of an artificial eyeball processor that performs all processing using a hypothetical array computing device. Figure 63 is a block diagram of a processor when a functional pillar is vertically packaged on a packaging surface of a large integrated circuit. Fig. 64 'is a circuit diagram of a basic interlocking counter. Figure 65 is a network block consisting of 3 interlocking counters. 156 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page. )

498290 A7 __B7___ 五、發明說明(M) ---------I----· I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線- 圖。第66圖,係3個互鎖式計數器同步時之時序圖。第67 圖,係3個互鎖式計數器中1個相位較快時之時序圖。第 68圖,係3個互鎖式計數器中1個相位較慢時之時序圖。 第69圖,係3個互鎖式計數器之相位不同時之時序圖。第 70圖,係由排列成正方形格子狀之互鎖式計數器所構成之 網路方塊圖。第71圖,係由排列成六角形格子狀之互鎖式 計數器所構成之網路方塊圖。.第72圖,係使用訊號分配用 解碼器輸出中之3號及5號,產生輸出訊號之互鎖式訊號 分配電路之電路圖。第73圖,係使用訊號分配用解碼器輸 出中之3號及5號,產生輸出訊號之互鎖式訊號分配電路 之時序圖。第74圖,係基本之同步式振盪電路之電路圖。 第75圖,係使用輸入電阻之同步式振盪電路之電路圖。第 76圖,係使用晶體振盪器時之同步式振盪電路之電路圖。 第77圖,係由3個同步式振盪電路構成之網路方塊圖。第 78圖,係3個同步式振盪電路同步時之時序圖。第79圖, 係3個同步式振盪電路中1個相位較快時之時序圖。第80 圖,係3個同步式振盪電路中1個相位較慢時之時序圖。 第81圖,係3個同步式振盪電路相位不同時之時序圖。第 82圖,係在3個同步式振盪電路上投入電源時之時序圖。 第83圖,係由排列成正方形格子狀之同步式振盪電路所構 成之網路方塊圖。第84圖,係由排列成六角形格子狀之同 步式振盪電路所構成之網路方塊圖。第85圖,係與移動式 攝影機、視覺裝置、顯示器、聲音合成裝置及聲音辨識裝 置通訊之中央控制裝置之方塊圖。 157 [本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公爱1 ^ _ 498290 A7 _B7 五、發明說明( •【符號說明】 1 人工眼球 2 視覺裝置 4 使用者終端機 5 監視終端機 6 資料庫 7 視訊裝置 8 通訊網路 10 移動式攝影機 11 影像取得裝置 12 影像記憶裝置 14 邊緣資訊產生裝置 15 邊緣資訊形成裝置 16 物體/背景分離裝置 17 位置/大小檢測裝置 20 攝影機/環境座標轉換裝置 21 影像/環境座標轉換裝置 22 位置選擇裝置 23 運動控制裝置 24 控制指令輸入裝置 25 振動指令產生裝置 26 攝影機指令產生裝置 27 區域正規化裝置 29 影像辨識裝置 158 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 --線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 發明說明( ai) 30 辨識結果保持裝置 31 環境理解裝置 32 計時裝置 33 環境地圖保持裝置 34 物體位置推算裝置 35 物體計數裝置 36 物體數保持裝置. 37 幾何解析裝置 38 模式匹配裝置 39 影像保持裝置 40 遮罩裝置 41 色彩資訊產生裝置 42 傾斜度檢測裝置 44 位置/大小/傾斜度檢測裝置 51 位址匯流排 52 資料匯流排 53 位址緩衝器 54 位址解碼器 55 資料緩衝區 56 內部資料匯流排 57 旗標暫存器 58 旗標解碼器 59 旗標編碼器 60 狀態暫存器 159 --------------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·' -丨線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 發明說明( 61 前輸入資料暫存器 62 結果資料暫存器 63 輸出資料暫存器 64 上輸入資料暫存器 65 下輸入資料暫存器 66 左輸入資料暫存器 67 右輸入資料暫存器 68 前輸入移位暫存器 69 前輸入計數器 100 陣列運算元 101 處理器 102 記憶體 103 控制器 105 虛擬陣列運算裝置 110 資料處理裝置 111 數位影像 112 粗邊緣資訊 113 粗邊緣資訊影像 114 邊緣資訊 115 形成邊緣資訊影像 116 低解析度數位影像 117 低解析度粗邊緣資訊影像 118 低解析度切出粗邊緣資訊影像 119 切出粗邊資訊影像 160 ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂: -1線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _B7 五、發明說明 120 切出數位影像 121 切出作成邊緣資訊影像 131 重複資訊 132 重複資訊影像 141 物體區域 142 物體區域影像 143 分離物體區域 144 正規化區域 145 正規化影像 146 樣板影像 147 匹配結果影像 148 遮罩影像 151 三角形之邊緣資訊 152 三角形之內側區域 153 三角形之外側區域 154 虛線狀態之三角形邊緣資訊 155 虛線三角形之內側區域 156 虛線三角形之外側區域 157 前方三角形之邊緣資訊 158 後方三角形之邊緣資訊 159 前方三角形之內側區域 160 後方三角形之內側區域 161 雙重三角形之背景區域 162 2個重疊之圓形邊緣資訊 161 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A7 __B7___ V. Description of the Invention (M) --------- I ---- · I I (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Line-drawing. Fig. 66 is a timing chart when three interlocked counters are synchronized. Figure 67 is a timing diagram when one of the three interlocked counters has a faster phase. Figure 68 is a timing diagram when one of the three interlocked counters has a slower phase. Figure 69 is a timing diagram when the phases of the three interlocked counters are different. Figure 70 is a block diagram of a network composed of interlocking counters arranged in a square grid. Figure 71 is a block diagram of a network composed of interlocking counters arranged in a hexagonal grid. Figure 72 is a circuit diagram of an interlocking signal distribution circuit that uses output signals 3 and 5 in the decoder output to generate an output signal. Figure 73 is a timing diagram of an interlocking signal distribution circuit that uses output signals No. 3 and No. 5 to generate an output signal. Fig. 74 is a circuit diagram of a basic synchronous oscillation circuit. Figure 75 is a circuit diagram of a synchronous oscillation circuit using an input resistor. Figure 76 is a circuit diagram of a synchronous oscillation circuit when a crystal oscillator is used. Figure 77 is a block diagram of a network composed of three synchronous oscillator circuits. Fig. 78 is a timing chart when three synchronous oscillation circuits are synchronized. Figure 79 is a timing diagram when one of the three synchronous oscillation circuits has a faster phase. Figure 80 is a timing diagram when one of the three synchronous oscillation circuits has a slower phase. Fig. 81 is a timing chart when the phases of the three synchronous oscillation circuits are different. Fig. 82 is a timing chart when power is supplied to three synchronous oscillation circuits. Figure 83 is a block diagram of a network composed of synchronous oscillator circuits arranged in a square grid. Figure 84 is a block diagram of a network composed of synchronous oscillator circuits arranged in a hexagonal lattice. Fig. 85 is a block diagram of a central control device that communicates with a mobile camera, a visual device, a display, a sound synthesizing device, and a voice recognition device. 157 [This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x 297 public love 1 ^ 498 290 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (• [Symbol] 1 Artificial eyeball 2 Vision device 4 User terminal 5 Monitoring Terminal 6 Database 7 Video device 8 Communication network 10 Mobile camera 11 Image acquisition device 12 Image memory device 14 Edge information generation device 15 Edge information formation device 16 Object / background separation device 17 Position / size detection device 20 Camera / environmental coordinates Conversion device 21 Image / environment coordinate conversion device 22 Position selection device 23 Motion control device 24 Control instruction input device 25 Vibration instruction generation device 26 Camera instruction generation device 27 Area normalization device 29 Image recognition device 158 (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again.) Installation-line · This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7 Description of the invention (ai) 30 Identification result holding device 31 Environmental understanding device 32 Timing device 33 Environment map holding device 34 Object position Estimation device 35 Object counting device 36 Object number holding device. 37 Geometric analysis device 38 Pattern matching device 39 Image holding device 40 Mask device 41 Color information generating device 42 Tilt detection device 44 Position / size / tilt detection device 51 Address Bus 52 Data bus 53 Address buffer 54 Address decoder 55 Data buffer 56 Internal data bus 57 Flag register 58 Flag decoder 59 Flag encoder 60 Status register 159 --- ----------- Loading --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · '-丨 Line · This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Mm) 498290 A7 B7 Description of the invention (61 before input data register 62 result data register 63 output data register 64 upper input data register 65 lower input data register 66 left input data register 67 Right input data register 68 Front input shift register 69 Front input counter 100 Array operator 101 Processor 102 Memory 103 Controller 105 Virtual array computing device 110 Data processing device 111 Digital image 112 Rough edge information 113 Rough edge information image 114 Edge information 115 Form edge information image 116 Low-resolution digital image 117 Low-resolution coarse edge information image 118 Low-resolution coarse edge information image 119 Cut out Rough-edged information image 160 ----------------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order: -1 line-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention 120 Cut out digital image 121 Cut out to create edge information image 131 Repeat information 132 Repeat information image 141 Object area 142 Object area image 143 Separate object area 144 Normalization Region 145 Normalized image 146 Template image 147 Matching result image 148 Mask image 151 Triangle edge information 152 Triangle inner area 153 Triangle outer area 154 Triangle edge information of the dotted state 155 Inside area of the dotted triangle 156 Outside area of the dotted triangle 157 Edge information of front triangle 158 Rear triangle Shape edge information 159 Inside area of front triangle 160 Inside area of rear triangle 161 Background area of double triangle 162 Two overlapping round edge information 161 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明(//f) 163 前方圓形之內側區域 164 後方圓形之內側區域 165 雙重圓形之背景區域 171 色彩資訊 172 色彩資訊影像 181 邊緣資訊影像 182 8附近 183 8個移動源重複資訊 184 移動源重複資訊影像 201 功能柱 204 A/D轉換電路 207 攝影元件 208 平行/串列轉換電路 211 行動電話 212 電池 213 刺激產生器 214 電極陣列端子 215 連接器 221 中央控制裝置 222 顯示器 223 控制鈕 224 喇叭 225 麥克風 226 聲音合成裝置 162 --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 _B7 五、發明說明(/ζ。) 227 聲音辨識裝置 301 環境地圖輸入裝置 302 地圖/本文轉換裝置 303 任意物體數輸入裝置 304 物體數/本文轉換裝置 305 地圖/物體數本文保持裝置 306 指令本文輸入裝置 307 本文/指令轉換裝置 308 控制指令保持裝置 309 數位影像收訊裝置 310 本文插入裝置 311 錄影機信號輸出裝置 321 汽車 322 後面防撞桿中央 323 車頂後方中央 324 行人 325 機車 326 拍攝範圍 331 座位 401a A側振盪用NOR閘 401b B側振盪用NOR閘 402 同步部分及起始化用NOR閘 403a A側振盪用電阻 403b B側振盪用電阻 163 . I----I----— I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 A7 B7 、發明說明 (|Gl) 404a A側振盪用電容 404b B側振盪用電容 405 a A側同步用鎖定電路 405b B側同步用鎖定電路 406a A側同步用NOR閘 406b B側同步用NOR閘 407a A側輸入電阻 407b B側輸入電阻 408 晶體振盪器 410 同步式振盪電路 411 同步式計數器 412 結束値判斷NOT閘 413 互鎖用鎖定電路 414 連動用NOR閘 415 計算用NOR閘 416 互鎖式計數器 421 訊號分配用解碼器 422 訊號分配用鎖定電路 423 訊號分配用NOR閘 424 訊號分配用正反器電路 501 記錄 502 時間戳 503 視覺裝置號碼 504 環境資料數 164 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (// f) 163 The inner area of the front circle 164 The inner area of the rear circle 165 Double circle Background area 171 color information 172 color information image 181 edge information image 182 8 nearby 183 8 moving source repeat information 184 moving source repeat information image 201 function column 204 A / D conversion circuit 207 photographic element 208 parallel / serial conversion circuit 211 Mobile phone 212 Battery 213 Stimulus generator 214 Electrode array terminal 215 Connector 221 Central control device 222 Display 223 Control button 224 Speaker 225 Microphone 226 Sound synthesis device 162 --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Cable -This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (/ ζ.) 227 Voice recognition device 301 Environmental map input device 302 Map / text conversion device 303 Any object Number input device 304 Number of objects / Text conversion device 305 Map / Number of objects Holding device 306 Command text input device 307 Text / command conversion device 308 Control command holding device 309 Digital image receiving device 310 Text insertion device 311 Video recorder signal output device 321 Car 322 Rear bumper center 323 Rear roof center 324 Pedestrian 325 Locomotive 326 Shooting range 331 Seat 401a NOR gate for oscillating 401b NOR gate for oscillating 402 402 Synchronization part and NOR gate for initialization 403a A resistor for oscillating 403b A resistor for oscillating B 163. I ---- I ----— I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) • Thread-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A7 B7, Invention Description (| Gl 404a A side oscillation capacitor 404b B side oscillation capacitor 405 a A side synchronization lock circuit 405b B side synchronization lock circuit 406a A side synchronization NOR gate 406b B side synchronization NOR gate 407a A side input resistance 407b B side Input resistance 408 Crystal oscillator 410 Synchronous oscillation circuit 411 Synchronous counter 412 End of judgment NOT gate 413 Interlock lock circuit 414 Interlocking NOR gate 415 Calculation NOR gate 416 Interlocked counter 421 Signal distribution decoder 422 Signal distribution lock circuit 423 Signal distribution NOR gate 424 Signal distribution flip-flop circuit 501 Record 502 Time stamp 503 Visual device number 504 Environmental information Number 164 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

498290 A7 _B7 五、發明說明( [ί、 505 種類 506 位置 507 物體數 508 數位影像 701 影像壓縮裝置 702 影像傳送裝置 ----------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線· 165 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)498290 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention ([ί, 505 types 506 positions 507 objects 508 digital images 701 image compression devices 702 image transmission devices --- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) Line · 165 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

498290 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 1·一種資訊收集系統,係由連接於通訊網路之至少1 個人工眼球及至少1個使用者終端機所構成,其特徵在於 前述人工眼球具備移動式攝影機、視覺裝置、及通訊 裝置; 前述移動式攝影機,係具有用來進行搖攝、俯仰、翻 滾、及變焦之機構中之至少1.個; 前述視覺裝置,係從前述移動式攝影機所拍下之動態 影像取得數位影像,產生前述數位影像中物體之種類、位 置、及個數、以及控制用來進行前述搖攝、前述俯仰、前 述翻滾、及前述變焦之前述機構; 前述通訊裝置,係將前述數位影像、前述種類、前述 位置、及前述個數中至少1個傳送至前述使用者終端機, 以及將對應前述搖攝、前述俯仰、前述翻滾、及前述變焦 之控制指令從前述使用者終端機接收,並傳送至前述視覺 裝置; 前述使用者終端機,係具備中央控制裝置、顯示器、 及控制按鈕,以產生由前述控制按鈕所指定之前述控制指 令; 前述中央控制裝置,係將前述數位影像、前述種類、 前述位置、及前述個數中至少1個從前述通訊裝置接收, 以及將前述控制指令傳送至前述通訊裝置; 前述顯示器,係用於顯示前述數位影像、前述種類、 前述位置、及前述個數中至少1個。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 Printed clothing A8 B8 C8 D8 by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Application for patents 1. An information collection system consisting of at least one artificial eyeball and at least one user terminal connected to a communication network , Characterized in that the artificial eyeball is provided with a mobile camera, a vision device, and a communication device; the mobile camera is provided with at least one of a mechanism for panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming; the visual device Is to obtain a digital image from the dynamic image captured by the mobile camera, to generate the type, position, and number of objects in the digital image, and to control the pan, tilt, roll, and zoom The aforementioned mechanism; the aforementioned communication device transmits at least one of the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number to the user terminal, and corresponds to the aforementioned panning, the aforementioned pitching, the aforementioned rolling, and The aforementioned zoom control instruction is received from the aforementioned user terminal and transmitted to The visual device; the user terminal is provided with a central control device, a display, and a control button to generate the control command specified by the control button; the central control device is a device that converts the digital image, the type, and the foregoing At least one of the position and the number is received from the communication device, and the control command is transmitted to the communication device; the display is used to display at least one of the digital image, the type, the position, and the number One. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 2.—種資訊收集系統,係由在通訊網路上所連接之至 少1個人工眼球、資料庫、及至少1個使用者終端機所構 成,其特徵在於: 前述人工眼球具備移動式攝影機、視覺裝置、及通訊 裝置; 前述移動式攝影機,係具有用於搖攝,、俯仰、翻滾、 及變焦之機構中之至少1個;. 前述視覺裝置,係用於從前述移動式攝影機所拍下之 動態影像中取得數位影像,以及產生前述數位影像中物體 之種類、位置、及個數; 前述通訊裝置,係將前述數位影像、前述種類、前述 位置、及前述個數中至少1個傳送至前述資料庫; 前述資料庫,係用於儲存前述數位影像、前述種類、 前述位置、及前述個數,以及從前述數位影像、前述種類 、前述位置、及前述個數產生統計資料,其使用檢索鍵以 檢索前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置、前述個數、及 前述統計資料; 前述使用者終端機,係具備中央控制裝置、顯示器、 及控制按鈕,以產生由前述控制按鈕所指定之前述檢索鍵 f 前述中央控制裝置,係用於將前述數位影像、前述種 類、前述位置、前述個數、及前述統計資料中至少1個自 前述通訊裝置接收,以及將前述控制檢索鍵傳送至前述通 訊裝置。 2 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 —^1 ^ -----I I niii^^i •線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 _ 六、申請專利範圍 前述顯示器,係顯示前述數位影像、前述種類、前述 位置、前述個數、及前述統計資料中至少1個。 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項之資訊收集系統’ 其中前述使用者終端機具有附喇叭之聲音合成裝置及附麥 克風之聲音辨識裝置中之至少1個; 前述聲音合成裝置,係用於將前述種類、前述位置、 前述個數、及前述統計資料轉換成聲音訊號; 前述聲音辨識裝置,係將由前述麥克風所收集之聲音 轉換成前述控制指令及前述檢索鍵。 4. 一種人工眼球,係具有移動式攝影機及視覺裝置’ 其特徵在於: 前述移動式攝影機,係具有用於搖攝、俯仰、翻滾、 及變焦之機構中之至少1個; 前述視覺裝置,係具有以下6種裝置: 從前述移動式攝影機所拍下之動態影像中取得數位影 像之裝置、用於辨識前述數位影像中物體種類之裝置、用 於檢測前述物體之位置、大小、及傾斜度之裝置、用於計 算前述物體個數之裝置、用於控制進行前述搖攝、前述俯 仰、前述翻滾、及前述變焦之前述機構之裝置、以及用於 輸出前述數位影像、前述種類、前述位置、及前述個數之 裝置。 5. 如申請專利範圍第4項之人工眼球,進一步具備通 訊裝置,前述通訊裝置,係具有用以壓縮前述數位影像之 裝置,以及用以經由通訊網路傳送被壓縮之前述數位影像 3 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent Application Scope 2. An information collection system, at least 1 manual eyeball connected by a communication network , A database, and at least one user terminal, characterized in that: the artificial eyeball is provided with a mobile camera, a visual device, and a communication device; the mobile camera is provided with a pan, tilt, roll , And at least one of the zoom mechanism; the aforementioned visual device is used to obtain a digital image from the moving image captured by the mobile camera, and to generate the type, position, and number of objects in the digital image The aforementioned communication device transmits at least one of the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned category, the aforementioned location, and the aforementioned number to the aforementioned database; the aforementioned database is used to store the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned location, and The aforementioned number, and statistical data are generated from the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, and the aforementioned number. , Which uses a search key to retrieve the aforementioned digital image, the aforementioned category, the aforementioned location, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistical data; the aforementioned user terminal is provided with a central control device, a display, and a control button to generate the aforementioned control button The designated search key f and the central control device are used to receive at least one of the digital image, the type, the position, the number, and the statistical data from the communication device, and control the search key. Send to the aforementioned communication device. 2 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the cooperative— ^ 1 ^ ----- II niii ^^ i • Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Printed 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 _ VI. The scope of the patent application The aforementioned display displays the aforementioned digital images, At least one of the aforementioned type, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned number, and the aforementioned statistical data. 3 · If the scope of patent application The information collection system according to item 1 or item 2, wherein the user terminal has at least one of a sound synthesis device with a speaker and a sound recognition device with a microphone; the sound synthesis device is used for combining The position, the number, and the statistical data are converted into sound signals; the sound recognition device converts the sound collected by the microphone into the control command and the search key. 4. An artificial eyeball, which has a mobile camera and The visual device is characterized in that: the mobile camera includes at least one of a mechanism for panning, tilting, rolling, and zooming; the visual device includes the following 6 devices: from the mobile camera A device for obtaining a digital image from the captured dynamic image, a device for identifying the type of the object in the digital image, a device for detecting the position, size, and inclination of the object, a device for calculating the number of the object, Used to control the aforementioned pan, tilt, roll, and change The mechanism of the apparatus, and the position of the digital image, and means for outputting the number of the aforementioned type. 5. If the artificial eyeball in item 4 of the patent application scope is further equipped with a communication device, the aforementioned communication device is provided with a device for compressing the aforementioned digital image and transmitting the compressed aforementioned digital image via a communication network. 3 paper sizes Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^、申請專利範圍 •、前述種類、前述位置、及前述個數之裝置。 6. 如申請專利範圍第4項之人工眼球,進一步具備刺 激產生器、電極陣列端子、連接器、及電池; 前述刺激產生器,係用以將前述視覺裝置所產生之前 述物體之正規化影像、前述種類、前述位置、前述大小、 及前述位置之變化轉換成電刺激; 、 前述電極陣列端子,係經由前述連接器,將前述電刺 激傳送至腦。 7. 如申請專利範圍第4項、第5項、或第6項之人工 眼球,其中前述移動式攝影機,係裝有集積複數個攝影元 件、複數個A/D轉換電路、及前述視覺裝置之處理器。 8. —種視覺裝置,其特徵在於: 在以格子狀配置之各陣列運算裝置上具備 用以將前述陣列運算裝置起始化之裝置; 用以若無應輸入之二値資訊則結束處理之裝置; 用以輸入前述二値資訊之裝置; 用以將前述二値資訊轉換爲重複資訊之裝置; 用以從代表前述重複資料之重複資料影像之帶域像素 値附近來計算重心,使由前述重心所計算出之移動量影像 化,並成爲移動量影像之帶域像素値之裝置; 用以在每個移動源上,根據前述移動量將代表移動源 重複資訊之移動源重複資訊影像之各帶域像素値移動至移 動位置上之裝置; 用以根據前述移動量將前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素 4 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^, the scope of patent application •, the aforementioned categories, the aforementioned locations, and the aforementioned number of devices. 6. If the artificial eyeball in item 4 of the patent application scope, further includes a stimulus generator, electrode array terminals, connectors, and batteries; the stimulus generator is used to normalize the image of the object generated by the visual device The aforementioned kind, the aforementioned position, the aforementioned size, and the changes in the aforementioned position are converted into electrical stimulation; and the electrode array terminal transmits the aforementioned electrical stimulation to the brain via the connector. 7. For the artificial eyeballs in the scope of the patent application for item 4, item 5, or item 6, wherein the aforementioned mobile camera is equipped with an integrated plurality of photographic elements, a plurality of A / D conversion circuits, and the aforementioned visual device processor. 8. A visual device, characterized in that: each array computing device arranged in a grid is provided with a device for initializing the aforementioned array computing device; and for ending processing if there is no information to be inputted Device; a device for inputting the above-mentioned secondary information; a device for converting the foregoing secondary information into duplicate information; a device for calculating the center of gravity from the vicinity of the band pixel 値 of the repeated data image representing the duplicate data, so that The movement amount calculated by the center of gravity is imaged and becomes a device of band pixels of the movement amount image; for each moving source, according to the foregoing movement amount, each moving source repeating information image representing the moving source repeating information is Band pixel 値 A device that moves to a moving position; used to move the band pixel 4 of the aforementioned repeated information image according to the aforementioned movement amount (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) . •線. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498290 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 ,値移動至前述移動位置上之裝置; 用以在每個前述移動源上,將前述移動源重複資訊影 像之各前述帶域像素値,更新1爲移動過來之前述移動源重 複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値全部之合計以及對應移動過 來之前述重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値之値之合計之裝 置; 、 用以將前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素値’更新爲所有 移動過來之前述重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値全部之合 計之裝置; 用以從前述移動源重複資訊影像之前述帶域像素値全 部來計算傾斜角度之裝置;及 用以輸出前述重複資訊影像之帶域像素値及前述傾斜 角度之裝置。 9.一種視覺裝置,其特徵在於: 以格子狀配置之各陣列運算裝置’係具備處理器、記 憶體、及複數個控制器,前述控制器係具有用以辨識在前 述陣列運算裝置之間所轉送之資料之發送源之前述陣列運 算裝置之裝置以及用以辨識被轉送之前述資料種類之裝置 &gt; 在前述陣列運算裝置中,藉複數個前述控制器係分別 透過訊號線而與鄰接之前述陣列運算裝置之複數個前述控 制器中之1個,以使前述陣列運算裝置與鄰接之前述陣列 運算裝置同時傳送複數個前述資料。 10·—種視覺裝置,其特徵在於··在申請專利範圍第9 5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)• Line. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498290 Printed by A8 B8 C8 D8 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Scope of patent application, 値 Move to the aforementioned mobile position The above device; for each of the aforementioned mobile sources, repeating each of the aforementioned band pixels of the aforementioned mobile source repeating information image, update 1 to be the total of all the aforementioned band pixels of the aforementioned mobile source repeating information image And a device corresponding to the sum of the aforementioned band pixels 値 of the aforementioned duplicate information image that has been moved;, for updating the band pixels 値 ′ of the aforementioned duplicate information image to the aforementioned bands of all the aforementioned duplicate information image that has been moved A device for summing all the pixels 値; a device for calculating the tilt angle of all the aforementioned band pixels 重复 of the information image from the moving source; and a device for outputting the band pixels 値 and the aforementioned tilt angle of the repeated information image . 9. A visual device, characterized in that: each array computing device 'arranged in a grid shape is provided with a processor, a memory, and a plurality of controllers, and the controller is provided with a means for identifying between the array computing devices. A device of the aforementioned array computing device which is a transmission source of the transmitted data and a device for identifying the kind of the aforementioned data to be transferred> In the aforementioned array computing device, a plurality of the aforementioned controllers are respectively connected to the adjacent aforementioned through signal lines. One of the plurality of aforementioned controllers of the array computing device, so that the aforementioned array computing device and the adjacent array computing device which are adjacent to each other simultaneously transmit the plurality of aforementioned data. 10 · —A kind of visual device, which is characterized in the scope of patent application 9 5 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 •項之陣列運算裝置中’使前述控制器全部堆疊’藉以前述 陣列運算裝置間之前述訊號線不交叉。 11. 一種視覺裝置,係由排列成格子狀之複數個虛擬陣 列運算裝置所構成,其特徵在於: 前述虛擬陣列運算裝置係具有處理器、記憶體、及複 數個控制器,前述控制器,係具有前輸入暫存器群,前輸 入暫存器群,係具有至少1個前輸入暫存器及至少1個計 數器,使前述前輸入暫存器作爲移位暫存器,藉以在各前 述虛擬陣列運算裝置中,前述處理器執行排列成格子狀之 複數個陣列運算裝置之程式、前述控制器與鄰接之前述虛 擬陣列運算裝置之前述控制器通訊、前述移位暫存器將排 列成格子狀之複數個結果資料依序輸入並記憶、前述計數 器計算前述結果資料之個數、以及前述處理器從前述移位 暫存器中選擇複數個前述結果資料中之1個並輸入。 12. —種影像感測器,係其功能區塊排列成二維格子狀 ,並具備至少1個攝影元件、至少1個A/D轉換電路、及 至少1個陣列運算裝置;其特徵在於: 前述功能區塊,係將前述攝影元件與前述A/D轉換電 路以1對1接線,全部的前述陣列運算裝置從全部的前述 A/D轉換電路及全部的前述陣列運算裝置中之至少1個輸 入數位訊號,以及全部的前述陣列運算裝置均輸入時鐘訊 號;而且在鄰接之前述功能區塊之間,使各前述陣列運算 裝置間爲1對1接線,藉此來以前述陣列運算裝置對於前 述攝影元件所拍下之動態影像進行影像處理。 6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) t· •線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 13. —種影像感測器,係其功能區塊排列成二維格子狀 ,並具備複數個攝影元件、複數個A/D轉換電路、至少1 個平行/串列轉換電路、及至少1個虛擬陣列運算裝置;其 特徵在於: 前述功能區塊,係將前述攝影元件及前述A/D轉換電 路以1對1接線,在每個前述攝影元件之頻寬上將複數個 前述A/D轉換電路及前述平行/串列轉換電路接線’全部的 前述虛擬陣列運算裝置從全部的前述平行/串列電路及全部 的前述虛擬陣列運算裝置中之至少1個輸入數位訊號’全 部的前述虛擬陣列運算裝置均輸入時鐘訊號;而且在鄰接 之前述功能區塊之間,使各前述陣列運算裝置間以1對1 接線,藉此來以前述虛擬陣列運算裝置對於前述攝影元件 所拍下之動態影像進行影像處理。 線_ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 14. 如申請專利範圍第12項或第13項之影像感測益’ 其中前述功能區塊,係具有用以產生前述時鐘訊號之同步 式振盪電路及用以計算前述時鐘訊號之脈衝數之互鎖式計 數器;排列成二維格子狀之前述同步式振邊電路’係藉與 鄰接之前述同步式振盪電路接線而構成第1之互鎖裝置; 排列於二維格子狀之前述互鎖式計數器,係藉與鄰接之前 述互鎖式計數器接線而構成第2之互鎖裝置。 15. —種互鎖裝置,係由排列成正方格子狀及六角形格 子狀之互鎖式計數器所構成,其特徵在於: 前述互鎖式計數器,係具備同步式計數器、結束値判 定用NOT閘、互鎖用鎖定電路、互鎖用NOR閘、及計數 7 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 * 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 器用NOR閘;藉由前述結束値判定用NOT閘所輸出之互 鎖訊號讓相鄰之前述互鎖式計數器停止計數’以使全部之 前述互鎖式計數器之計數値一致。 16. 如申請專利範圍第15項之互鎖裝置,其中前述互 鎖式計數器,係具備用以判定前述計數値之結束値之結束 値判定用NOR閘;前述同步式計數器’係具有同步淸除裝 置與同步載入裝置。 17. 如申請專利範圍第15項或第16項之互鎖裝置,其 中至少1個前述互鎖式計數器,係具備訊號分配用解碼器 、訊號分配用鎖定電路、訊號分配用NOR閘、及訊號分配 用正反器電路,並使輸入訊號成爲時鐘訊號週期之正數倍 〇 18. —種互鎖裝置,係由排列成正方格子狀及六角格子 狀之同步式振盪電路所構成,其特徵在於: 前述同步式振盪電路,係具備2個振盪用NOR閘、2 個振盪用電阻、2個振盪用電容、2個同步用鎖定電路、2 個同步用NOR閘、及起始化用NOR閘,並藉從由前述振 盪用電容所輸出之同步訊號使鄰接之前述同步式振盪電路 之時鐘訊號相位錯開,以使全部的前述同步式振盪電路之 前述時鐘訊號相位一致。 19. 一種互鎖裝置,其特徵在於: 係在申請專利範圍第18項之前述同步式振盪電路中具 有2個輸入電阻而構成。 8 本^張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱3 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂-· -線_498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Scope of Patent Application • In the array computing device of the item, 'the aforementioned controllers are all stacked', so that the aforementioned signal lines between the aforementioned array computing devices do not cross. 11. A visual device is composed of a plurality of virtual array computing devices arranged in a grid, characterized in that: the virtual array computing device has a processor, a memory, and a plurality of controllers; It has a front input register group, a front input register group, which has at least one front input register and at least one counter, so that the foregoing input register is used as a shift register, so that In an array computing device, the processor executes a program of a plurality of array computing devices arranged in a grid, the controller communicates with the controller of an adjacent virtual array computing device, and the shift register is arranged in a grid. The plurality of result data is sequentially input and memorized, the counter calculates the number of the result data, and the processor selects one of the plurality of result data from the shift register and inputs it. 12. An image sensor with functional blocks arranged in a two-dimensional grid, and provided with at least one photographic element, at least one A / D conversion circuit, and at least one array computing device; its characteristics are: The aforementioned functional block is a one-to-one connection between the aforementioned imaging element and the aforementioned A / D conversion circuit, and all of the aforementioned array computing devices are selected from at least one of all the aforementioned A / D conversion circuits and all the aforementioned array computing devices. A digital signal is input, and a clock signal is input to all of the aforementioned array computing devices; and between the adjacent functional blocks, a one-to-one connection is made between the aforementioned array computing devices, so that the aforementioned array computing devices are used for the aforementioned The motion image captured by the photographic element is image processed. 6 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) t · • Line · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Scope of patent application (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 13. —An image sensor whose functional blocks are arranged in a two-dimensional grid, and has a plurality of photographic elements, a plurality of An A / D conversion circuit, at least one parallel / serial conversion circuit, and at least one virtual array computing device; characterized in that the aforementioned functional block is a pair of the photographic element and the aforementioned A / D conversion circuit; 1 wiring, wiring a plurality of the aforementioned A / D conversion circuits and the aforementioned parallel / serial conversion circuits over the bandwidth of each of the aforementioned imaging elements' all the aforementioned virtual array computing devices from all the aforementioned parallel / serial circuits and all At least one of the aforementioned virtual array computing devices inputs a digital signal 'all of the aforementioned virtual array computing devices have input clock signals; and in adjacent adjacent functional blocks Between the array among the one-to-one arithmetic unit wiring, thereby to virtual array operation to the image processing apparatus for the motion pictures captured by the photographic element. _ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 14. If the image sensing benefits of the 12th or 13th in the scope of the patent application are applied, the aforementioned functional block is a synchronous oscillator circuit for generating the aforementioned clock signal. And an interlocking counter for counting the number of pulses of the aforementioned clock signal; the aforementioned synchronous edge-shaping circuits arranged in a two-dimensional grid form a first interlocking device by wiring with an adjacent synchronous oscillation circuit; The aforementioned interlocking counters arranged in a two-dimensional grid form a second interlocking device by wiring the adjacent interlocking counters. 15. —An interlocking device is composed of interlocking counters arranged in a square grid shape and a hexagonal grid shape, characterized in that the aforementioned interlocking counters are provided with a synchronous counter and a NOT gate for determining the end of the frame , Interlocking Lock Circuit, Interlocking NOR Gate, and Counting 7 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) 498290 A8 B8 C8 D8 * Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System VI. Apply for NOR gate for patent range device; use the interlock signal output by NOT gate to stop the adjacent interlocked counters to stop counting according to the aforementioned termination / determination so that the counts of all the aforementioned interlocked counters are consistent . 16. For example, the interlock device of the scope of application for patent No. 15, wherein the aforementioned interlocked counter is provided with a NOR gate for determining the end of the aforementioned count, the end of the count, and the determination; the aforementioned synchronous counter is provided with synchronous elimination Device and sync loading device. 17. If the interlocking device in the scope of patent application No. 15 or No. 16, at least one of the aforementioned interlocking counters is provided with a signal distribution decoder, a signal distribution lock circuit, a signal distribution NOR gate, and a signal The flip-flop circuit for distribution, and the input signal becomes a positive multiple of the clock signal period. 18. An interlocking device is composed of synchronous oscillation circuits arranged in a square grid and a hexagonal grid. It is characterized by : The aforementioned synchronous oscillating circuit includes two NOR gates for oscillation, two resistors for oscillation, two capacitors for oscillation, two lock circuits for synchronization, two NOR gates for synchronization, and a NOR gate for initialization, The phase of the clock signals of the adjacent synchronous oscillation circuits is shifted from each other by the synchronization signal output from the oscillation capacitor, so that the phases of the clock signals of all the synchronous oscillation circuits are consistent. 19. An interlocking device, characterized in that it is constituted by having two input resistors in the aforementioned synchronous oscillation circuit of the 18th scope of the patent application. 8 This standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 Public Love 3 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-· -Thread_
TW90107654A 2000-04-13 2001-03-30 Information collection system, mechanical eyeball, vision device, image sensor, and interlocking device TW498290B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2000111675 2000-04-13
JP2000138125 2000-05-11
JP2000174616A JP2001359082A (en) 2000-06-12 2000-06-12 Artificial eyeball
JP2000236461 2000-08-04
JP2000322422 2000-10-23

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW498290B true TW498290B (en) 2002-08-11

Family

ID=27531489

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW90107654A TW498290B (en) 2000-04-13 2001-03-30 Information collection system, mechanical eyeball, vision device, image sensor, and interlocking device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW498290B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI771432B (en) * 2017-06-29 2022-07-21 日商住友化學股份有限公司 Unique portion detecting system and unique portion detecting method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI771432B (en) * 2017-06-29 2022-07-21 日商住友化學股份有限公司 Unique portion detecting system and unique portion detecting method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Deng et al. CNN based semantic segmentation for urban traffic scenes using fisheye camera
US20230360254A1 (en) Pose estimation method and related apparatus
CN101356546B (en) Image high-resolution upgrading device, image high-resolution upgrading method image high-resolution upgrading system
US20210125338A1 (en) Method and apparatus for computer vision
WO2020134528A1 (en) Target detection method and related product
US20140085501A1 (en) Video processing systems and methods
JPWO2012153447A1 (en) Image processing apparatus, video processing method, program, integrated circuit
US20140300758A1 (en) Video processing systems and methods
JP6944135B2 (en) Image processing device and image processing method
WO2000016259A1 (en) Visual device
CN112927362A (en) Map reconstruction method and device, computer readable medium and electronic device
CN114332530A (en) Image classification method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
CN109691109A (en) Multi-angle of view imaging system and method
WO2021067032A1 (en) Audio/video electronic device
CN116012445A (en) Method and system for guiding robot to perceive three-dimensional space information of pedestrians based on depth camera
CN112508839A (en) Object detection system and object detection method thereof
TW498290B (en) Information collection system, mechanical eyeball, vision device, image sensor, and interlocking device
JP3963424B2 (en) Visual equipment
CN100442819C (en) Interlock device
Daithankar et al. ADAS vision system with video super resolution: need and scope
CN116434173A (en) Road image detection method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN206691008U (en) A kind of vehicle-mounted viewing system and vehicle
WO2001041448A1 (en) Data acquisition system, artificial eye, vision device, image sensor and associated device
JP2001204757A (en) Artificial eyeball
CN114462580A (en) Training method of text recognition model, text recognition method, device and equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent